| l E m; - n | * | l l |  r~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~:
*    W|2|      ll*
-tE* i|A.9 r:
_ gl il kwA _ _               i_'..
_ * t a:; ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~iT i_ 
I _  =Z1  _  1  3i~iel lzi  _ I I z i 
l _ _ _ _ _  -_ I I - l _  _  tS ilE.~~~~~~~~~~~~
I *  fi |E-  ||IIlI*
I    _ _  _     iIS 
HI — *-         IIgi          X




1   7                  Lit
AR                          cl
VERiTAS
WE
_IURIBTSrN
s.QUAEK15-PENjr,,,,jl
Uiul             8




7I


















THE REAL
HAWAII
ITS HISTORY AND
PRESENT CONDITION
INCLUDING
THE TRUE STORY OF THE REVOLUTION
(A Revised and Enlarged Edition
of " The Boston at Hawaii")
BY
LUCIEN YOUNG, U. S. N.
DOUBLEDAY & McCLURE
COMPANY: NEW YORK
MDCCCXCIX




I




PREFACE.


During the period of seven months before and
seven months after the overthrow of the Hawaiian
monarchy, in r892 and I893, I was a Lieutenant on
board of the U. S. S. Boston, stationed at Honolulu. The period was one of intense political
activity and feeling in that city, and the development of republican sentiment, ending in the overthrow of Queen Liliuokalani, interested me greatly.
The people of Honolulu, of all classes and nationalities, are hospitable, social, and communicative, to a
greater degree than those of any other country I have
ever visited. Within a few weeks after my arrival
I was upon terms of more or less friendly intimacy
with nearly all of the leading men of all parties. I
was more particularly brought into personal contact
with leading royalists, they frequently discussing
their plans and projects, without reserve, in my
presence.  The evident transition state of the
country, and the great importance, both from a commercial and a military standpoint, of Hawaii to the
United States, caused me to study the people and
the situation, as well as the past history of the
country, most diligently, and to keep full current
notes of the results of my observations and studies.
Upon my return to the United States in the fall
of 1893, I wrote out these notes.
About this time the report of Commissioner
Blount stating that the Hawaiian monarchy had
vii




viii


Preface.


been overthrown through the agency of the American Minister and the Boston, the letter of Secretary Gresham to President Cleveland recommending the restoration of ex-Queen Liliuokalani, and
the attempts of the President to carry such recommendation into execution, became public.
Knowing of my own knowledge that much of
the evidence upon which Mr. Blount based his report was utterly false and unreliable; that his conclusions were, if anything, more misleading than
his evidence, and that a deadly wrong had been and
was being done to the diplomatic and naval officers
of the United States who were in Honolulu at the
time of the revolution, I desired to immediately
publish nmy manuscript, and in compliance with
the regulations of the Navy Department, submitted
it to the Honorable Secretary of the Navy for his
inspection, and requested permission to have it
printed. No reply was made to my request for
two months, when I was forbidden to publish it.
Since the late change of administration I have
revisited Hawaii, brought my statements up to date
in some respects, and obtained the permission of
Secretary Long to publish my manuscript.
I am aware that, in some respects, this is a contribution to by-gone history, and that popular interest in the subject-matter does not exist to the
degree that it did when it was fresh in the public
mind, but the rank injustice done to Minister
Stevens and Captain Wiltse, the Commander of the
Boston, both of whom are now dead, and their




Preface.               ix
associates, and the wicked and malicious misrepresentation and criticism to which they have been
subjected, have impelled me, as a duty to the living and the dead and to historical accuracy, as well
as in defense of American good faith and the fair
name of the Republic, to put on record the facts,
which I know to be true from my personal observation and investigation.
LUCIEN YOUNG.
WASHINGTON, D. C.,
May 8, 1898.




I




CONTENTS.
CHAPTER I.
Early History of the Hawaiian Islands and
the Reign of Kalakaua,. 
CHAPTER II.
The Reign of Liliuokalani,.. 
CHAPTER III.
Honolulu, the Capital of Hawaii, 
CHAPTER IVHow the Time was employed in Honolulu,
CHAPTER V.
Population, and Description of the People,
CHAPTER VI.
Native Games and Sports,..
CHAPTER VII.
The Hawaiian Religion....
CHAPTER VIII.
Resources, Past and Present,....
CHAPTER IX.
Land Tenure,....


PAGE
I
20
36


50
68


100. II4. 132


CHAPTER X.
Trip to the Other Islands and the Volcano, 
xi


I45




xii                 Contents.
CHAPTER XI.                 PAGE
The Revolutionary Act of the Queen... i60
CHAPTER XII.
The Landing of the Boston's Troops,..      177
CHAPTER XIII.
Establishment of the Provisional Government,..                                 194
CHAPTER XIV.
Temporary American Protectorate,..      2o8
CHAPTER XV.
Foreign Interference and Treaties,.          225
CHAPTER XVI.
Ex-parte Investigation by United States
Commissioner,...... 241
CHAPTER XVII.
Efforts to Restore the Ex-Queen, and Establishment of the Hawaiian Republic,.      260
CHAPTER XVIII.
The Strategic Value of Hawaii,.... 284
CHAPTER XIX.
The Hawaiian Islands become an American
Possession,....... 297
APPENDIX,........307
A. Land-B. Coffee-C, Sugar-D. Population and Area-E. Schools-F. Climatic Conditions-G. Exports and Imports-H. Strategical
Position-I. Cost of Living, Transportation,
etc. -J. Freight, Passenger and Postage Rates.




LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
Raising the American Flag on Annexation Day, August 12, 1898,.      Frontispiece
Hawaiian Products: Cocoanut Trees
and Fruit, Mangoes and Breadfruit,... Facing page                2
Map of Hawaiian Islands,..          i       4
Liliuokalani,....                20
Native Riding Costume,,                      38
Nuuanu Avenue-Honolulu,.                  40
The Palace-Honolulu,.                      44
Native Flower-Sellers-Honolulu,                 66
Taro Patch and Plant, and Tamarinds,            76
Surf-Riding-Waikiki, Honolulu,,             86
Packing Pineapples-Pearl Harbor,.             130
Rainbow Falls-Hilo,..                   148
Lake of Molten Lava-Kilauea,.                  56
Pineapple Ranch, and Plowing a RiceField,...    "     182
Loading Sugar-Cane,....      "     196
Camp Boston-Honolulu,...      "     210
The Government Building-Honolulu,        "     214
Strategical Map of Hawaiian Islands,.   "     286


xiii








CHAPTER I.


EARLY HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS AND
THE REIGN OF KALAKAUA.
Prior to the bloodless revolution in the Hawaiian
Islands, on January I7th, 1893, resulting in the
overthrow of a semi-barbaric monarchy, a large
number of people in the United States hardly knew
of their existence, beyond a vague recollection of
having read of Captain Cook and the Sandwich
Islands in their school books. It was not an uncommon occurrence for the merchants of Honolulu
to receive letters directed to the " Hawaiian Islands,
West Indies."  Such was the interest of the majority of the people of the United States, especially
in the eastern section, in regard to this most important group of islands in the North Pacific, destined in
the near future to become more important to the west
coast of the United States than the zEgean Islands
were to the commercial enterprises of the ancient
Phoenicians. The simple overthrow of the Hawaiian monarchy would have created but a mere ripple
of interest that would have soon merged into the
ordinary wave of human progress; but when the
resulting Provisional Government appealed for
political union with the United States, and the adherents of the defunct royalty accused the sailors of
the United States Cruiser Boston of having assisted
in their overthrow, the Hawaiian Islands became




2


American Naval Policy.


well known through the press comments. But as
the general statements published at the time bore
the same relation to rumor and canard that bread
bore to liquor in Falstaff's tavern bill, I propose to
give an historical account of facts as obtained from
personal observation and various sources of information during a stay of fourteen months in the
islands on a man-of-war. The official documents
bearing upon the subject are so easily accessible
that I have not republished any of them, and from
the smallness of this volume I have not considered
it of sufficient importance to quote authorities. It
is sufficient to say that all statements of fact herein
contained are either of my own knowledge or the
result of careful and painstaking study and investigation conducted upon the ground.
The United States has for many. years found it
necessary to maintain a constant naval force in the
waters of the Hawaiian Islands to protect its growing interests and defend its treaty rights against
political agitation and foreign intrigue. In pursuance of this policy, the United States Cruiser Boston,
on which I was serving at the time as an officer,
was ordered, in August, IS92, to relieve the U. S.
S. San Francisco at Honolulu. The Boston is one
of the most formidable cruisers of the new navy, of
the superstructure class, of three thousand tons displacement and a maximum speed of fifteen and a
half knots per hour. Her crew consisted of 280
officers and men, well organized and drilled. The
main battery consisted of two 8-inch central pivot




C(0CA- NUT GIROVE          COCOA-N UT>




0




Trip to HonoZulu.


3


high-powered guns mounted in echelon, and six
6-inch high-powered guns mounted in broadside
pivots. The secondary battery consisted of two 6 -pounder, two 3-pounder, and i-pounder rapid-fire
guns; two 47mm., two 37mm. revolving cannon;
Gatling guns, torpedo outfit, and small arms.
We passed through the Golden Gate, bound for
the Hawaiian Islands, on the Ioth of August, 1892.
A short stop was made at Santa Cruz, and from
there we took our parting look at the California
coast, steering direct for the Island of Oahu. The
occurrences on our voyage from Santa Cruz to
Honolulu were, like the generality of modern sea
trips, too trivial to be interesting, and too unvaried
to afford amusement. No fables of the ancients
were realized, and Neptune offered no resistance
to our invasion of his watery empire; nor did we
see the beautiful goddess Amphitrite skimming the
surface of the deep, seated in her coral chariot,
drawn by mermaids and surrounded by musical
neriads. In fact, we encountered none of the adventures or wonders that surrounded the celebrated
voyage of AEneas. We simply had a smooth sea,
fine weather, a light northeasterly breeze, and an
occasional sight of a passing sailing vessel; yet all
on board were cheerful.
Early in the morning of the 24th of August we
made out Koko Head, a novel and attractive landmark on the eastern extremity of the Island of
Oahu. In a few hours thereafter we rounded picturesque Diamond Head, a lofty extinct volcano,




4


Location of Islands.


which marks the entrance to a long roadstead on
the south of the island. Steering along parallel
with a coral reef that protects the shore from the
ocean swell, we soon passed through a narrow entrance in the reef to the snug harbor of Honolulu,
the capital of the island government.
The Island of Oahu, the most populous, although
the third in size of the Hawaiian group, is about
forty miles long and twenty-three wide, and in appearance remarkably picturesque. As viewed from
Honolulu on the south, a chain of lofty mountains extends from back of Diamond Head the entire length
of the island. The elevated plain of Ewa separates
this range from another parallel mountain range
lying west of Honolulu. The main range is seamed
by deep, shady ravines, which spread out in rolling
valleys until they join the plain upon which Honolulu is situated. The whole island is volcanic, and
in many parts extinct craters of large dimensions
may be seen; but many ages have elapsed since any
eruption took place. In fact, all the islands of the
Hawaiian Archipelago are of volcanic origin, and
are situated in the Northern Pacific Ocean, just
within the limits of the tropics, extending for nearly
four hundred miles in a direction from southeast
to northwest, from I8~ 50' to 23~ 05' north latitude, and from I54~ 40' to 16I~ 50' west longitude from Greenwich. They are some 2,100 miles
from San Francisco, 3,800oo miles from Auckland,
4,400 miles from Sydney, 3,400 miles from Yokohama, and 4,800 miles from  Hongkong. They












Early Voyagers.


5


consist of eight principal islands and several islets.
Of these only seven of the largest are inhabited,
namely: Hawaii, Maui, Oahu, Kauai, Molokai,
Lanai, and Niihau. The bulk of population and
the principal industrial and mercantile enterprises
are on the first five. The eight islands combined
have an area of 6,740 square miles, of which Hawaii, from which the group takes its name, contains 4,210 square miles; Maui, 760; Kauai 600
and Oahu about the same, and Molokai 270 square
miles.
This group of islands was first discovered in the
sixteenth century by Juan de Gatan, the navigator
of one of the Spanish expeditions in the Pacific
during the period when the flag of Spain domi-:ated in the waters of that ocean. The name given
to this archipelago by Gatan was Islas de Mesa, or
Table Land. From the evidences to be found in
old documents and charts, corroborated by native
tradition, there are several other instances where
these islands, during a remote epoch, were visited
by white people, but they did not come into prominence until rediscovered by Captain Cook in I778,
nearly three hundred years after the time of Gatan.
Captain Cook was in command of an English expedition in search of a northern passage from the
Pacific to the Atlantic, and by accident came upon
these islands; and in honor of his patron, the Earl
of Sandwich, the first lord of the admiralty, he
gave them the name of The Sandwich Islands. From
that time on, and especially after the visit of Van



6    Foreign Aggression-Ancient Rule.


couver, the islands became of great importance to
the maritime world, and a bone of contention to
the European powers for their possession. The
officials of France and England took every advantage of the primitive simplicity of the people, who
had existed for ages, isolated and unknown tothe
rest of the world. They commenced a series of
petty annoyances and vexatious interferences with
the island government which on several occasions
gave the foreign representatives pretexts for action
with a view to the ultimate subversion of the native government and seizure of the islands. Timely
interference and threatening demands of United
States officials, of U. S. men-of-war, and Ameriican diplomacy were all that preserved the independence of the islands.
At the time of the discovery of the Hawaiian
Islands they were inhabited by a race of Polynesians living under a social organization strikingly
similar to that of Europe in the tenth and eleventh
centuries. They had kings, who were hereditary
suzerains, having under them a lot of vassal chiefs,
who were granted certain tenures in consideration
of military service, leaving the common people
the mere privileges of villains. The power of
these petty sovereigns was limited only by the endurance of the subjects, while the priesthood exercised an unlimited authority in the " tabu," which
means "prohibited," or forbidden under the penalty
of death. As might be expected, where so many
small kingdoms existed within such narrow limits,




Kamehameha I.


7


war was of frequent occurrence, until a powerful
chief, from the Island of Hawaii, gradually conquered the whole of the island and then the entire
group, over which he ruled with great ability, wisdom, and good sense for a period of twenty four
years, under the title of Karnehameha I. It was
during this reign that the influence of the white
race began to assert itself and the whole social and
political condition of the people became revolutionized, the power of the heathen priests destroyed,
and the way paved for an easy introduction of
Christian civilization by the American missionaries,
who landed for the first time in I820, the year following the death of Kamehameha I.
During this long and vigorous reign, in which
the chiefs remained in undisputed possession of
their lands, there was developed a sentiment favorable to permanent individual rights, which brought
about a remarkable change from feudal to hereditary succession; followed ultimately by the buying
and selling of lands. White foreigners in consequencebecame land-owners. In 8S33 Kamehameha
III came to the throne, and acting under the influences of the incoming tide of civilization and recognizing the defenceless condition of the common
people, he, a few years later, proclaimed a " Bill of
Rights," which at once transformed a feudal despotism into a constitutional monarchy. The Bill
of Rights was followed in 1845 to S847 by the organization of an executive ministry, the creation of
a judiciary department, and the adoption of pro



8


First U. S. Treaty.


visions for an adjustment of land tenure; and in
1852 a constitution was promulgated forming the
basis of others which followed. A legislative body
was created, consisting of thirty nobles, appointed
by the crown, and not less than twenty-four representatives elected by universal suffrage. This constitution was so modified in I864 as to require both
branches of the legislative body to sit and vote
together in the same chamber, and the suffrage of
the people was restricted by a property qualification
and the ability to read and write; provisions which
remained in force until I887.
From the very first, and throughout the ninetyfour years in which the Kamehamehas reigned over
the islands, American influence dominated over that
of all other foreign countries in Hawaiian affairs.
American institutions were adopted, the American
school system inaugurated, and American laws
enacted and put in force, developing property interests, commercial associations and political education almost identical with those of any State within
the American Union. To protect and foster these
growing interests the United States, as early as I8zo,
established a commercial agency on the Hawaiian
Islands, and, in I823, Commodore Jones of the
United States Navy negotiated a treaty of commerce and navigation, which, though it was not ratified at Washington, was the first treaty ever negotiated by the Hawaiians with any foreign power.
From time to time thereafter naval vessels of the
United States visited the islands, and on several




America and England.


9


occasions protected the autonomy of the native government against the English and French aggressions, based upon trumped-up claims of their respective consular agents. In I842 the independence
of the islands was practically recognized by the
United States, the commercial agency was elevated
to a diplomatic position by the appointment of a
Commissioner, and in I863 the rank of the United
States diplomatic representative was again raised
to that of Minister Resident.
During this entire period the continued and steady
decrease of the native race, the creation of agricultural necessities and growing of sugar cane, importation of Oriental contract labor, together with
the rapid growth of the foreign population, gradually developed a condition favorable to a political
evolution calculated to disturb the internal affairs
of the government, and injure those foreigners who
had invested money in commercial enterprises in
the islands. As long as the Kamehameha race of
kings governed the islands, American interests wer:
in no danger of being subverted, through internal
intrigue, by those of any other foreign power; but
in i874, when the last of that dynasty, Kamehameha V, died, the political affiliations with the
English intriguers became alarming and necessitated a renewed energy on the part of American
residents and officials to maintain their commercial
and political supremacy. Hence after a year's experience of political confusion and uneasy agitation under the elected King, Lunililo, David Kala



I o      Election Riol-Kalakaua.


kaua, supported by the American residents, was
chosen, after a stormy election, by the legislature
to fill the vacant throne, in opposition to Queen
Emma, the widow of Kamehameha IV. Emma
was thoroughly imbued with British sympathies
and most hostile to the commercial interests of the
United States, and her native followers, supported
by the English and a lot of irresponsibles or refugees, bitterly contested the election. They organized a formidable riot and surrounded the CourtHouse and, when they saw they had lost by a large
majority, attacked the building and assaulted the
members, driving them from the legislative hall and
killing several. Sailors and marines from the two
American men-of-war in the harbor landed, and
after suppressing the riot, maintained order in the
city of Honolulu until Kalakaua was secure on the
throne. An English warship also landed men, but
they did not interfere.
Kalakaua was only a high chief, in no way related to the extinct royal family, and was reputed
to be the illegitimate son of a negro cobbler who
had emigrated to the islands from Boston. Before
his elevation to the throne, he was a pettifogging
police-court attorney.  He had held subordinate
positions under the government, from which he had
been discharged for corruption and incompetence.
He drank and gambled inordinately. The assumption of authority afforded him ample means of displaying his natural instincts-those of a Polynesian
savage. At times he would disguise these instincts




Kalakaua's Character.


II


under a social polish and the appearances of a
gentleman.  He was superstitious, sensual, and
corrupt, and, with the assistance of a class of adventurers of the same type as himself for advisers,
it was not long before he committed overt acts in
opposition to the promises made to those who
placed him on the throne, and sowed the seeds of
discontent that ultimately led to the overthrow of
the monarchical form of government. His principal adviser and counsellor was an unscrupulous
ex-Mormon missionary who had apostasized from
and swindled that church, who aided him in
estranging the native element from the whites,
resulting in a theretofore unknown intense race
hatred. A secret society was established, in which
childish mysteries were combined with obscene
forms gathered from the ancient religion of the
Hawaiian Islands. Kalakaua became the head of
this society, and in the course of time undertook
the role of a god, and as such constituted himself
the divine guide to the native clergy, and impressed the native race with the fear of himself as
a " kahuna," a witch doctor, who assumes to pray
people to death or cure the sick at will. One of
the great privileges enjoined upon the head of this
polytheistic church was to appear among the believers, bereft of all attire, and perform unspeakable rites to prove himself fit for heathen worship.
On one occasion, as late as i89o, the King came
out upon a dais stripped to the skin, and, in the
presence of several hundred pagans, at a secluded




1 2


Ka la k aa's Policy.


place near Honolulu, fully proved himself an adept
in all the filthy performances required by his native
followers-performances of such an indescribably
barbarous nature as can only be found among the
savages inhabiting the South Sea Islands.  He
would have songs chanted by the native women at
the great functions of the court, which were simply
exaltations of his powers to employ and gratify the
baser passions, and wherever he went his train of
attendants sang obscene songs and danced lewd
dances. To afford a better opportunity for entertaining his favored courtiers and a few special
tourists who wished to witness the savage customs,
he caused to be built a large boat-house, in the
harbor of Honolulu, and the scenes enacted there
beggar description.  Gambling, lewd practices,
immoral exhibitions, drunken carousals, and the
abominations of the hula dance, all combined to
establish his reputation as a prince of good fellows
with his large retinue of dissipated dependents.
By wholesale bribery, the use of soldiers at the
polling places, and general debasement of the
electorate and the appointment of legislators to
lucrative offices while they still held their seats in
the legislature, he was enabled to carry through
pernicious and extravagant legislation against the
will of the people. In short, he became absolute
ruler.
With such power unopposed it only required a
little flattery on the part of his various disreputable
counsellors to work the King's vanity and ego



Primacy of the PaczfJc.


I3


tism up to the point of aspiring to the " Primacy of
the Pacific." In consequence an old vessel was
purchased and fitted out at great expense, and in
command of a worthless, drunken, half-pay English naval officer, and manned by boys from the
reform school and a few low whites, she was dispatched as a man-of-war, with an embassy to
assume a protectorate over the Samoan Islands, as
a beginning. On December 26, i886, an unworthy
half-caste by the name of Bush was sent as envoy,
accompanied by a secretary and other attaches, to
King Malietoa. Upon the arrival of the embassy
they became the object of hostile demonstrations by
the representatives of the German firm who had
instigated the revolution then existing in Samoa.
The embassy were driven from the hotel, and taking refuge in a Samoan house, gave themselves up
to dissipation.  Bush gathered around him the
lowest kind of half-castes and beach-combers, and,
with a decided appetite for native beverages and
mixed drinks, he went on a protracted spree. He
was run out of the window at the hotel for insulting
remarks, and his disreputable, lewd, and intemperate habits, together with an attempt to introduce
the hula, disgusted even that savage, Malietoa, who
asked for his recall, and thus ended the attempt at
the confederation of the Pacific.  The riotous
drunkenness and mutinous conduct of the officers and
men of the man-of-war were such that a German
gunboat had to interfere, and the vessel was
ordered to return to Honolulu. The captain took




14


Kalakaua's Coronation.


her, instead, to Pago Pago, where he exchanged her
small arms for gin and had a month's debauch.
Finally she was brought back, the captain dismissed and the vessel sold.
Failing to become Emperor of Polynesia, Kalakaua was not content with the mere title of King,
so, after being on the throne for nine years, he determined upon a useless and expensive coronation,
the ceremonies of which would convey to all
nations evidence of his autocratic authority. Three
years were consumed in preparing for this great
pageant. Bombastic notices were sent to all the
powers apprising them of the event and inviting
their representatives to be present.
To gratify another of his whims and still further
clothe his already overburdened egotism, his extravagant dependents caused to be celebrated, at great
expense and legislative appropriation of a large
sum, the fiftieth anniversary of his birth. The
festivities were to extend over a fortnight but were
somewhat curtailed by inclement weather. Receptions, presentation of costly gifts, torchlight
illuminations, a great feast and grand ball were
the general features of this birthday jubilee, winding up with a hula that was so obscene as to offend
even some of his depraved associates. The printer
who printed the programme of the dances, prepared
by Kalakau himself, was fined for " publishing indecent literature."
These unpleasant details, which fall far short
of the truth, are given merely to show the




Mass-Meeting of r887.


I5


King's utter unfitness for his position. On his
return from a trip around the world, where he
had managed to deceive the high officials of each
country he visited by a correct demeanor, modest dress and a knowledge of languages, his innate barbarism, escaping from the long imprisonment on this trip, again asserted itself in bolder
relief. The rapidly increasing revenues occasioned
by the treaty of reciprocity with the United States
were not sufficient to support the expensive and
puerile extravagances of Kalakaua, and to meet
them he had recourse to exemption money from
lepers, unlawful rental of government lands, abuse
of the franking privileges, embezzlement of public
funds, and gross official corruption, which hardships upon the people but hastened the inevitable. The financial benefits of the treaty of reciprocity with the United States had the effect of
encouraging a spirit of forbearance towards himnr
but the patience of the respectable foreign element
and progressive natives at last became exhausted
when the King accepted a large bribe from a Chinaman for an opium license for which he had already
taken a larger bribe from another Chinaman. A
secretcommittee of safety was organized and quietly
armed, and on the 3oth of June, I887, an enthusiastic mass-meeting passed resolutions to the effect
that the administration of the Hawaiian government
had ceased, through corruption and incompetence,
to perform its legitimate functions and afford protection to person and property, A committee
waited upon the King and exacted from him specific




I6


Constitution of z887.


pledges, within twenty-four hours, of future good
government on the basis of a new constitution.
Kalakaua appealed to the foreign diplomatic representatives to help him out of the dilemma, and they
not only refused but advised him to accept the
demands of the mass-meeting. Realizing his consummate guilt, and fearing the absolute loss of his
crown, the King, much to the surprise of the
revolutionists, who expected a fight, pusillanimously agreed to comply with all the demands of
the citizens. His most capricious and profligate
counsellor was removed from office and banished
the country, and a reform ministry appointed, one
that was in thorough sympathy with the people.
The King was compelled to sign a new constitution, which was subsequently ratified by a vote of
the people, in conformity with the demands of the
mass-meeting.
The general provisions of this constitution made
every male resident of Hawaii, of American or European descent, who had lived there a year and
taken an oath to support the constitution and laws
of Hawaii a legal voter, and distinctly enlarged the
measure of Hawaiian citizenship. The King was
deprived of the absolute right of veto, and the responsibility for the government was placed upon a
cabinet, subject to removal only by a vote of the
legislature elected by the people. Instead of the
nobles being appointed by the crown they were
chosen by a special electorate composed of citizens
possessed of an annual income of at least $600, or




Constitution of fI887.


I7


unencumbered property to the value of $3,000,
which practically gave to the whites the choice of
one-half of the legislature.  Another principal
measure in the new constitution prohibited members of the legislature from holding any civil office.
Emerging thus from an era of bombastic display,
political corruption, and gross irregularities, the
King was left as a mere figure-head. A large element of the population at first desired the total
abolition of the monarchy; but, after mature deliberation, they again exhibited their forbearance, and
permitted the King to be tried once more, under the
restrictions implied in the new order of administration. At the same time, it was explicitly understood and clearly foreseen that should the monarchy again fall into the hands of adventurers and
repeat its imbecility and corruption, it would cease
to exist, as it did on January the I7th, IS93. Kalakaua signed the new constitution under duress, and
ever after he sought opportunities to regain his lost
power.   It is remarkable how patiently the foreign element endured and how considerate they
were with this semi-barbaric monarchy. To a close
observer, however, it was plainly apparent that the
foundation of an ultimate abrogation of the monarchy had been laid, and the time was not far distant when it would cease to exist.
Princess Liliuokalani, a sister of the King, had
been appointed heiress apparent. She strongly disapproved of her brother's assent to the reform constitution. In I889 she joined what was known as




1s     iliuokalani —Revolution of i889.


the Wilcox plot for the overthrow of the new government and the establishment of herself on the
throne. The entire plot was concocted in her
home. Wilcox, a half-caste, who had been educated in Italy, at a military school, was to lead an
armed revolt, which he did, the rendezvous and
arming taking place at Liliuokalani's home. Wilcox succeeded in getting together a few natives
and a band of disreputable loafers and surrounded
the palace. The same people who brought Kalakaua to terms and enforced the reformations of
ISS7 reorganized and, after a small skirmish, drove
the insurgents to cover, killed nine, and took the remainder prisoners. Upon the first fire the military
ardor of Wilcox left him, and he immediately deserted his followers and took cowardly refuge in an
old gasolene tank lying in the palace yard, where
he remained, until the rest surrendered.  The
support thus given the King encouraged him in his
efforts to recover his lost royal prerogatives, and
he was able to find weak white judges to misinterpret the provisions of the new constitution and
pervert its plain meanings in his favor. However,
the principal constitutional limitations were maintained and the King up to his death remained simply the head of a constitutional government. The
country became prosperous, taxes easy, internal
improvements were carried on and the revenues
were economically expended.
The once strong and athletic constitution of
Kalakaua at last began to break down, under the




Death of Kalakaua.             19
influences of long and excessive dissipation, and in
order to recruit his failing health the King visited
California, in an American man-of-war. On the
2oth of January, I89i, he died at the Palace Hotel,
San Francisco. Upon the arrival of his remains
at Honolulu, nine days later, his sister, Mrs. Dominis, who was acting as regent in the absence of the
King, was proclaimed Quleen under the title of Liliuokalani, and took the oath to support the constitution.




CHAPTER II.


THE REIGN OF LILIUOKALANI.
The frequent attempts of Kalakaua to regain
autocratic authority after the adoption of the new
constitution led many whites and natives to believe
that he would be the last Hawaiian monarch, and
had it not been for the sudden surprise accompanying the tragic return of his remains, it is more than
likely Liliuokalani would never have succeeded to
the throne. It was a well-known fact that she had
evinced on every occasion her disgust at her
brother's acceptance of the new constitution, and
her determination to re-establish the royal pretensions at the first opportunity was manifest. She
had, on two occasions before her succession, entered
into a conspiracy to supplant her brother even at
the expense, if necessary, of walking over his dead
body. The moment of her accession she fully
intended to abrogate the constitution forced upon
Kalakaua and proclaim one, instead, containing all
the old prerogatives exercised by the Kamehamehas
prior to the existence of a constitution. The cabinet
of the late King, realizing the danger of such an
act, promptly called upon the Queen in a body, and
induced her to take the oath to support and maintain the existing constitution. Liliuokalani had
greater courage and was more politic than her
brother, but resembled him in superstition, selfish20




.............Il




I.,. I.  z




Character of Liliuokal'ani.


2f


ness, and savage ignorance, and, like him, was a
hater of whites and a promoter of race prejudices.
She was such a mistress of dissimulation as to
convince many well-meaning people that she was
a strict believer in the Christian religion, whereas
she was an idolatress and worshipper of the old
pagan superstitions of Hawaiian mythology. She
kept continually around her kahunas and heathen
sorcerers to counsel and assist her, and women of
openly bad character were her constant personal
attendants. She was addicted to the grossest social
vices-in a word, she was the true sister of Kalakaua, and the attempt on her part to guide the
destinies of not only her native subjects, but the
thousands of Europeans in the Islands, was simply farcical. The course of affairs became evident
at once. The Queen's first official act was a refusal to recognize the ministers of the late King,
and they, upon the advice of the supreme court,
resigned, and a ministry was appointed in their
stead, composed of men she selected under promise,
made in advance, that they would appoint her
favorite paramour to the marshalship of the kingdom. This official had absolute command of the
police force, and during the Queen's reign he was
really vested with the powers of a dictator. His
advice was paramount over that of the cabinet
ministers, and it was not an uncommon procedure
for him to openly, and in the presence of her
ministers, oppose or nullify their contemplated
acts.




23         Policy of Liliuokalani.
Following the appointment of her ministry, the
Queen gradually began to interfere in the removal
of government officials, and to appoint incompetent
and irresponsible favorites in their stead.  She
stubbornly, but with more tact and diplomacy than
Kalakaua, usurped autocratic authority in all directions, yet with all her power and heathen practices
she was unable to obtain the fealty of her brownskinned subjects. The reason for this was due
to the fact that Liliuokalani was not a Kamehameha, but only the sister of Kalakaua, both
of whom were the legitimate grandchildren of
the first man who was hanged for murder in
the Hawaiian Islands; and the occupancy of the
throne, established by Kamehameha, whom the
natives regarded as of divine origin, by this lowly
bred family, was keenly felt and bitterly opposed.
When she made a tour in state through her realm,
the natives received her with scant hospitality.
Her retainers could not even procure a supply of
food from the natives, much less presents, as was
the custom with ancient Hawaiian monarchs
travelling through the kingdom. Fear and dissatisfaction on the part of some whites and many
natives led to a secret organization having for its
purpose the remedy of existing evils. The Queen,
hearing of the formation of this conspiracy, at
first conceived the idea of using those engaged in
it in the promulgation of a new constitution, and
if unsuccessful in obtaining their co-operation, to
become familiar with their intents, so as to be able
at any moment to remove every possible danger of




Liliuokalani- Conspiracy of z892.  23


disturbance in her contemplated coup. To this
end she encouraged them in their designs, and
diplomatically obtained at least a promise of their
neutrality, if not their acquiescence. Then, relying upon the absolute support of the royal guard
and the police force, she caused to be prepared a
constitution granting her the powers which she
craved, which she proposed to promulgate.
Everything was working well, when a large number of men, known to be hostile to her, were admitted to membership. In a feeling of unconcealed
distrust, and fearing the legal opposition of the
legislature recently chosen by the people, and soon
to meet, she urged immediate action. Wilcox, who
was one of the leaders, was sent for and given her
ultimatum, that he and his colleagues must at once
support her plans; and upon his refusal, she broke
up the conspiracy, arrested him and a few others.
They were brought to trial, and although the evidence was clear, she stopped the trial for fear the
true facts would come out. Some of the conspirators fled the country, but others, including Wilcox,
were elected to the legislature. This was in I892.
Before the Queen could do anything else in the way
of changing the constitution, which she had, under
mental reservation, taken an oath to support, the
legislature met. The wire-pulling and political
intrigue for a time were held in check through the
approximately equal strength of three parties that
composed the legislative body. The members were
chosen at the biennial election in February, I892,




24        Legislative Parties, 1892.


and in May following took their seats. They were
divided into Reform, National Reform, and Liberal
parties, and three or four independents. The Reform party was composed of the so-called missionary class, a term applied to all the progressive
whites of American nationality or descent, Germans, and Portuguese. They had for their object
the enactment of laws beneficial to commerce, the
establishment of closer commercial relations with
the United States, the construction of an ocean
cable, and the development of agricultural interests
based upon the minimum taxation for the support
of the government. They supported all legislation
that had for its object the internal improvements of
the country, rigid segregation of lepers and contagious diseases, and were bitterly opposed to autocratic rule or personal power in the Queen.
The controlling power in the National Reform
party was the English and Canadian whites, and
those who had little or no property interests on the
islands; among them were many adventurers
who had immigrated to the islands for personal
gain regardless of the methods of accomplishment.
They favored English interests, and if possible an
English protectorate as against American influences
or commercial supremacy. The Liberal party was
made up from the native members and lower class
of whites and hangers-on at the palace. They had
no policy and cared for none beyond the bribes or
bargains they could obtain from the other two parties to vote in their interests. They were in favor




English H-osthiiy.             2


25


of universal suffrage and the absolute rule and autocracy of the Queen. From the very first day on
which the members of the legislature took their
seats log-rolling, wire-pulling, and political corruption commenced. The Queen had this advantage:
her ministers could sit in the legislature and vote on
all subjects, except on a vote of want of confidence
or impeachment. They were of the National Reform party, that stood closer to the native branch
and strengthened the Queen's power in all legislation
tending to assist her in governmental interference.
The American Minister, realizing the situation, affiliated with the Reform party, and through them he
was enabled to check moves detrimental to the interests of the United States. On the other hand,
the English Minister was an active worker with the
National Reform party, and openly and in public
used every effort to support them and obtain any
advantage beneficial to his country. Having resided in the country for many years and being the
head of a largye family, some of whom had married
into Kanaka families, he had great influence with
the members of the National Reform and Liberal
parties. It was not an uncommon sight to see him
on the floor of the legislative ball, actually lobbying for the passage of some measure detrimental to
American interests, or beneficial to British interference, openly expressing his approval or disapproval of current debate. With the assistance of
a simple, benighted, ritualistic English bishop, by
publicly sympathizing with the Queen and her min



26


Jno. L. Stevens.


isters and privately advising both her and the
Liberal and National Reform leaders, he exerted a
powerful influence. But, from a want of tact and
diplomatic knowledge, he relied upon pompous demands'and political intrigue with a class of political
intimates in the legislative body who would give his
secrets away.
The sagacious, well trained and experienced
diplomat of the United States, Mr. Jno. L. Stevens,
quietly sat in his legation, pulled the wires and
every time brought American interests to the front.
So well did he play his cards, resulting on every
occasion in success, that he became a subject of
personal abuse, and an object of intense hatred, by
the leaders of the National Reform and Liberal
parties. On the street and in public places they
would vilify and criticise even his personal and
private conduct, going so far as to attack his domestic way of living, and caused the arrest of his
domestic for some trumped-up offense of a minor
nature, which act was a violation of the national
sanctity of the United States legation. On one occasion a leader of the National Reform party, an
Englishman by birth, and a noble at the time in the
legislature, afterwards a minister of the cabinet, introduced a resolution in the legislature reflecting
upon the official acts of the American Minister, and
so offensive to the United States government that the
House voted to expunge it from the records. In
all these attacks the Queen appears to have aided
and abetted, but the power and activity of the




English InflZuence.


27


Reform  members caused her much uneasiness
and prevented her taking any decided steps towards carrying out her cherished plan of promulgating a new constitution. Therefore, in order to
break the influence of the Reform party and that
of the American Minister, while pretending to
favor the most cordial relations with the representative of the United States, she conceived a plan of
negotiating a loan in England upon a first mortgage of the port dues of Honolulu. A bill to that
effect was subsequently introduced by one of her
ministers, the same who had on a previous occasion
offered the attack upon the American Minister, but
it was promptly voted down. The English Minister, together with his wife, actively engaged on the
floor of the legislature working for the support of
this measure, all of which came under my personal
observation while a visitor to the hall.
An English adventurer, a man of no principle
but of fine education, was employed by the Queen
on a stipulated salary to write articles, in support of
her political course and against American interests,
for a local paper owned by the Queen, using the
name of her coachman as the author of these publications. A position was given to him as manager of the Hawaiian Hotel for his board, that he
might, by his position as such, come in contact
with tourists, win their sympathy, and fill them
with misinformation concerning political conditions. In fact every means was used to further the
Queen's ambitious designs, and the business depres



28


Arrival of Boston.


sion, financial uneasiness, and national danger
which naturally followed deterred any commercial
agency or local corporation from negotiating any
kind of loan from abroad or at home. Everything
was in a chaotic state, with inevitable ruin apparrent on all sides. The large sugar interests that
came into existence through the gratuity of the
treaty of reciprocity with the United States were,
in addition to the agitated condition of affairs,
affected by the provisions of the McKinley tariff,
and plainly foresaw that unless something was
done towards establishing closer commercial relations with the United States they would suffer, and
they therefore became more active in support of the
Reform party, which was the party most strongly
favoring American interests.
Such was the condition of affairs when the U. S.
Cruiser Boston arrived in Honolulu. The U. S.
Flagship San Francisco was relieved, and sailed
for Mare Island Navy Yard, leaving the Boston to
look after American interests and treaty obligations.
The political agitation and uneasiness was so great
that during the entire stay of the Boston in those
waters it was impolitic for her to leave the harbor
of Honolulu, except on two short occasions, and
as a reminder of the force constantly present a battalion of troops was landed once a week and
marched through the streets to the old base-ball
grounds for drill.
The causes of the continued and increasing uneasiness and hostility to the Queen, and finally to




The Macfarlane Cabinet.


29


the monarchy, were the stubborn efforts of the
Queen to trample upon the constitution, and her
persistent interference in politics, both directly and
through her creatures in office, and by bribing native members in the legislature in order to secure
illegal control of that body.
The executive members, or ministry, nobles and
representatives sat and deliberated in one chamber
presided over by a speaker elected by the whole
body. As the Queen attempted to increase her
arbitrary power over the legislative branch of the
government, that body very soon asserted its constitutional prerogatives, and on August 30th, 1892,
voted out the ministry that had consented to her
maladministration. The Queen then, against the
advice of the leading members of the legislature
and the business men of the community, appointed,
on the I2th of September, a ministry headed by E.
C. Macfarlane, an Englishman by birth and sympathies, a naturalized American, and a domiciled Hawaiian. One of his first acts was to introduce and
attempt to push through the legislature a bill authorizing a loan from England upon a first mortgage
of the port dues of the port of Honolulu, a steppingstone to a commercial protectorate by Great Britain,
as was done in Egypt. Associated in this cabinet
with Macfarlane were Sam. Parker, Paul Neumann,
and Chas. T. Gulick, all of whom were of the
National Reform party. In three days after they
qualified an effort was made to vote them out, resulting in 24 for and 21 against their removal. The




30


Zottery and Opium.


question was referred to the judges of the supreme
court, who decided 25 votes were necessary to constitute a constitutional number to pass such a
measure. Meanwhile, on the 4th of October, a
special election was held in Honolulu to elect two
nobles to fill the vacancies made by Macfarlane and
Neumann when they resigned to accept positions
in the cabinet. A native and a half-white, supported by the lottery and opium factions, were
elected over two of the most respectable men in
Honolulu, M. P. Robinson and H. Waterhouse.
This election had a tendency to strengthen the
National Reform party in the legislature, and realizing the danger of such a ministry remaining in
office, some of the Liberal party coalesced with the
Reform party and a few dissatisfied members of
the National Reform party, and on the I7th of
October voted to remove the Macfarlane cabinet.
They carried the want of confidence by a large majority-32 to 15.
The Queen was obstinate, and knowing this,
every irresponsible person in the legislature, and
many out of it, urged their claims for a cabinet position, and failing to obtain their object turned upon
her. In the little native paper, published by the
notorious Bush, she was accused of ignoring the
native claims. When the Queen, on November
ist, appointed a cabinet composed of men of no
personal standing and representing no property
interests, it was voted out in less than two hours
by a vote of 26 to 15, being known as the " Nancy




Wilcox- 7ones Cabzinet.


31


Hanks cabinet," because it made the quickest time
on record. By this time the patience of the members of the Reform party had become exhausted,
and in caucus with their allies they passed a resolution calling upon the Queen to designate a leader,
chosen by a majority of the legislature, to select a
ministry.
A ministerial crisis was imminent and political
agitation alarming; excitement was intense and
business prospects gloomy, with every indication
of a revolution. The Queen for the time being surrendered, and selected a cabinet on the 8th of November, known as the Wilcox-Jones ministry.
This cabinet had the full confidence of the people
and the country felt easy, but it was not long before
the Queen began to dictate to them and to interfere
with their line of policy, which was for retrenchment and moderate legislation.
It soon became known to the public that severe
friction existed between the Queen and the ministry,
and during the last of December it was the talk all
over the town that there would be a vote of want
of confidence against the cabinet. On the 4th of
January, Bush introduced the resolution, and upon
a vote it failed, 19 to 22. This failure to remove
the Wilcox-Jones cabinet insured confidence, and
encouraged the belief amongst the leading citizens,
as well as the American Minister, that the Reform
ministry had come to stay. The Queen, however,
was not contented and did not mean to give up,
but sent for the native members, and by bribes and




3:2


Wilcox Cabinet.


promises obtained their united support to pass the
lottery and opium bills, which every one supposed were dead, she having bargained with the
promoters of these measures, for their support in
return, to put the Wilcox cabinet out. Hopkins,
who was a half-white, and who was elected by the
lottery people, moved their consideration, and they
passed to the second reading, to the astonishment
of everybody, by a vote of 20 to i7; and on the
i ith of January they were rushed through a third
reading on a vote of 23 to 20. This victory so
elated the Queen and her adherents that she took
advantage of the absence of members who had gone
home, and the following day, the I2th of January,
she induced a native member to introduce a vote
of want of confidence in the Wilcox-Jones cabinet,
and they were removed by a vote of 25 to 16.
Upon a canvass of the legislature by her native
followers, she discovered the fact that the vote of
one white man was necessary for a constitutional
majority. To obtain that the Queen sent for C. 0.
Berger, and promised him that his father-in-law,
Widemann, should form a new cabinet if he would
vote with the natives. Berger took the bait, and
to the disgust of his friends voted that way, and the
Reform ministry went out. The Queen had no
intention of permitting Widemann to form a cabinet,
and when, in apparent compliance with her promise,
she sent for him and imposed obligations that
Colburn, a half-white and under a cloud, should
be named as one of the ministry, Widemann




Colburn Cabinet.


33


demurred and he was dismissed. She had made
up her mind to appoint a cabinet that would hold
over during the interim of two years, in the absence
of a legislative body, and be entirely subservient
to her arbitrary whims. Colburn was sent for and
instructed to form a cabinet of the persons she
would name. The native members were instructed
to remain away from the legislative hall on the I3th,
so there would be no quorum on that day to vote the
cabinet out, and the legislature would be prorogued
the following day, at noon. Colburn, upon the request of the Queen, named as his associates, Parker,
Cornwell, and Peterson. Colburn was a man of
unsavory reputation in business matters, while all the
rest were known to be zealous in their support of
the Queen's misrule. The next morning, Saturday,
the r4th of January, I893, the ministry reported to
the legislature that the Queen had signed the lottery
and opium bills, and they became laws, by which
the establishment of opium joints and the licensing
of the sale of opium were to be given out, evidently
to palace favorites. The exclusive franchise to
conduct a lottery was given to a few men representing the Louisiana Lottery Company, which had
just been evicted from Louisiana and was to
remove its establishment from New Orleans to
Honolulu, under a supposed obligation that the
government was to receive $5oo,ooo a year from
that company. This annual revenue was, as a
blind, to be devoted to internal improvements;
and to secure the native votes of the legislature,




34        Prorogalzion of Legislature.


promises were held out to them of lucrative offices,
so dear to the Kanaka heart.
At noon the legislature was prorogued, and the
Queen proceeded to the palace, the approaches to
which were guarded by the government troops,
and the grounds filled by a mob of natives brought
from the other islands and fitted out with new
suits of clothing to give coloring to a so-called
petition, under which the Queen was now to perform her coup d'etat by the proclamation of a new
constitution. This caused her to lose her throne.
During all this time the presence of the American
Minister and of the United States ship Boston was
a source of disquietude to the Queen and her supporters, as they feared interference by the American forces should any attempt be made to gain arbitrary power by force of arms which should result
in injury to Americans or American property. On
one occasion, when it was reported a boat had
landed at Hilo from a wrecked American vessel,
most villainous attacks were made by the royalist
papers upon the American representatives, and it
was while the Boston was away for target practice
the Queen took her fatal step.
It will be seen from the foregoing that the political development of the I-awaiian Islands had been,
in the early years of its transition, from a feudal
and savage despotism into a free and civilized state,
with only a few instances of foreign interference.
Under the Kamehamemhas the fundamental changes
in the social and political organization were effected




Kamehamehas and Kalakaua.


35


without disturbance or bloodshed, and armed resistance and revolutions were unthought of. The
Hawaiian kings sought the counsel and service of
able foreigners in the administration of the government, and there arose no occasion for foreigners to
feel the need of suffrage rights to protect their interests. But with the failure of the Kamehameha
line, Kalakaua set himself to work to undermine
the confidence of natives in foreigners and injected
into the elections the element of intense race hatred.
In place of the diminished prerogatives of the sovereign and the increased privileges of the subject,
by voluntary acts of preceding kings, there was
manifested on the part of Kalakaua a disposition
to extend his royal prerogatives and a return to absolutism. His acts inaugurated a series of revolutions that culminated in that of the I7th of January,
I893. The first was headed by the whites to secure responsible government through a representative cabinet, responsible to the people's elected
representatives. Other revolutions were headed
by the natives, instigated by Kalakaua and Liliuokalani, to regain their lost power, followed at
last by a spontaneous uprising of the whites, who
again asserted themselves in opposition to the revolutionary act of the Queen. They overthrew the
ignorant, selfish, corrupt, and semi-barbarous monarchy and established instead a republican government, as will hereafter be detailed.




CHAPTER III.


HONOLULU, THE CAPITAL OF HAWAII.
The day following the first arrival of the Boston,
the Flagship San Francisco gave a ball in honor of
the officers of the former ship in order to afford an
opportunity for them to meet the people of Honolulu and become familiar with the situation. To
this ball all the leading white and native residents
were invited, and it proved a most enjoyable affair.
Cordial relations were established and invitations
to social gatherings on shore were extended, which
proved to be exceedingly pleasant and beneficial,
reciprocated by frequent dinners, dances, and extensive receptions on board the Boston. At the
first opportunity I went on shore to see the city and
was escorted to the Pacific Club, where I met some
old acquaintances whom I had known in the States
and a number of most estimable gentlemen, with
whom I took lunch. The club-house is well
adapted for such a purpose in that climate, and is
centrally located. Its membership is composed of
the very best men in the city. In a stroll about I
found Honolulu to be a city of about 25,ooo inhabitants, having the appearance of a new England
country town. It is situated on low ground with
lofty hills behind and an untroubled sea in front;
shaded by tropical trees, clothed with a variety of
bloom and laden with the perfume or flowers.
36




Climate of Honolulu.


37


The climate is that of a Washington city spring,
with an average temperature of 7I~. Although as
far south as Havana, the heat is nothing to be compared to that of Key West and Cuba. Honolulu
is tempered by breezes that always blow, and by
rain that falls in intermittent showers. There are
a few broad avenues, but most of the streets are
narrow and go winding aimlessly through the town,
hardly wider than passing teams require and with
sidewalks where but two people can walk abreast.
The residence portion of the city has the appearance of a land of country villas, as each homestead
is surrounded by large yards, botanical gardens,
and tropical trees, most of which have been transplanted from other countries and even improve
upon their native appearance when grown here.
The business portion of the town does not strike
one in an architectural sense, but the street scenes
are most interesting to the stranger. White duck
suits and panama hats give an equatorial glamour;
while the Kanaka in his neglige suit, with floral circles hung about the shoulder, his feet unshod, and
his attitude extremely restful, presents a marked
contrast to the swarm of Orientals in their native
dress, sailors from the men-of-war in the harbor,
and tourists from every civilized country. The
female natives wear a Mother Hubbard gown, a
wreath of flowers called "' leis," and go barefooted.
No one can accuse the female native of prudishness, and her appetite for poi, raw fish, and the
hula dance is unappeasable, while her fondness for




38


People of Honolulu.


gin, licentiousness, and kahuna doctors is a besetting sin. She is an expert on horseback as she
gallops from place to place astride, with body erect
and firm as that of any cow-boy, her divided skirts
flapping to the breeze.
Frequently you meet with the offspring whose
nationality is hard to trace, produced by the intermarriages of Chinese and Kanakas, Japanese and
natives, Portuguese, whites, and half-castes-a sort
of composite issue which is often an improvement
on the mated types. The best class of white people
are as refined, polished, polite, and accomplished
as one will meet with in any city of the civilized
world, and their hospitality is unsurpassed. They
live in luxurious homes, fitted with the products of
American and European art, and are supporters
of every religious and moral movement. Though
largely of an admixture of the New England element, there are many whose ancestry came from
every section of the United States. There are excellent hotels, a large opera house and other places of
amusement; fine churches and magnificent schools
and hospitals.  The sanitary condition of the
town is most excellent; there is a beautiful palace
and commodious government buildings, extensive water-works, majestic scenery, zestful sport,
glimpses of savage life, delightful homes, and all
the attributes of the most perfect state of advanced
civilization.
The town is lighted by a complete electrical
plant with an installation equal to that of any city,




- - ------- - ---








Details about Honolulu.


39


and the telephone system is the best I have ever
seen, with a corps of operators that cannot be excelled in politeness. The telephone is the means
of communicating all manner of information, from
the market order to the arrival of a steamer or the
time of day. The stores are neat and filled with
all the articles of luxury as well as necessaries to
be found in those of the large cities on the continent.  A  system  of street-car lines meanders
through the town, but these are mainly patronized
by the Chinese and lower class, there being a lot
of nice carriages that will take a person anywhere in the town for twenty-five cents. There
are foundries, workshops, and ship-yards, but no
manufactories. Down on the docks it will be
seen, from the character of the freight handled,
that Honolulu is the port of distribution of all
merchandise for the islands, and is dependent on
the industrial enterprises of the country. On the
wharves are bags of grain, cases of goods and machinery of all descriptions; filrniture, bricks, and
cement, on which are marks showing that they
are from abroad. There are no metals or minerals
to be found on the islands, and the iron foundries
are wholly dependent upon the coal and iron
shipped from abroad in sufficient quantities to meet
the necessities of the country. The articles of export are rice, sugar, coffee, raw hides, bananas,
and pineapples.
To the rear of the central portion of the city is an
old extinct crater, called " Punch Bowl," that rises to




40


Suburbs of Honolulu.


an elevation of five hundred feet above the sea-level.
From the summit a fine bird's-eye view of Honolulu
can be obtained. A fine roadway winds about the
slopes that are dotted with the cottages of thrifty
Portuguese. Back of Punch Bowl hill is the famous Tantalus Mountain, up which a splendid road
enables one to obtain a view of surpassing beauty,
from a height of 2,000 feet above the sea-level.
Below is the city, immersed in a wealth of foliage,
as though every quarter of the subtropical world
had been laid under tribute, and beyond this the
broad Pacific meets the gaze. To the west rise
the beautiful Waianae Mountains, in front of
which are the lowlands of innumerable rice fields
and the Ewa plantation beyond the Pearl River
locks. To the east rises the old extinct volcano
called Diamond HIead. On one side is the beautiful and historic Nuuanu Valley, and on the other
side are the cocoanut-fringed shores of Waikiki.
The hillsides are not under a state of cultivation as
a rule, although the soil is fertile and covered with
a rank growth of stiff grass possessing little or no
nourishment for stock. Near the summit of Tantalus the ground has been covered with a thick
growth of transplanted trees and laid out into villa
sites. The land outside of this artificial forest is
covered with the wild guava, which bears fruit as
big as the lemon, and impassable patches of lantana, the seeds of which are scattered broadcast by
an imported bird from India called the mynah.
One of the most beautiful sights in the vicinity of




|~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ l- --------
kW








The Pali-Pearl Harbor.


4I


Honolulu is the trip to what is known as the Pali,
a pass through the mountains to the windward side
of the island, up Nuuanu Valley. The ascent is
gradual for about four miles, through an avenue
lined with handsome houses, set in grounds filled
with rare trees and plants, over an excellent road to
the apex of the pass, down which there is on the
other side a sheer drop of nearly one thousand feet.
It was over this cliff that Kamehameha the Great
drove the remnants of the army of the Oahu chiefs
when he conquered the island. A winding road
down this cliff has been constructed for the convenience of descent. From the north side of this
pass, and far below, the country spreads before the
eye like a relief map, while on each side are sharp
volcanic cones and mountain crags that pierce the
clouds.
Another intensely interesting trip from the city
is a ride on the railroad to Pearl Harbor and the
Ewa sugar plantation. Near Pearl City is Reymond Grove with its large dancing pavilion, a
favorite rendezvous for pleasure-seekers and picnic
parties. The scenery on the road from Honolulu
to Ewa is rather picturesque, with glimpses of
mountain valleys on the one side and rice fields and
the ocean on the other. Pearl Lochs is a favorite
resort for aquatic sports, such as boat-racing and
yacht-sailing. The drives about the city are smooth
and picturesque. They run past groves of cocoanut trees and royal palms, taro patches, where the
poi root is grown, banana plantations, and brackish
ponds where fish are fattened for the market.




42        Waikiki —Ka5iolani Park.


The favorite drive and bathing resort for the
leisure class, white and tinted, is along the road
to Waikiki. This place is four miles fiom the
heart of the city, and is a curved shore line occupied
by lovely villas. The ocean breaks on the coral
reef several hundred yards from the beach, between
which and the shore the water is still and transparent, affording most excellent bathing and fishing,
in water with a uniform  temperature of about
seventy degrees the year round.   The famous
King's Cocoanut Grove is passed on the way, and
just before reaching the beautiful Kapiolani Park
is the little villa of Liliuokalani, close on the beach
and shut in by a high board fence. This little
villa has been the scene of many rather questionable festivities. Kapiolani Park is a government
reservation, and in the center is the race-track,
where some good sport is seen during the race
season, especially on the eleventh of June, or Derby
Day. Between this park and the beach is the Sans
Souci Hotel and bathing houses, where one can
lounge about in reclining chairs or hammocks on
the large porches and enjoy the cool sea breeze,
obtain a fine meal or refreshing draft. The great
annoyances, however, are the insects, which, by the
way, are of foreign importation. In the old times
there were no mosquitoes here; in fact the name of
them is not to be found in the Hawaiian language.
The whaling ships brought the pests in their stagnant
water-butts, and the residents even claim to know
the very ship that brought the first consignment to




.Absence of Snakes.


43


the islands. Be that as it may, the harpooning
gentry are of two kinds-those that trouble by day
and those that ravage by night. The two species
are quite distinct as to size and shape, as well as
habits. The day pest is noiseless and painful,while
the night prowler is noisy and poisonous, and
between the two they make life anything but
pleasant. The centipede and barbed scorpion have
also found their way to the islands, but from the
nature of their food and habits they are no more
poisonous than the honey-bee.  The islands are
exempt from snakes, although a planter once imported some to kill the rats and mice in the cane
fields, but they were killed before they had time to
propagate and no more are allowed to come in.
In order to enjoy the beauties of the mountain
valleys that open out on the plains it is necessary
to go on horseback, as by so doing the head of each
valley can be reached without trouble. In the
Pauoa Valley the ride leads up to a point where, on
the right, the eye overlooks the whole of Manoa
Valley. The latter is closed in by high precipices,
down which slide numerous water-falls, one of
which forms at the base of the precipice a pool of
clear cold water, affording an opportunity for a refreshing bath. The next, or Palolo Valley, is most
interesting to a botanist, as high up in its encircling
peaks is a crater filled with peculiar vegetation,
delicate varieties of ferns and mosses, which are
elsewhere found in small bunches, but here they
entirely cover trunks of trees, and the further one


i




z44         Ferns- Crime-Rotel.
goes along the moist trail the greater is the variety
to be found. Even those who have no special acquaintance with ferns will be struck by the variety
and size of the specimens to be seen here. There
are about one hundred and fifty varieties of ferns
to be found on the Hawaiian Islands.
The paucity of crime is very noticeable, and it is
an uncommon thing for the people to lock their
houses. Such a thing as theft is very rare. The
prison is built on a coral reef extending into the
harbor and connected with the mainland by a narrow road. The prisoners are of many nationalities,
and they do much of the hard labor in the streets
of the city, working under overseers.
The city post-office is in the center of the business
portion of the city, in close proximity to the steamboat landings and large warehouses.  Through
this office the mails from all parts of the world are
distributed to the other islands, and upon the arrival of a mail steamer the scene in the vicinity is
most interesting. The Hawaiian Hotel is situated
in grounds comprising an entire square of about
four acres. This large area affords ample room
for a lawn and beautiful walks, which are laid out
most artistically with flowers, plants, and tropical
trees. There are a number of pretty cottages scattered about the inclosure, all under the hotel management, which afford accommodations for several
hundred guests.  The apartments open out on
broad verandas from which a magnificent view of
the mountains in the rear may be seen through the




~~~~~~~~~~~~"     R~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~......




i                -   I




Public Buildings.


45


tropical foliage that surrounds the balconies. On
the front lawn is an ornamental band-stand where
musical concerts are given upon the arrival and departure of all foreign steamers. Across the street
from the Hawaiian Hotel is the Central Union
Church, but recently completed at a cost of $I30,ooo. It is built of volcanic rock and fashioned
after the most modern church architecture, with a
capacity of seating a thousand or more people.
Diagonally across to the southeast of the hotel
grounds is by far the most attractive building in
Honolulu, the new palace, built in I88o-'Si, at a
cost of over $300,000. It is a very modest piece of
architecture, built of brick and covered with
cement, and is surrounded by i i acres of tropical
park. The interior is finished with many kinds of
native woods that take a high polish. The structure is two stories and a basement, with extensive
balconies. The basement is divided into kitchens,
servants' quarters, and store-rooms. On the first
floor is a large hallway from which a broad stairway ascends. To the right of this hallway was
the throne-room, a plain apartment in white, with
two gilded chairs on a dais at one end and a round
sofa in the center, with carved gilt chairs along
the side of the room. Across the hall and at the
front of the palace was the drawing-room, and oft
this, opening upon a tiled piazza, were the diningroom and royal council chamber. The second
floor had three bed chambers, a library and parlor.
About the various walls were hung oil paintings of




46


Public Buildings.


the royal personages from Kamehameha the Great
to Liliuokalani, royal orders and portraits of distinguished Europeans, and in all this array there
was not the portrait of a single American. This
palace, which had been the scene of court festivities and semi-savage orgies of Kalakaua and his
sister, the ex-Oueen, for a number of years, was
taken by the Provisional Government as an executive building, and as such it is now used.
Just in front of this building, known as Iolani
Palace, is the government building, or Aliiolani
Hall, situated in a spacious ground.  In this
structure are the rooms of the supreme court,
offices of the ministers and other executive offices,
and the legislative hall. In front is an heroic
statue of Kamehameha the Great. From the steps
of this building the Provisional Government issued
its proclamation abrogating the monarchy, and it
was upon its tower that the United States flag was
hoisted when the temporary protectorate was
declared by the American Minister, and afterwards
hauled down by the orders of the United States
Commissioner. Another building of historic interest
is the Oahu College for the education of foreign
children. Through its educational advantages
many distinguished men of the islands have takes
their degrees from  Harvard, Yale, and other
American colleges.
Several charitable institutions ornament the city
and have done much good. One of these is the
Lunalilo Home, an attractive and comfortable place




Hosfital- Schools.


47


for indigent Hawaiians. The Queen's Hospital,
partially endowed by the widow of Kamehameha
IV and partly supported by the government, is
centrally located in the midst of extensive grounds
through which several avenues of rich palms mark
the approaches to the building. In this building
or institution the natives receive treatment free,
and it is open to all nationalities. Just outside the
western limits of the city is the hospital for the
insane;- it consists of a number of small cottages,
and the inmates are of all nationalities. The next,
and one of the finest institutions in the country, is
the Kamehameha School, which was founded and
endowed by Mrs. Bishop, a princess of high standing and great wealth. Since her death her husband
has liberally donated monetary gifts until there has
been more than $I,ooo,ooo spent on its completion
and endownment.
It comprises over thirty buildings in all, about
two miles from town, on a beautiful location of
high ground with the mountains in the rear and
the sea in front, giving a cool and healthy breeze
both night and day. The material from which the
buildings are constructed is a dark gray volcanic
rock, somewhat resembling coarse granite, and
quarried in the vicinity. Connected with the school
is an interesting museum containing Hawaiian
antiquities, a collection which not only illustrates
the ethnology of the islands, but every bird, fish,
insect, shell, or plant, a collection which gives an
accurate and scientific knowledge of the products




48


4Bishop Museum.


of the islands in a remote past. It contains also
an interesting collection of curiosities illustrating
the condition of the Hawaiian people ages ago,
and gives a most excellent idea of the advance in
art made by the natives prior to the advent of the
whites. The Kahilis, the insignia of royalty, are
made of feathers, cylindrical plume-like ornaments,
in the shape of a duster or fly-brush with long
slender handles. On state occasions and royal
processions there was a gorgeous display of these
Kahilis, and the bearers were very close to the
sovereign. A great variety of kapas or native cloth
of different patterns, texture, and color is interesting, and as a manufacture most creditable to Hawaiian industry. From them one can trace the
strip of bark through every process to the finished
product of bark cloth. The handicraft of the
Hawaiian fishermen is well shown here in many
kinds of nets, fish traps and hooks of fine workmanship. Of the last some are made of human
bones, or shells from a tiny size to the large shark
hook that was frequently baited with human flesh.
Wooden calabashes or bowls form another attractive sight, made from the wood of the Koa and
Kou, resembling mahogany and rosewood in color
and graining. Some are for the cooking of fish,
or roasting pig and dog. Others are in size from
the poi-bowl to the great trough in which the body
of a chief was dissected and his bones cleaned, or
for the great cannibal feast, although there was no
cannibalism in Hawaii. The feather cloaks here




Honolulu Harbor.


49


preserved are works of art, of a bright yellow hue,
and made from feathers taken from under the wings
of tens of thousands of birds of a species now
almost extinct, which makes their pecuniary value
much greater than their intrinsic utility. Some of
them are said to be worth more than $Ioo,ooo.
The harbor of Honolulu is very spacious and
stands as the highest foreign port in the world as
to the amount of tonnage of American shipping
visiting it. Improvements at the entrance have
been made so that vessels of the deepest draught
can now go alongside of the docks for handling
freight.
Of late years a Bureau of Information has been
established in Honolulu for the distribution of valuable Hawaiian information to the other countries
of the world. This bureau has done much towards
advancing the business prospects of the islands, and
it will not be long, under the present system of responsible government, before Honolulu will become a great resort as well as commercial center.




CHAPTER IV.


HOW THE TIME WAS EMPLOYED IN HONOLULU.
As soon as the cruiser Boston was secure in the
harbor of Honolulu, on the morning of the 24th of
August, I892, a national salute of twenty-one guns
was exchanged with the Hawaiian battery on shore,
and in the afternnoon of the same day formal calls
were made on the officials of our own and the Hawaiian governments. The following day the Hawaiian Minister of Foreign Affairs, accompanied
by three nobles of the realm, returned the calls and
were received with customary honors and a salute
of seventeen guns on leaving the ship. Officials
of other nations paid visits of ceremony in the
course of the few days following, and the quiet
harbor of Honolulu was disturbed by an endless
roar of cannon as these officials left the ship. On
the afternoon of the 27th of August the flagship
San Francisco got under way and left the harbor
bound for San Francisco. Our men manned the
rigging, and while the band played a few lively
tunes they gave their parting friends three rousing
cheers and God-speed on their homeward voyage.
The San Francisco gone, the Boston settled down
to the task of putting everything in shape for the
protection of American interests on the islands,
and in accordance with the custom on such occasions, and in maintenance of friendly relations, the




Call on LIziimokaanz.5


51


commanding officer, through the United States
Minister, made known to the Hawaiian Minister
of Foreign Affairs his intention of calling upon the
Queen with the officers of the Boston, and desired
to know when it would be most agreeable and convenient. In reply to this request we were notified
the Queen would be pleased to receive us at the
palace at io A. M. on the 29th of August. Accordingly, the commanding and other officers who
could be spared from the ship went on shore
dressed in special full-dress uniform, and, escorted
by the United States Minister Resident, proceeded
in carriages to the palace entrance, where we were
received by the royal guard drawn up in line at a
present arms, with the band playing the national
air of the United States. Ascending by the steps
of the main entrance to the large hall, we were met
at the door of the palace by the Minister of Foreign Affairs and the Chamberlain. After waiting
a few minutes, the Chamberlain threw open a door
on the left of the hall and announced that the
Queen was prepared to receive us. Preceded by
the Hawaiian Minister of Foreign Affairs and the
United States Minister Resident, we followed in
columns of two according to rank, and the presentation of each took place. The Queen was
standing at the further end of the room. On her
left stood four half-white ladies in waiting, and on
her right were four aids, each in the regimentals of
a colonel, and to her rear were the royal kahilibearers. A few compliments were passed, and,




52


52  Liliuokalani.


after a short conversation with the attendants, we
all, according to royal etiquette, backed out. The
ceremony was rather stiff, and the head of the
little semi-savage kingdom appeared to be up in all
the customs of the most powerful monarchs.
Queen Victoria was never more exacting in ceremonious requirements than this relic of barbarism.
The Queen was rather portly, of medium height,
and plainly dressed. She was about 54 years of
age, with a full, round face, broad across the
cheeks, thick lips, rather dull expression, and a
countenance indicative of a severe temper and strong
determination. She was darker than the ordinary
native, showing evident traces of negro blood.
With the exception of one, her maids of honor
were beyond middle life, and were far from being
attractive, either in appearance or intelligence, but
they served the purpose of lending show.
The 2d of September was the Queen's birthday
and we were given the first opportunity of seeing
some of the surviving evidences of Hawaiian
heathenism. The occasion was a great holiday,
and during the day the Boston was dressed aloft,
from stem to stern, with bunting, and a salute of
twenty one-guns fired at sunrise and at sunset.
The Queen gave a reception, " luau," or feast, and
a hula in the palace grounds. The hula, while it
did not possess all the abominable features of vulgarity associated with the ancient dance, was nevertheless hardly calculated to arouse in the audience
any great reverence for the sovereign who made it




The Hula Dance.


53


a part of her formal reception to foreigners. The
word " hula " is a term applied to any dance which
the natives used to accompany all forms of ceremony from a dedication of a temple to the launching of a canoe; the nature of the ceremony implied
the dance, and owing to its extreme vulgarity has
been interdicted by law. This was the last time
the hula was ever placed on exhibition by royalty,
and it is more than likely it will never again be.
Natives came from all quarters to partake of the
feast, and at Pearl River Lochs all kinds of aquatic
sports were indulged in, such as swimming-matches,
boat-races, and yacht-sailing, and in the surrounding country the natives had luaus and hulas that
did justice to the customs of past days of heathenish practices.
One of the ministers of the government, a noble
of distinction in the legislature, took me at night
across wet taro-patches to a secret grass house in
the country, to see a hula as it was given before
having been modified. After witnessing this performance I was not surprised that its main features
are interdicted by law. None but those of the most
depraved sensuality could enjoy its performance.
Not far from the city, and off the road leading
to Waikiki, is an old residence kept by a native
and in this building the tourists were entertained
with this royal sport. A young man of no moral
standing in the community and rather shady in his
habits, but the keeper of a liquor establishment in
Honolulu, a boon companion of the royal family,
usually made the arrangements for the profits he




54


Wreck of the Campbell.


could make out of the sale of a few jugs of cheap
gin for the girls and a commission from the regular fees given by the visitors. On these occasions
the police never interfered, and it was not an uncommon thing to see cabinet officials in attendance
giving countenance to the illegal dance. Even in
the homes of some of the reputed respectable white
residents I have seen the ladies of the house indulge
in the dance, and though somewhat modified it was
still sensual.
The monotony of a long stay in one place was
broken in the latter part of September, when the
news cames that an American merchant vessel, the
William Campbell, had foundered at sea, and that
the first mate in charge of one of the boats, with
five others of the crew, had landed at Hilo, on the
Island of Hawaii. He reported another boat, containing the captain with his wife and child and the
rest of the crew, as missing at sea, making their
way for Hawaii. We got under way at half past
three on the afternoon of the 29th of September,
and stood to the southward and eastward in search
of this missing boat. We passed the Island of
Maui at night, early the next morning sighted the
Island of Hawaii, and at 2 P. M. came to anchor
off Htilo, and sent a boat for the American Consular Agent, who came on board bringing the mate
of the unfortunate vessel. From the information
obtained from the mate we got under way and
stood around to the southward of Hawaii, using
every effort to obtain some information of the miss



A Royal Luau.


55


ing boat. We steamed out to sea and then inshore,
scanning the horizon and the beach with powerful
field-glasses. During the night a signal light was
made out which we supposed to be the long-lookedfor captain of the Campbell. Guns were fired and
rockets sent up to attract his attention, but it proved
to be a native fisherman, and we gave up the search
as hopeless and headed the Boston for Honolulu,
arriving at our old anchorage on the afternoon of
the 3d of October. The boat journey of the mate
from the time he left the abandoned vessel to the
time of arriving at Hilo was the longest ever known
to have been made at sea in a little open boat, being
2,200 miles. The survivors were cared for and
sent to the United States, but the captain was never
heard from.
A few days after our return the keeper of one of
the public institutions gave, in honor of his birthday, a grand luau, to which the Queen and all the
leading natives were invited. An invitation was
also sent to some of the officers of the Boston, myself included. It was given near the city limits and
hundreds were in attendance, old and young. The
reception was held in the house. When all was
ready the spread was given under a thatched grass
shed near by, and for the prominent guests was
laid on a long table in the shape of three sides of a
square, while the common people seated themselves
about a spread on the ground. Facing the opening
of the table were the inevitable and indispensable
hula dancers, keeping time to the thumping on




56


A Royal Luau.


calabashes by some old toothless hags in the rear.
On a raised platform in an alcove was perched the
Queen, and at the proper time she moved to the
table and took a seat, which was the signal for all
to follow. It fell to my lot to be seated between
two half-white damsels and opposite the Queen.
The dishes that were spread before us consisted of
all manner of native delicacies, poi in wooden bowls,
raw fish, roast dog, fowl, and pig, squid, live
shrimps, salted sea-weed, and other condiments of
a similar character. Each individual would thrust
the fingers into a common poi-bowl when a
mouthful was wanted, give a peculiar twist of the
hand, and hold aloft a round ball of the mushy
paste, and when through laughing and talking
push the morsel down the throat. Then he would
reach into a little calabash and pull out a raw fish,
which is considered a special delicacy. Live
shrimp were taken down in the same way. The
slimy squib, with a bad smell and an eye that stares
unhappily about, appeared to be a rare delicacy.
The guests would reach over and break off a toothsome tentacle, which, when it touched the native
palate, made him feel that the choicest part had not
been withheld. It took a strong nerve and stronger
stomach to sit by and see all this, much less eat
anything, and together with the sickening smell of
cocoanut-oil, with which my two neighbors as well
as others had smeared their hair, it made my meal
hardly pleasant. No one was permitted to rise, under
the rules of royal etiquette, until her Majesty had




Preparingfor a Luau.


57


finished her repast. Finally the Queen rose from
the table, greatly to my relief.
The native luau is one of the leading characteristics of Hawaiian hospitality, and from its preparation
to its consummation is exceedingly interesting. It
is seldom given by a single individual, but several persons combine, each adding to the quality and variety
of edibles. Thus one person will supply thepoi, another the pig, dog or fowl, while others will furnish the fish, bananas and other fruit, and they will
give their last fowl or pig for such occasions.
When the great event is determined upon, depending upon the fattening of a certain pig or some
noted occasion, they will all meet at the designated
place and commence the preparations, which entail
a great deal of work, the natives exhibiting an industrial spirit that is never witnessed on any other
occasion. Some will go to the woods for ferns,
ki-leaves, and other plants suitable for decoration;
others will dig the oven in the ground and prepare
the food for cooking, exercising great care in
selecting stones that will not explode as they are
heated. While the food is cooking they make a
spread on the ground, consisting of ferns and kileaves laid out with much care. When the food is
cooked it is taken out and put on the improvised
table piping hot, and each one takes his place,
squatting on the ground with his legs folded under
the body, and the feast commences. "-No knives or
forks are used, but each one eats with his fingers,
and the greatest cordiality and good will prevails.




58


Hzolidays -G. A. R. Post.


They will gorge themselves to such an extent that
for days after they are unfit for anything beyond a
lazy loitering about on the grass, never thinking of
the future. On all occasions like this both male
and female adorn themselves with wreaths of flowers called leis. One of the picturesque scenes inl
Honolulu is a cluster of flower women seated about
on the sidewalk selling flower wreaths of their own
manufacture.
The monotony of every-day life was again broken
on the 28Sth of November by another Hawaiian
national holiday, known as the anniversary of recognition of Hawaiian independence by England and
France. Boat-racing, yacht-sailing, and the usual
luau and games to amuse the crowds were the
main features of the day. New Year, Christmas,
and the holidays of the United States and other
countries were observed with appropriate celebrations. Washington's Birthday, Decoration Day,
and the Fourth of July were observed in such an
enthusiastic manner as to lead one to suppose that
for the time being he was in a typical American
town. The United States flag was exhibited on
every side, and the American patriotism displayed
equal to that of the most ardent supporters of the
free and liberal institutions of the great republic.
On Decoration Day, on the 31st of May, the local
G. A. R. post of 40 old veterans of the civil war in
the United States marched from their encampment
hall to their lot in the cemetery and paid homage
to the memory of their heroic dead by holding




Election of U. S. President.


59


literary exercises and garnishing anew the graves
of their old comrades, of whom there are a number buried there. Appropriate speeches were delivered and the ceremonies were as imposing as
would be found on a like occasion at any national
cemetery in the United States, the government
offices and business houses closing at noon and the
local military as well as the U. S. naval forces participating in the parade.
The day on which the election of the President
of the United States took place polling places were
opened in Honolulu and as much enthusiasm displayed as though their votes were to be counted in
the selection of the executive head of the republic.
A great many votes were cast, Cleveland receiving
a large majority over Harrison. When the steamer,
bringing the news of the result in the States, hove
in sight, the wharves and house-tops were covered
with people anxious to hear the news. Just before
the steamer arrived at the wharf some one on board
formed with his bent arms a large C and it was at
once known who was the successful candidate, the
intelligence being received with cheer after cheer.
The local election for two nobles to fill vacancies
occasioned in the legislature by resignations to
accept cabinet positions was outwardly quiet and
orderly. There was much bribery and wire-pulling among the natives, resulting in the choice of
two candidates put up by the opium and lottery
rings. The average native Hawaiian is a natural
politician, likes to talk and is fond of discussion;




60


oNcztive Character.


open to monetary considerations, defective in logic,
and careful to turn every incident to his own advantage regardless of inconsistencies and with no
regard for the future. His inherited instinct and
intuition lead him to follow the dictates of the chief
under whose rule he was servile, and he has little
power to think for himself. This feeling of dependence was continued under the monarchy and fostered
by some of the foreigners who perpetuated in some
degree these relationships. The native is deficient
as a legislator, possessing no originality or constructiveness, and when some pernicious measure
was proposed in the legislature he readily fell a
prey to demagogic arts. It was to this native
weakness that a minority but aggressive party in
the legislature was enabled, during the legislature
of 1892, to vote out so many cabinets, and, until
near the close of the session, to control legislation.
Lobbyists and local politicians of a character
fashioned after the " heelers " of the tough wards
of New York or San Francisco, unscrupulous and
ready at all times with proper gifts supplied by
the bosses, vied with the Queen's agents in tempting the legislators to do their bidding, and the
native members fond of office, unwilling to work,
and with small salaries readily became willing
tools.
On one occasion I had a very favorable opportunity to witness the methods of political corruption in Honolulu. I was invited bya supporter of
a measure pending before the legislature to attend




Royal Political Aethods.


a luav and drinking bout to be given that evening
to some of the native members of the legislature in
order to obtain their votes on the following day
for the passage of the act in question, which
was opposed by many of the white members.
About seven o'clock in the evening a little redheaded Irishman and a friend of his, both of-the
down-town gentry, called for me at the hotel in a
carriage, and informed me they had been instructed
to take me to the place of rendezvous. When I
was seated in the carriage they drove down town
by one of the drinking establishments and took in
a goodly supply of cheap gin and sour beer. They
then drove to a little shanty situated in the suburbs
of the city. We entered by a back door into a dark
room, and after stumbling over a few more boxes
of gin and beer that had been sent ahead, a door to
a larger room was opened by an old toothless hag,
who was the only female present, who appeared to
be on the most intimate terms with the little politician, as their greetings were of the most familiar
kind. In this large room were gathered many of
the native members of the legislature, and as we
entered they rose and shook hands, receiving us
with the most cordial salutations and alohas. The
degree of secrecy and manner of reception indicated
at once the methods of this little Irish politician, and
it was apparent that nothing was to be said or
known outside of this meeting until after the votes
were cast on the following day. Cheap gin was
immediately passed around, not in small glasses




62


Royal Political Methods.


but by the table-glassful, and many stone jugs
were soon empty. Nothing was said at the time
about the purposes of the gathering, but simple
good fellowship prevailed.  In a short time we
were ushered into an adjoining room where, on the
floor, was the spread or feast in genuine Hawaiian
style, a bottle of beer and a stone jug of gin marking each man's place. The little Irishman took a
seat on the floor at the head of the spread, and his
companion at the foot, my place falling between a
full-blooded Kanaka and a half-caste Chinese and
native, the rest being seated around on the floor.
The old female acted as hostess and waited on the
guests. Drinking and feasting commenced, and
as the legislators began to show indications of the
inner man being propitiated, the wily politician
began to unload his eloquent appeal for the passage
of the bill, and explaining the advantages each
would receive should the bill become a law. Personal flattery, and the legislative importance each
held in the legislative body, were dwelt upon with
much adroitness, and frequently be would hold his
glass on high and propose a toast to the measure,
which was echoed bv each member as he would
drain his glass. Now and then, as the bacchanalian
festivities proceeded, the little Irishman and his
friend would pass around and drink toasts to each
individual, tipping glasses and dexterously dropping a coin into the hand as be passed along.
More gin was brought out, and the capacity of
these sons of the soil was beyond conception.




Royal Political Methods.


63


They emptied jug after jug, but finally the spell
was broken and each exhibited evidences of intoxication, when the politician changed from argument
to threats and demands. By midnight he had
received written pledges from each to vote as directed on the following day. As a divergence, and
in honor of my presence, a native would now and
then fire off a series of word pyrotechnics to the
health of America, and for fear I might not appreciate his love for the United States over and above
that of his colleagues, he would take me into an
adjoining room and explain that he was for
America, and give me advice to beware of the
others, all of whom were said to be sympathizers
of Great Britain. By the time it was all over, every
legislator in the party had inflicted me with the
same dose. At midnight the party broke up, and
as they separated to go to their respective homes
they were informed by the little Irishman that if
they broke their promises on the next day, he would
see that his friends would no longer pay their board
bills, to which an answer was given in a chorus of
drunken shouts that disturbed the still night air.
They all marched into the legislative hall the next
day, and when the bill came up they voted for it
to a man.
I knew repeatedly of legislative acts carried in
this way, especially when the Jones-Wilcox cabinet was voted out and the opium and lottery bills
passed. Such was the hold the common whites or
National Reform party had with the native mem



64


Native Character.


bers of the legislature, and it was no wonder that
the progressive people of the Reform party, representing the tax-payers and property-holders, became
so disgusted that they failed to put in an appearance in the legislative hall after the Jones-Wilcox
cabinet was voted out.
The average native Hawaiian is weak, not
wicked. He is naturally conservative. Under the
Kamehamehas, and now again under the Republic
he responds to honest leadership. The House of
Representatives under the Republic consists of a
majority of natives, who in the absence of the degrading influence of the crown and the National
Reform  party, which has been disintegrated and
absorbed in the ultra royalist faction, have done
good work. The worst enemies of tie native Hawaiian have been the Kalakaua family. He and his
sister, Liliuokalani, ever since their family came
into power, have constantly been the center of a
baleful, degrading influence, exalting immorality,
drunkenness, heathenism, and race hatred, for their
own personal, selfish ends. But for this the native
government and the monarchy could have retained
power indefinitely, without interference or opposition from the whites.
The downfall of the monarchy was the direct
and inevitable result of an attempt to arbitrarily
subjugate men of the Anglo-Saxon race, whose
homes and property were at stake, by illegal
means.
Another important Hawaiian holiday was the
31St of July, known as Restoration Day, the anni



zEnglish Action in 1843.


65


versary of the restoration of Hawaiian independence by the English admiral after the islands had
been seized by the captain of one of the vessels of
his fleet upon trumped-up claims by the consul of
Great Britain. The friction arising from national
prejudicies between the American and English
residents on the islands led to severe troubles between the Hawaiian government and the foreign
powers, which culminated in I843, when the British consul, in a false statement of facts, urged Captain Paulet to demand redress for imaginary wrongs
sustained by his countrymen. Captain Paulet, taking advantage of the occasion, made most unjust
demands, evincing a determination to accept nothing short of the cession of the islands as redress.
rhis demand was eventually complied with under
protest. During the negotiations national feeling
ran high between the American and English residents. Singular as it may seem, there was lying in
the waters of the harbor at the time an American
sloop of war named Boston, which came to the
rescue, as the other United States Cruiser Boston
appeared on the scene of the final overthrow of the
monarchy. In order to enforce his demands, Paulet threatened to bombard the town, but Captain
Long of the Boston notified the English captain
that if any damage should be done to American
property he would immediately open fire upon him
from the Boston, and in support of this threat he
immediately cleared ship for action and placed his
vessel in position for a raking fire of the English
ship. Shortly afterward the United States Frigate




66


Paulct and Thomas.


Constellation, under command of Captain Kearney,
came into the harbor. When made acquainted
with the state of affairs, Kearney showed his disapproval of the English flag flying over the islands
by inviting the Governor and princes on board, and
with the Hawaiian flag at the mainmast-head fired
a salute, and made every effort to show his sympathy for the native people, much to the discomfiture of Captain Paulet. As soon as Admiral
Thomas, then at Valparaiso, Chili, heard of the
cession of the islands, he made sail in his flagship
for Honolulu and restored the rights and prerogatives of the King; the English flag was hauled
down and the Hawaiian flag resumed its place.
The square in the city where the ceremonies took
place is now one of the most attractive garden
spots in Honolulu, and is named after the Admiral,
" Thomas Square."
On this day the usual amusements, luaus, hulas,
and festivities were indulged in. The arrival and
departure of steamers fiom and to the United States,
the Orient and the colonies atiorded another diversion to the dull every-day life of Honolulu, as on
all such occasions the rank, wealth, and beauty of the
city are on hand to decorate their departing friends
with leis and chaplets of flowers until some of them
are so covered up that it looks as though they must
suffocate. The royal band was always in attendance upon such occasions, giving selections of
national and operatic airs. At night a band concert in the grounds of the IHawaiian Hotel or at
Emma Square two or three times a week is another




NATIVE FLOWER SELLERS-ION II.U.




I




BishZoJ Willis —Religion.


67


feature distinctly Hawaiian in its lavish hospitality.
One of the disturbing influences in the community during our stay in Honolulu was a church
scandal occasioned by the Anglican bishop making
an effort to coerce the American contingent of the
Episcopal church into recognition of his supreme
will. The Americans, together with a number of
the more liberal members of the congregation, refused to accept such authority on the part of the
bishop, whereupon, although the former had contributed nearly all the funds, nearly a hundred
thousand dollars, with which to build the new
cathedral, the bishop attempted to close the doors
to all except those who agreed with him. It was
finally settled by the bishop taking one part of the
day for his services, his opponents holding separate
services. The bishop was a ritualistic, orthodox
bigot, possessing a strong aversion for Americans
and a warm admiration for royalty, whereas the
pastor was a man of strong intellect and liberal
views, exceedingly popular, and a fine pulpit orator.
The result was that the bishop remained as a figurehead with a skeleton congregation, while the pastor
did the work, and carried the congregation with him.
According to the last census, the different religious denominations claim 30,000ooo Protestants
and about 20,000 Catholics. The Protestants as a
rule are in sympathy with American interests on
the islands, whereas the Catholics are favorably
disposed to native rule, notwithstanding the teachers
in the Catholic schools are mostly Americans.




CHAPTER V.


POPULATION AND DESCRIPTION OF THE PEOPLE.
The population of the Hawaiian Islands is
decidedly mixed.  By the census of I896 it
numbered I09,020 persons. Of these the natives
numbered 31,oI9; part Hawaiian, 8,485; Chinese,
21,616; Japanese, 24,407; Portuguese, 15,191.
The rest were Americans or Europeans. Those of
American birth or descent constitute the most
intelligent, influential, and largest property-holders
of the community.
There are a number of very respectable English
residents, of good character and abilities, but the
majority of them are imbued with a sense of
superiority, and seem to entertain the opinion that
Americans have obtained advantages which should
have gone to England. They feel deeply aggrieved
at seeing the Yankee assert himself in Hawaii.
Though not given to any genuine consideration of
the sovereign rights and claims of the aboriginal
race, they are nevertheless, with few exceptions,
sympathizers with the corrupt royalty, and constantly intriguing against American influences.
This is especially the case with Theo. -I. Davies,
the self-constituted guardian and champion of
Princess Kaiulani, whom he took to England and
educated there. He has become wealthy through
the reciprocity treaty with the United States, but
68




English Hostility.


69


is most bitterly hostile to everything American.
He was for many years English consul, a position
now held by his partner, Mr. Walker. Mr. Davies
now spends a large part of his time in England,
but returns to Honolulu every year, where he poses
as the friend of the natives, proclaims his willingness to protect them from the wicked Americans,
makes long speeches and prayers in the native
churches, and incidentally sows a crop of domestic
discord and race prejudice. Whatever may be the
policy of the British government toward Hawaii,
the clique which trains with her consular representatives in Honolulu are responsible for nearly all
the anti-American feeling in Hawaii, as they feel
it an insupportable grievance that the Hawaiian
Islands have not become a British stronghold in
the North Pacific.
With very few exceptions, the Germans, Scandinavians, and other Europeans are supporters of the
republic and opposed to the monarchy.  The
Portuguese are a desirable class of laborers and
make good citizens.  They are of European
descent, but were originally brought from the
Azores and Madeira by the Hawaiian government
as laborers on the plantations. Over 7,ooo Portuguese children have been born in the islands. The
Hawaiian-born white population numbers I4,000.
Upon the subsequent introduction of cheap Oriental
contract labor, the Portuguese became the leading
mechanical and expert workmen on the various
internal improvements. They are very strong in
their opinions and sympathies with the United




7o


Chinese and Japanese.


States. In the exercise of their rights of suffrage
they form an important adjunct to the strength of
the Reform party, and co-operate with the most
responsible men of the community.
In the summer of 1865, under arrangements for
the importation of laborers made by the Hawaiian
Bureau of Immigration, 500 Chinese were brought
to the islands as contract laborers, and these were
followed by others in great numbers until their
immigration was checked in I886. They are a
patient and industrious people, and in the struggle
for existence have crowded the improvident natives
from the rich bottoms and taro-fields. On every
hand can be seen their r;.e-fields and taro-patches,
truck-farms, and poultry-yards, giving evidence of
their thriftiness. Some of them have become very
rich. Coming as they did to the islands in large
bodies composed almost exclusively of men, they
soon began to intermarry with the natives, and a
mixed race is the result, but of an improved type,
in many instances, to the mated pair. However,
the distribution throughout the islands of a large
number of wifeless Chinese, in close contact with
the natives, has had a pernicious influence upon
the social life of the Hawaiians, necessarily destructive to the purity of native families.
The Japanese began to come to the islands in
1868, but it was not until 1884 that the consent of
the Japanese government was obtained for the
systematic immigration of its subjects; and then
only as contract laborers. Early in the following




Jaficnese arnd H  waiizans.


7i


year they commenced to arrive in great numbers.
From that time to the present the Japanese have
been coming, many returning as their three-year
contracts expired. At first they consisted of a very
low caste of Japanese, gathered from the riffraff of
the cities, but later they were gathered from the
interior and were a better class. They are a
combative set, ignorant, mulish, and mutinous,
and are likely to give great trouble to the government as their numbers increase. Under the terms
of their contracts they are partially held in check.
If the laborer is idle he is docked a portion of the
day, and if he refuses to obey orders or to work he
is arrested and tried by the civil courts, and, if
found to be in fault, is ordered to return to work;
on repetition of the offense he is punished with a
light fine, which is taken from his wages. If he
persists in a refusal to work, or is mutinous in conduct, he is given a term of imprisonment.
The native race is thriftless and indolent but
amiable and attractive, physically strong, cordial,
and generous. They are in general above the
middle stature, well formed, with fine muscular
limbs, open countenances and features, frequently
resembling those of Europeans. The higher class,
or remnants of the chiefs, are tall and stout and
their personal appearance is so much superior to
that of the common people that they look like a
distinct race. Their hair is black or brown, strong
and frequently curly. Their complexion is neither
yellow nor red, but a kind of olive, and sometimes




72


Origin of Hawaiians.


reddish brown. The question of their origin is
merely speculative, but it is pretty well settled by
native tradition that their ancestors migrated from
one of the Samoan Islands, which was the chief
center of dispersion for the Polynesian race. The
Phlcenicians, who were of H1amitic origin, originally came from the shores of the Persian gulf,
and carried with them the nautical traditions and
commercial customs of the most ancient times.
As they were in the habit of using the AEgean
Islands for a port of call and distribution, and as a
means of keeping secret their communications with
the rich countries of the west, it is more than
likely the Chaldean navigators in a remote period
had a similar custom in the use of the Samoan
Islands to preserve their knowledge of the existence
of the rich islands of the Pacific Ocean and of the
American continent. From this it would appear
the earliest inhabitants of the Hawaiian Islands
originally came from Southwestern Asia, a conjecture that is borne out by the fact that domestic
animals of Asiatic origin were found among them.
They had dogs, the common hens and chickens
and pigs, which are certainly of Asiatic origin.
The ancient Hawaiians were very bold and skillful navigators, and often made voyages of great
length to the Polynesian islands to the south.
They had a knowledge of astronomy, knew the
planets and had names for the brighter stars.
Their year was 365 days. They practiced agriculture and constructed immense canals for irriga



Hawaiian Idolatry.


73


tion. Accustomed to the water, they were wonderfully expert fishermen and built large fish-ponds
for rearing select varieties. Situated as they were,
thousands of miles from the discord and anarchy
that convulsed the archipelagoes of the south, as
they grew dense in population, struggling for individual supremacy, the Hawaiians developed into
comparative peace and prosperity, and settled down
to the task of working out a destiny in advance of
the aborigines of the other Pacific islands.
They were in a state that admitted of a rapid
transition to civilization without war. This easy
transition from barbarism to civilization, and sudden adoption of the Christian religion in place of
superstition and idolatry, has been regarded as a
signal instance of the triumph of Protestant propagandism. But it is a mistake to cherish the idea
of their having become thoroughly Christianized
or enlightened, as the greater part of the natives,
from Liliuokalani down, are more or less tinctured
with their ancient superstitions and idolatrous worship, practicing the old forms, and in secret praying to their old-time gods. The idols have been
destroyed or hid away, yet in secret haunts, concealed from the public gaze, the natives still practice their incantations and believe in the mysteries
of their time-honored religion. Liliuokalani supported heathen sorcerers, with whom she was on
terms of intimacy, making them her secret confidential advisers.  Her Christianity was but a
mask. Some of the native pastors are worshippers




74


Hiazwaiian Sorcerers.


of the old gods, and heathen at heart. Civilized
doctors have great difficulty in alleviating pain or
destroying the germs of disease owing to the prevalent heathenism of the patients and their faith in
the kahunas, or native " medicine men," who teach
that diseases are due to some offended deity that
must be propitiated.
The natives believe that an individual who
possesses the means of employing a kahuna may
afflict with painful disease, and even death, any
person against whom he has feelings of hatred or
revenge. They also believe that these sorcerers by
certain incantations can discover the author of the
disease. A great many natives are brought to
their death by the pretensions of these ignorant
medicine-men, whose influence is so great upon the
minds of the people that in all manner of distress
or disease their spirtitual aid is sought for relief.
A pig or a fowl for sacrifice is at all times necessary
for the ceremony, and the fees to the kahuna are
regulated according to the wealth or standing of the
employer. The kahuna who is supposed to have
most influence with the gods is most frequently employed, and derives the greatest emoluments from
his profession. The offerings on such an occasion
are accompanied with heathenish ceremonies and
sacrifices, and are not lacking in mesmeric or hypnotic phenomena. Violent sweatings and purgings,
as well as other great physical severities, are frequently used to promote the expulsion of the demon,
and, from the anxiety and dread, the mental apprehen



Hawaiian Relizgion.


75


sion is so great that the victim often dies when no
disease originally existed. The sufferer is told that
a kahuna is at work against him; he at once
sickens, becomes prostrated, aud frequently dies.
Very recently the sister of Liliuokalani, Princess
Likelike, mother of the heiress apparent, Kaiulani,
died from the effects of this heathen superstition.
Human sacrifices were in vogue up to I820, but
ceased then.
The Hawaiian religion was the embodiment of
beastiality and malignity, that frequently lapsed
into crimes of lust and revenge. The various legends of their gods abound in attributes of the most
excessive animalism and cruelty. Lewdness, prostitution, and indecency were exalted into virtues.
One of the most foul practices intimately connected
with IHawaiian idolatry, and forming an essential
part of its services, was the hula dance. The chief
posturings are illustrated and varied with elaborate
art, accompanied with chants of unspeakable foulness of diction and description, elaborated with foul
wit and jest and extolling impurity. The motive
of the dance is grossly sensual. Sometimes it is
performed to the music of the orchestra, but usually
the accompaniment is the thumping of calabashes
and a weird song, in the Hawaiian dialect, unfit for
civilized print. The dances commence by the
appearance of the performers in the middle of a
ring. Seated on the ground behind them are the
musicians. The hula girls wear a short frock over
the loins, their legs bare to the knees, and around




76


The Hula Dance.


their ankles are circles of grass fringe. Their
heads and shoulders are ornamented with circlets
of flowers called " leis." A  weird chant from
among the squatted musicians, accompanied by the
thumping on the calabashes, starts the dance, at
first slow, but as it proceeds the music grows
louder and more discordant. Each hula dancer,
keeping time to the music, gives an exhibition
of indecent pantomime. With body erect and
shoulders motionless, they keep up a constant
gesticulation with the arms and hands and nervous
stamping of the feet as the hips are made to rotate
about as though they were pivoted to the small of
the back and knees. The performers at times join
in the strident chant. The dance is exceedingly
tiresome and seldom lasts more than ten or fifteen
minutes, when the performers pause to refresh
themselves with cheap gin, and the next act
commences. A dancing debauch usually lasts all
night, and as a rule ends in a promiscuous drunk.
The hula was Kalakaua's favorite pastime, and
he kept a dancing troupe of his own for the amusement of not only himself, but to entertain his favorite courtiers and special tourists at the boat-house.
The dance requires years of training, and cannot
be acquired by an adult any more than an acrobat
can be developed from an old man. The extreme
vulgarity of the hula has been interdicted by law,
but in secret it is carried on with the same lewdness
and obscenity as in the olden times.
It must not be forgotten, however, that it has












Cause of Decrease of Population.


77


only been seventy years since these people commenced to receive Christian civilization, and for
the past twenty years the entire tendency and influence of the reigning family has been of the most
degrading character, so that it is small wonder that
the retrogression of the common people is so in
evidence. Relieved from this blighting influence,
there is already an upward tendency in the native
moral tone. Unfortunately, the native population
is rapidly decreasing, and ultimate extinction
threatens the race. From a period prior to the advent of the white race they have continued to
steadily decrease. At the time of the discovery of
the islands by Captain Cook, in I774, there was,
upon a moderate estimate, a population of 250,000,
which has dwindled down to less than 30,ooo pure
natives at the present date. This decrease was
greatly augmented by contact with the whites, but
prior to their coming the elements of decay were
already in operation, owing to the entire absence of
morality. Chastity had no recognition in the social
organism, and, unlike other races, the female was
aggressive in solicitation. A woman who withheld
herself was considered sour and ungracious, and it
was a matter of good form that all proposals should
come from her. It was the universal practice for
the mother to place her hands on the hips of the
infant female as soon as it could stand up, and by
careful manipulations teach it the sensual and abominable movements of the hula, that upon arriving
at maturity she might, with that accomplishment,




78


Inf anticide-Disease.


attract the favor of some influential chief. Hospitality was thought to be neglected if the host did
not supply his visitor during his sojourn with the
women of his family, and there was no more impropriety attaching to it than in the free life of
animals.
This condition of society naturally led to wholesale infanticide, which was practiced by all ranks
of the people. However numerous the children
were, parents seldom reared more than two or three,
and many spared only one. All the others were
destroyed, sometimes after birth, and the infant
living a week, a month, or even a year, was still
insecure. The method of destruction was usually
by strangulation, frequently by burying them alive,
often in the floor of the house, within a few yards
of the bed, and the spot where the mother took her
meals. The principal motive for this crime was
idleness and the trouble of bringing up children.
Every effbrt has been made to check this criminal
practice, and infanticide is not now more common
than elsewhere.
The diseases brought by the contact with the
whites have done much towards decimating the
race. For instance, on two occasions the ravages
of small-pox were terrible, and the measles made
sad havoc among their ranks.
Other infectious and epidemic diseases largely
added to the destruction of the population, but
venereal diseases were the chief agent of depopulation. From the very first intercourse with the




Captain Cook-Leprosy.


79


crew of Captain Cook, the amiable and social nature of the Hawaiians caused to be introduced these
scorching and withering diseases that ran like wildfire through the nation. When a portion of the
United States Army took their station at Honolulu,
the First New York Voltlnteers were the means of
introducing the last epidemic. They did not seem
to have any idea of how to take care of themselves,
and although typhoid fever is almost an unknown
disease in Hawaii, a large number of these troops
died, and in some companies the percentage of
numbers on the sick list ran as high as fifty per
cent., and when they were recalled a large number
were still sick. That this pernicious disease was
caused by the carelessness of the First New York
Volunteers is shown by the fact that the regulars
and the engineers who were camped side by side
with the volunteers had almost no sickness. Fortunately the health conditions here arising from the
fate of the New York Volunteers were eliminated
by their timely recall and subsequent hygienic regulations. It is true that typhoid fever did not get
much headway, but its appearance did much injury
to the favorable health reports of the islands.
One of the most loathsome and incurable diseases is leprosy. This disease was first discovered in the islands in I853, and was introduced
from  China. Since then it has claimed about
4,000 victims. It very rarely occurs among the
whites. Scientific and medical experts from all
over the world have been employed by the Ha



80    Origin and Treatment of Leprosy.


waiian government to study the disease, and, if possible, to find some cure. So far, it has baffled the
medical fraternity. Some have reported it to be
the outcome of too much fish food and improper
diet; yet if such was the case, why did the natives
not develop it before, as from all ages they have
been a fish-eating people? Others lay its origin to
the want of cleanliness, yet, personally, there is not
a cleanlier person in the world than the Kanaka.
He not only bathes frequently, but is almost amphibious. Again, it is asserted that the disease is
an aggravated form of tertiary syphilis in a race
virgin to the disease, and this is more likely the
case.  The disease is but slightly contagious,
and heroic doses of iodide of potassium seem
to give relief. Its general appearance is of the
constitutional and not the ulcerated form, and the
period of incubation of the germ after once implanted in the body is probably fiom two to five
years, and death occurs in from four to seven more
years.
In an experiment by inoculation a convict who
was sentenced to be hanged submitted to leprous
inoculation on condition of sparing his life. Two
years after inoculation the disease made its appearance, and in less than four more he died. The
efficacy of the experiment was destroyed, however,
by the fact that there was leprosy in his family,
from whom he might have caught it. Inoculation
of animals has produced no perceptible result. The
contagiousness of the disease is so slight that the




The Leper Settlement.


81


doctors and attendants at the hospitals and settlement never contract it. In one instance a native
woman was married three times. Each of her husbands contracted the disease and died from its
effects, yet frequent medical examinations developed no trace of the disease in the woman. Again,
a pronounced leper has for years lived and cohabited
with his wife, and she has not contracted the disease; and of some sixty children born of leprous
parents who have been cared for by the government, only two or three have developed the disease.
In the absence of knowledge as to the method by
which the disease is communicated, and in view of
the fact that it was spreading rapidly among the
natives, who have no fears of the disease and mingle freely with lepers in the most intimate daily intercourse, an act was passed, in I865, segregating
all lepers and providing a hospital and isolated establishment for them at government expense. A site
was selected on the north side of the Island of
Molokai, about 50 miles from Honolulu. The site
so selected is situated on a narrow peninsula, comprising about 5,000 acres, surrounded by the ocean
in front and shut in on the rear by a precipice from
two to three thousand feet in height. To this location the government in I866 commenced to segregate the lepers, sending 140 that year. The number receiving treatment there at present is about
I,Ioo. Several lovely villages of these poor creatures have grown up, and all means that governmental aid and popular charity can devise have been




82


The Leper Settlement.


taken to alleviate their sufferings. They are provided with hospitals, a Y. M. C. A. hall, a public
library and concert and lecture hall, provided with
a piano, organ, seats, &c.   There are three
churches-Roman Catholic, Congregational, and
Mormon —and a boy's and a girl's home, each built
by donations from wealthy white residents of Honolulu, which are presided over and managed by
Catholic sisters-all Americans, from a sisterhood
having its headquarters at Syracuse, New York.
There are about 8oo horses in the settlement, and
horse-racing is one of the holiday amusements.
Wives and husbands are permitted to accompany
each other into this exile. A band of music plays
in the public park several days in the week, and
medical treatment is administered by efficient specialists, the whole being under the supervision of
the government board of health. No nation in the
world provides more liberally for its afflicted than
does Hawaii.
Prior to the exiling of patients to this settlement
an examination is made at the Kalihi hospital, near
Honolulu, and not until they are beyond all doubt
suffering from the disease are they sent to Molokai.
The natives regard this segregation of their leprous
relatives as a cruel and uncalled-for hardship, and
Kalakaua practically permitted the law to lapse in
his efforts to control native influence; but now it is
so rigidly enforced that but few lepers are at large.
Either from segregation or because the disease has
run its course, the number of lepers is gradually
decreasing, and ultimate extinction is hoped for.




Lizquor and Opium.


83


Another great curse to the native race is their
natural fondness for stimulants. Even before the
arrival of the whites a narcotic called "6 awa" was
a favorite beverage, and when taken in excess has
a tendency to waste and paralyze the system. A
liquid was also made from fermented sweet potatoes, but the strongest alcoholic beverage was concocted fiom the macerated and fermented ki-root.
With the introduction of the foreigner came the
products of the still, and this craving appetite knew
no bounds. The previous mild orgies were transformed into a carnival of excess and contributed
largely to depopulation. The narcotic influences
of opium tookwith the natives under the tuition of
the Chinese, whose smoking joints are exceedingly
numerous. Importation of opium is prohibited by
law, but the quantity smuggled is very large.
Some idea of the quantity sold on the islands may
be obtained from the fact that two Chinamen paid
Kalakaua bribes, one $75,000 and the other $80,oo00,
for the privilege of securing a license, for which
$25,000 a year was paid, to sell it. This fondness
for alcoholic stimulants and narcotics, with its resultant exposure, is one cause for the decrease of
the Hawaiians.
The native Hawaiian race is doomed to extinction. They cannot compete with other races, and
as new conditions are evolved, and a possible overcrowding of the islands by thrifty and capable
classes in the near future takes place, the little
remnant of natives will soon disappear as an im



84           Native Character.
portant element in the population of the country.
Like all semi-savages, they are poetical, eloquent,
and fond of holding office; but the Hawaiian, with
his superficial civilization and inexperience in
practical government, is incapable of governing or
controlling the stronger races, which now outnumber him three to one. He has already passed from
the stage as a controlling factor in Hawaiian government, although under firm and capable leadership he does not make a bad citizen.




CHAPTER VI.


NATIVE GAMES AND SPORTS.
The native Hawaiians are natural sportsmen,
and some of their games would favorably compare
with those of civilized races. One of their most
popular and delightful sports was surf-riding.
Familiar with the sea from birth, they have no
dread of it, and are as much at home in the water
as on dry land. On these occasions they use a
board generally six to ten feet long and rather
more than a foot wide, sometimes flat, but more
frequently convex on both sides.  The natives
choose a place where the deep water reaches to
the beach and where the surf breaks violently.
They take their boards and pushing them ahead
swim perhaps a quarter of a mile or more to sea,
dodging the billows or diving under them as they
roll towards the shore. Arriving far enough out,
they adjust themselves on the rear end of the board,
lying flat on their faces, and upon the approach of
the largest billow, paddle with their hands and feet
toward the shore. The breaker catches up with
them, and by skillful manipulation it is made to bear
the board forward upon its face at an angle of 30 or
40 degrees, with the speed of an express train, to
within a few yards of the beach, when, by a quick
movement, they slide off the board, and grasping it
in the middle dive under the water while the wave
85




86


Surf-Riding.


breaks on the shore. Sometimes the swimmer assumes a sitting or standing position on the board in
the midst of the foam, balancing himself in a way
that would prove fatal to even the best American
swimmer. The larger the waves, in their opinion,
the better the sport. They have a variety of games,
and gambol as fearlessly in the water as the children of the United States do on their playgrounds.
Occasionally a light canoe, holding from one to
half a dozen people, is used instead of a board.
This is less difficult than board-riding, and is one
of the favorite amusements afforded tourists at the
Waikiki beach, a few miles from Honolulu. In
the olden times all ranks and ages were equally
fond of this sport, but when the king or queen or
any high chiefs were playing in the surf none of the
common people were allowed to approach the
place.
Another favorite amusement with the common
people was the throwing of a blunt dart, varying in
length from two to five feet, and thickest about six
inches from the point, after which it tapered gradually to the other end. These darts were made with
great care and ingenuity, of a hard wood and highly
polished. They were thrown with great force and
exactness along the level ground previously prepared for the game. The ground was laid off into
a court about fifty or sixty yards long, upon which
two or more darts were laid down at a certain distance, three or four inches apart. The excellence
of the play consisted in the dexterity with which




. I i | I i            I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
I                1
SU7RF-RIDINGWA1KAK1> H(WNOLULIl








Native Sports.


the dart was thrown. He who in a given number
of times threw his dart most frequently between the
stationary darts without striking either of them
won the game. Again, the play was a mere trial
of strength. A mark was made in the ground from
which the player must throw his dart. He balanced the dart in the hand, retreated a few yards
firom the starting point, and then sprang forward to
the mark and threw it along the ground with great
force. All the darts were left wherever they stopped
until all were thrown, when each player ran forward to the other end of the course to see who had
made the most successful throws.
In throwing darts, casting spears, and dodging
them the Hawaiians were great experts.
A game somewhat similar to the dart-throwing
was bowling, and the skill with which the native
Hawaiian could handle the ball would compare
with the most expert ten-pin player of to-day with
all his knowledge of how to make the spare, strike,
lighthouse break, or Dutchman's bridge. The native game consisted in bowling a highly polished
stone disk, three or four inches in diameter and an
inch thick, with a slight convexity from the edges
to the center. They were made of compact lava,
or of a white alluvial rock, and were highly valued
and carefully preserved, being always oiled and
wrapped up in native cloth after having been used.
A narrow course about half a mile in length was made
on the ground, similar to that made for dart-throwing, and at one end, about thirty or forty yards from




88


Boxing and Wrestling.


the starting mark, two sticks were stuck in the
ground only a few inches apart, and between these
the parties at play strove to throw the stone without
striking either of the stakes. At other times the
play was to see who could throw the disk farthest
along the course. Sometimes the inhabitants of a
district, believing they had the champion, would
challenge the other people of the whole island to
bring a man to compete with their favorite. This
game required great bodily exertion, yet the natives
would play it for hours with restless avidity and
untiring effort.
In athletic sports boxing was a favorite national
game, was regulated by fixed rules, and presided
over by umpires. The usual contestants were the
chiefs of different districts. When they entered the
ring they were usually attended by a large crowd
of partisans. The fight was severe and determined,
and when a knock-down occurred or blood was
drawn, the partisans of the victor indulged in deafening yells, danced and beat drums, while the
champion would strut around the ring with an air
of a John L. Sullivan, challenging others to the
contest, until he finally met his match. It was not
uncommon for several of the contestants to be left
dead on the field during one of these games.
Wrestling and foot-racing were much practiced, as
well as jumping the rope and kite-flying.
Another popular sport was sliding down hill on
a long narrow sledge. The runners were from
twelve to fourteen feet long, and two or three




Coasting- Gcarnbling.8


89


inches deep, made of hard wood, highly polished,
and curved at the forward end. They were set up
about four inches apart and fastened together by a
lot of cross-pieces, on which two long tough sticks
were fastened and connected by wicker-work. A
smooth narrow track was made of cobble-stones or
dry grass down the side of a steep hill, extending
to a great distance over the adjoining plain. The
performer would grab the sledge about the middle,
run a few yards to the starting place, and, with a
good start, would throw himself upon it and shoot
head foremost down the hill, going sometimes half
a mile before stopping. In all these games the
natives indulged in various kinds of gambling.
Scarcely any individual resorted to a source of
amusement but for the purpose of gambling; and
at those periods they exhibited all the excitement,
anxiety, and rage which such pursuits invariably
produce.  These feelings were not only visible in
every countenance, but were fully acted out, and
all the malignant passions which gambling engenders were indulged without restraint. The female
would hazard her beads, cloth, beating mallet, and
every piece of clothing she possessed, except what
she actually had on. The male would risk his implements of husbandry, his hatchets and adzes, and
even the mat on which he slept. All were eager
to stake every article they possessed on the success
of their favorite player, and when they lost all, would
become frantic with rage and tear their hair from
their heads. These scenes frequently ended in
quarrels, sometimes of a serious nature.




go


Native Games.


A complicated game like our checkers was played
with black and white pebbles upon a board divided
into numerous squares. One of the favorite gambling plays consisted in hiding a small stone under
one of several pieces of native tapa or cloth, so as
to prevent the spectators from discovering under
which piece it was hid. The parties at play squatted on the ground, each one holding in his right
hand a small elastic rod about three feet long and
highly polished. The small end of the stick had a
narrow slit in it through which was drawn a tuft of
hair or piece of ti-leaf. The players were usually
divided into two parties of five persons each, and
the pieces of tapa were placed between the two
parties. One person was selected on each side to
hide the stone. In doing this the stone was taken
in the right hand and passed along several times
underneath each piece of tapa and finally left under
one of them. All this time the other side was closely
watching to see where it was deposited. The
stone deposited and hand withdrawn, the opposite
party would then point with the sticks to the piece of
tapa under which they guessed it to be concealed.
The cloth was instantly lifted up, and should the
stone be under it that side had won the hiding, and
the side that guessed right the greater number times
won the game.
As almost all the men were taught the use of
various weapons employed in battle, they frequently
engaged in martial exercises or warlike games.
One of these exercises consisted in throwing stones




Single Combats.


9x


with a sling at a mark, and it was remarkable with
what precision and accuracy they would, with
great force, strike a small stick fifty yards away,
rarely ever missing it.
The throwing of a javelin and catching and
returning it, or warding it off to avoid receiving
any injury, was another game. This feat was one
of Kamehameha I's greatest accomplishments, in
which he excelled to an astonishing degree. He
was known to have six men throw their javelins at
him at one time, three of which he caught and
returned to his assailants, two he parried, and one
he dodged.
Wrestling was an athletic practice of the youths
as a preparation for the single combats usual in
almost every one of their battles. Sham battles
were frequently indulged in, when large numbers
would take part. Divided into parties they would
advance and retreat, attack and defend each other,
and engage in all the manceuvres employed in
actual warfare. They took great delight in these
gymnastic and warlike exercises, and spent a great
deal of time in their practice. In actual hostilities
it was not an uncommon occurrence for the result
to be decided in a single combat. A boastful
warrior would advance beyond the line of his
companions and in opprobrious terms challenge
his enemies to mortal combat. A warrior from
the army of the other side would come out to meet
him, and the duel would be continued until one or
the other was disabled or slain.




92


Ancient Warfare.


Although actual warfare may not be considered
one of their games of amusement, yet their mode of
carrying on war was the result of their national
character and training, and some account of their
system of military tactics and methods of fighting
will probably be acceptable in this place. The
native traditions are full of accounts of plundering
expeditions of one island against another, or the
murderous battles between the various independent
chiefs of different parts of the same island. No
pretext was wanted to commence the fight. It was
simply started by one party who thought themselves powerful enough to invade with success the
domains of their neighbors and plunder their property. Not until the introduction of fire-arms and
the subjugation of the whole group by Kamehameha
I. did this custom cease. Whenever war was in
contemplation sacrifices were offered, and advice
sought from the war gods through the appearance
of the entrails of a hog or fowl that was sacrificed,
or by the interpretation of dreams. If the expedition was of great magnitude or threatened imminent danger, human sacrifices were offered to the
war gods. These victims of sacrifice were either
captives or individuals who had broken tabu or
made themselves obnoxious to the chiefs. The
number offered at one time varied according to the
importance of the enterprise. War was never declared without the approbation of the gods made
known through the priests, having due regard to
the views agreed upon in a public meeting of the




Jf.ilhiary Tactics.


93


chiefs and their warriors. As soon as they were
ready, the chiefs and priests fixed upon the time
and place for commencing and the manner of carrying it on. Messengers were sent to all the districts
under their authority to require the attendance of a
sufficient number of men provided with their
weapons, kukui nuts for torches, calabashes and
portable provisions. If the circumstances justified
it, all persons capable of bearing arms were summoned, and any one failing to obey had his ears slit
and was led to the camp by a rope. This slit was
ever afterwards a mark of cowardice, and was so
humiliating that very few ever lingered behind.
When all had assembled at the place of rendezvous
a general muster was held by the inferior chiefs,
and the number present reported to the commanderin-chief. They then went into camp on some plain,
or near the banks of a river, or in a deep ravine
secured from sudden attack, and threw out pickets.
Near by they usually constructed a fortress, including a spring, for the protection of the women and
children. The field chosen for battle was generally
on some uneven or broken ground or rugged tracts
of lava, and from the elevated positions they fought
with slings and stones, and repelled the assaults
with spears and clubs. When compelled to fight
in the open plain, their tactics were of a superior
kind. They advanced in the formn of a crescent, with
the wings thrown back, center considerably in advance and reserve to the rear. A line of skirmishers
was formed along the entire front, composed of the




94


Military Tactics.


slingers and javelin-throwers. The high chief led
the center. In passing a defile, or when engaging
in a narrow pass, the wings were massed to the
rear and the center led, deploying by divisions after
emerging from the defile. The priests kept to the
rear, and just before the engagement commenced
were consulted by the chiefs, and if the auspices
were favorable they brought out the images of the
war gods and placed them near the head chief.
Prayers were offered and speeches of encouragement made to the assembled warriors, when the
signal was given and the onslaught commenced.
As the fight progressed the priests bore near each
chief the image of his particular war god. After
the fight was over it was the duty of the priests to
sacrifice a certain number of prisoners in honor of
the gods.
The usual mode of fighting was by a succession
of skirmishes, but at times the whole army would
engage except the reserve, which was used with
much skill when required.
Sometimes their disputes were settled in a great
naval engagement, and fleets of hundreds of canoes
were opposed to each other with a skill equal to
those of the flotilla engagements of the ancient
Phoenicians.  They went into the fight with
boastful shouts and confusing noise.  The first
victim slain was treated with barbarity: his hair
cut or torn from the top of his forehead, his ornaments stripped off and his body dragged to and
mutilated on the altar as the first blood to the war




Treatment of Prisoners.


95


god. When routed in the field they fled to some
sacred enclosure, and if successful in reaching that
place of refuge they were preserved, but if intercepted they were slain. If they took to the
mountains they were pursued for weeks and
months, and if discovered were cruelly massacred.
If taken prisoners they were taken before the high
chief, who passed judgment, by which they were
either slain or spared. If spared, their persons
became the property of the captor as slaves. The
victors usually buried their dead, but the bodies of
the vanquished were left on the field to be devoured
by hogs and dogs, or suffered to rot. When completely routed, the country of the vanquished was
portioned off to the chiefs of the victorious army,
and the wives and children of the defeated were
made slaves and treated with great cruelty. If the
battle was a draw, a flag of truce, or messenger
with a plantain tree or branch of the ki-plant, was
sent by one side with proposals, and if agreed to
they were ratified in the temple by sacrifices, feasting, dances, and public games, and a wreath of a
particular plant was deposited in the temple as a
record of the treaty.
With the introduction of the whites the ancient
games almost ceased, those of the new-comers were
adopted instead, in which the natives have proven
themselves exceedingly expert. They have several
base-ball clubs in Honolulu, and in the frequent
matches against clubs composed of whites they are
often the victors. There is a centrally located and




96     Boating-Shooting — Tug of War.


spacious base-ball ground, amphitheatre, and all
accommodations for the public in Honolulu. Great
enthusiasm is shown for the sport, and on occasions
of a match game the elite of Honolulu turns out.
In boating, the natives take to the long narrow
shell with as much skill as they did in their old
time-honored canoe, and in the many regattas at
Pearl river and Honolulu harbor they are frequently
victorious over their white competitors.
Rifle-shooting and target practice come in for
their share as an amusement, and the natives have
a team that has made a good record for disfiguring
the bull's-eye at short and long range.
One of their favorite sports of to-day is the " tug
of war," which consists in a certain number of men
on one side matched against an equal number on
the other. Each side, taking the most favorable
position for bringing all its strength into play,
holds on to one end of a rope and pulls against the
other until the mark in the middle of the rope is
drawn across the limits of the field, when the game
is decided. The test requires not only strength,
but judgment, knack, and endurance. Sometimes
they will tug at the rope for hours before either
side wins. The bowling-alley has superseded the
old disk-rolling floor, and in this modern game
the native is also an expert.
With the introduction of fire-arms, and the
moral superiority of the white inhabitants, the
natives have become exceedingly docile and a
remarkably peaceful race of people.




Game-shooting.


97


Horse-racing is a favorite sport. On nearly all
the islands there is a well-regulated track, and at
the regular meets the races are hotly contested, with
good exhibitions of speed.
In the field the sport is magnificent. Quail have
been imported from California, and though they
will not remain on the lee side of the islands, do
well on the windward side, which makes the sport
a little more difficult.  Japanese and Chinese
pheasants have also been imported and do well,
having multiplied in sufficient numbers to permit
shooting them.  Domestic turkeys became so
plentiful that the surplus took to the woods and
went wild, and turkey-hunting has become quite a
sport as well as a means of supplying food. In the
mountains there are wild geese, most delicious in
flavor, but as they occupy the higher regions of the
mountains they are difficult to reach by the sportsmen. During the winter months, or what is known
as the rainy season, the marshy ponds around the
lowlands of the islands are filled with many species
of wild ducks and fowl, and the sport is extremely
fine. Numerous ducking clubs and preserves have
been formed and it is not unusual for a few gentlemen from Honolulu in two days' outing to bag as
many as one hundred ducks. On the northern side
of the Island of Oahu there is a series of marshy
ponds, near which is the most popular club on the
islands, its membership being composed of many of
the leading gentlemen of Honolulu. In the winter
months also a kind of upland plover make their way
to the islands from their breeding ground to the




98       Plover and Duck Shooting.
north. The great distance to this breeding ground
is shown by the impoverished condition the plover
are in upon arrival on the islands, but only a
week or so after landing they become so fat as to
be dull and slow in flight compared with their
rapid movement at first. They are a most deliciously flavored bird, and the sport in shooting them
exceeds that of any other of a similar nature on the
islands. They feed along the beach and marshes
or outlying points, and the sportsman simply takes
a stand on one of the projecting reefs while a dog
is sent around to flush them, or in the absence of a
dog an attendant is sent the rounds. As they fly
from one place to another they nearly always cross
the spit, and a good shot is obtained.  Three
sportsmen and two attendants bagged over
five hundred in three days on the western end of
the island where the field was not so frequently
shot over. As the birds fly across the little water
indentations to cross the reef or spit they are very
likely to fall in the water when shot. It is therefore necessary to have a good retriever, of which
there are many fine ones in Honolulu.
At other times during the year dove-shooting is
the favorite sport in the field. These doves are a
little larger than the ordinary dove of the United
States and somewhat smaller than a pigeon, having
a wreath of white mottled feathers on the top of
the head. They fly with a swiftness equal to that
of a blue-rock pigeon, and when coming towards a
person are hard to kill. They feed along the rich
rice bottoms and cultivated fields, and when flushed




Deer- Cattle- Goats.


99


fly singly towards a certain cover of woods. Hence
to enjoy the sport the marksman takes a stand, as
much concealed as possible, near some opening
through which the birds usually fly. Early in the
morning they leave their roost, and late in the afternoon are again on the move, but in the middle of
the day one person goes to a favorable spot on one
side of the fields, and another to one on the opposite side, so that as the one fires he drives the birds
to the other, and vice versa. The sport is very
fine and not too much work, and unless the wind
is blowing hard can be indulged the entire day.
Of the large game, the little spotted deer have
been introduced on the Island of Molokai, and
become so numerous as to be an injury to the
forests. In the mountains, however, there are a
great number of wild cattle and wild hogs on five
of the islands, and the sport in chasing them, joined
with the danger accompanying the hunt, is highly
exciting and very interesting. The hunt is made
on horseback, and the weapon is the rifle, hence it
takes a good shot and cool judgment to be successful. A wounded bull is no insignificant foe,
for he will attack man or beast when in that condition.
There are great numbers of wild goats in the
mountains of all the islands, which are much
hunted for sport. They are very destructive to
vegetation, and in some places men are hired to
exterminate them. The skins used to be exported,
but the price is now so low that this is only done
on a small scale.




CHAPTER VII.


THE HAWAIIAN RELIGION.
The description of a race of people is incomplete
without an account of their religion. The religion
of a people has always been considered to have an
immense formative power over them. For instance,
the religion of Egypt and Chaldea, of Greece and
Rome, by its exaltation of the higher elements of
character, laid a foundation upon which advanced
civilization became possible, while all those nations
which worshipped evil gods became corroded and
poisoned in their social and political life. The
Hawaiian religion was of the latter kind, polytheistic and idolatrous, coupled with oppressive
restrictions, superstitious exactions and human
sacrifices. It was impure and malignant, evil and
unclean, possessing strong tendencies to animalism
and cruelty, lust and revenge.
This diabolical religion drew its greatest strength
from idolatry and sorcery which brought their evil
gods down to living, active powers, interposing in
all circumstances of life, and holding the people
in habitual fear of the powerful gods and their
subordinate demons. Their lives were constantly
threatened by them, and every illness, however
slight, was the deadly touch of a god. In fact the
people were held in abject slavery to the gods
and their priests who represented them. The high
zoo




The Spirit World.


IOI


chiefs even bowed in submission to their rules and
dictates and dreaded theirvengeance. Their highest
gods were absolute embodiments of beastiality and
malignity, and their various legends abound in
attributes of loathsome filthiness incapable of being
printed without extensive expurgation. Yoked to
such unclean beings the people lost all sentiments
of morality, and lewdness, prostitution and indecency were exalted into virtues. In the construction of their idols or images of the gods, an
effort was made to depict their lineaments in as
revolting and horrible a manner as their imaginations could conceive. They peopled the sea and
air, the sky and heavenly bodies, as well as the
valleys and volcanoes, with vindictive and malignant spirits who were subservient to the arts of the
haughty and powerful kahunas, or priests.
While believing in a future life, the Hawaiians
recognized a distinction in the lot of the dead.
They divided the future realm into four separate
and distinct regions. The heaven beyond the
clouds was reserved for the departed spirits of the
noble chiefs. For the souls of the great heroes
there was a hidden land or fairy island in the
distant west which was said to have been seen
sometimes by the mariners in the far-off horizon,
covered with cocoanut-trees and rich foliage, and
beautiful to behold, but as they approached, it
receded before them like a mirage. For the select
few of the common people who, through life, had
been scrupulous in observing the religious rites and




102     The Spirit World-Kahunas.


the laws of tabu there was an upper region of the
lower world where quiet, peace, and comparative
comfort existed, which was presided over by the
great god Wakea, the reputed ancestor of the race.
The last, or terrible inferno, where the majority of
the dead were conducted, was the lower region of
the world, filled with misery and woe, noise and
disorder. It was presided over by the notorious
and wicked god Milu, a former chief of Hawaii,
who was given this power for his excessive evils
during lifetime. From each of these spiritual
dwelling-places the souls of the departed were
permitted to emerge in company with some particular god, who would conduct them back to earth,
where they were not only supposed to watch over
the destinies of their survivors, but at times their
bodies would become reanimated and youthful,
and the existing generation would see and know
their parents and ancestors. In time all who hadk
(lied would be restored to life and resume the same
position and authority originally held before death.
The means by which the various legends and religious rites were transmitted was through the
kahunas, or priests, who were divided into several
hereditary orders. It was their special duty to commit to memory and teach their children the long
prayers used in the temple service, and the genealogies and tales of prowess of the chiefs and their
ancestors. They were the learned class, who kept
alive the knowledge and handed down the traditions of what was known of astronomy, history, or




Character of "T abu."


I03


medicine. They selected and executed the victims
for human sacrifice. The lever by which the chiefs
and priests compelled implicit obedience to their
will was the tabu, a complete system which covered the entire daily life of the people with a vast
network of regulations and penalties. The people
were, at no period of their existence, exempt from
its influences, and no circumstance in life could excuse their disobedience to its demands. The death
penalty was often inflicted on those who violated
the tabu. It was not only a legal requirement, but
a religious ordinance; hence its violation broke both
divine and human laws. It was divided into many
kinds, some permanent and others special and temporary. Those relating to the chiefs, the idols, and
the temples were permanent, while others belonged
to particular times, or were imposed arbitrarily by
the king.
During a common tabu, the men were only required to abstain from their usual avocations and
attend at the temple when prayers were offered,
every morning and evening. During the strict tabu
the requirements were most oppressive and the
prohibitions strictly enforced, and every breach of
them was punished with death. For days the
strictest silence was observed; every fire and light
in the district was extinguished; no canoe could
be launched, no person could bathe, no tapa be
beaten, or poi pounded; no dog could bark, pig
squeal, or cock crow.  On these occasions the
dogs and pigs were muzzled, and the fowls put
under large calabashes.




o04


Aplpicalion of "Tabu."


All the common people prostrated themselves,
with their faces touching the ground, before the
sacred chiefswhen they walked abroad. It was tabu
for men and women to eat together, or have their
food cooked in the same oven, and it was death for
a woman to enter the chapel for the family idols or
the men's eating-house. The best kinds of food,
such as pork, bananas, cocoanuts, turtles, and certain kinds of fish, were tabued to the women on
pain of death.
During each month there were four tabu periods
of two nights and one day each, dedicated severally to each of four gods. These four tabus were
so sacred that the king spent the time in the temple
in prayer with the priests, while the congregation
stood with uplifted arms for quite awhile, at the beginning and ending of the prayer. Sacrifices were
offered and profound silence was observed. Tabu
was sometimes laid on places and things by affixing
certain marks, the purport of which was well understood. When the fish of a certain locality were
tabued, a small pole was fixed in the rocks on the
coast, in the center of the place, to which was tied
a bunch of bamboo-leaves or a piece of white cloth.
A cocoanut-leaf was tied to the stem of a tree
when the fruit was tabued. If the chief wanted
any portion of a tenant's crop he simply caused a
pole to be placed in the patch, and from that time
on it was tabued, and it was death for the tenant,
who had raised it, to use any of it. In collecting
taxes the assessor went his rounds carrying with




Religious Ceremonies.


Io5


him a certain idol and preceded by a man who,
upon arriving at the boundary of a land, set up a
pole which placed the land under tabu, and no one
could leave it until the taxes were paid in full. If
anything was to be exempt from use for a certain
period of time a tabu was placed upon it. For instance, a certain kind of fish had a sacred character, and was tabued during certain periods of the
year. When cattle were first introduced on the
islands they were tabued for ten years.
The ceremonies by which the people worshipped
their gods were elaborate and complicated. From
the building of a canoe to the dedication of a
temple all enterprises were attended with prayers,
offerings,,ad.. sac.ifices.. In addition to the worship of the four principal gods the people in every
avocation in life had their patron gods,.who had to
be propitiated, and innumerable omens had to be
observed, The dedication of a, temple was the
most laborious of their religious services. Many
days were occupied in the preliminary rites of purification. A religious procession was formed, and
headed by a man personating the god and accompanied by a priest, made a tour of the district levying contributions from the tenants. They managed
to complete this tour on the evening of the new
moon, when a responsive service was held in the
temple, before the whole population, and the
priests sprinkled the people with holy water, prepared for the occasion. A tree was selected in the
forest from which the principal idol was to be




Io6


Idol Construction.


made, and a great procession was formed and
marched to the spot, headed by the chief and
priest with a crowd of attendants carrying idols
and various offerings and leading a human victim.
Upon arrival at the tree the priest recited the ritual
and the chief offered prayer and killed a hog. If
no sound of man or beast, insect or fowl, had been
heard, it was a good omen, and the doomed man
was then brought forward and offered to the god,
after which his body was buried at the foot of the
tree. The consecrated hog was baked in an oven
on the spot while the tree was being cut down.
A feast was then held, and the procession re-formed
with the feather gods in front, the rear men carrying the new idol and yelling at the top of their
voices. It was death for any of the inhabitants to
meet this procession, and when it returned to the
temple the images were finally deposited in their
places amid the shoutings of the people and the
beating of drums. The final ceremonies were then
held in the temple, where for days the entire multitude took part.  Prayers were offered by the
priests amid various evolutions of the people and
the image-bearers. Finally a hole was dug near
the altar, in which another human victim was
buried and the image erected over the dead body.
Other and subsequent ceremonies, sacrifices, and
offerings were performed before the temple was
finally dedicated.
The temples differed much in variety of plan
and construction. The priesthood were divided




Temple of Refuge-Marriage.


Io7


into several orders, some of which were more
severe and exclusive in their ritual than the others.
Other temples formed places of refuge and were
inviolable sanctuaries in time of war, or for any
fugitive who had broken talu or committed any
sort of crime. The gates were always open and
any one pursuing a fugitive to within the walls of
the sacred inclosure was put to death. After remaining a few days in the temple the refugee could
return unmolested to his home.
In every avocation in life the native Hawaiian lo
had some form of ceremony, incantation, and offerings to the tutelar deities. A man could not even
build a canoe or use a new fishing-rod without
prayer and sacrifice to his patron god. The building of a house was in accordance with superstitious
rules, even to the arrangement of the sticks, and in
the case of a chief's house human sacrifices were
required. In the building of a canoe an idol was
brought out, the tree selected, the flight of birds
noted, and offerings made. After it was finished
a final sacrifice was offered, and in the launching,
if the silence was broken, the canoe would not be
safe. About the only act in life that was not accompanied with prayers and sacrifices to the gods or
with religious ceremonies was marriage. In the case
of marriage not even the favor of departed ancestors was invoked, and the husband could dismiss
or kill his wife without ceremony or cause. When
a male child was born, offerings were made to the
priests and prayers made to the gods. When he




io8


Burial Ceremonies.


reached four or five years of age he was permitted
to partake of tabu food, and forbidden to eat with
women, a sacrifice was offered and a feast given, and
he was circumcised. But the female child was
left to its chances and suffered the same restrictions under the tabu as were imposed upon matured
women. The female child was not even allowed
to be fed with a particle of food that had been kept
in the father's dish or cooked at his fire.
^i  (With regard to the dead, their interments were
conducted in great secrecy and without ceremony,
and took place in the night. The people had a
superstitious dread respecting the places where the
dead were deposited.  They were exceedingly
superstitious about ghosts and haunted places)
During the first few days after death, the spectres
of the deceased haunted the sepulchre and endeavored to strangle their enemies, often inflicting
death, but they grew weaker and weaker day by
day. The remains of the chiefs were secreted in
the most inaccessible caverns, and frequently the
bones of the legs and arms, and sometimes the
skull of the king and principal chiefs, who were
supposed to have descended from the gods, or were
to be deified, were preserved, and either deposited
in the temples for adoration or distributed among
the immediate relatives, who carried them wherever they went. The other parts of the body were
either burned or buried. The bodies of the priests
and chiefs of inferior rank were laid out straight,
wrapped in tapa and buried in that posture; the




Bu rial-Sacrzifces.


log


priests within the precincts of the temple. A pile
of stones or a circle of high poles marked the place
of their interment.
The common people committed their dead to the
earth in shallow graves, and the bodies were placed
in them in a sitting posture. The upper part of
the body was raised and the face bent forward to
the knees, with the hands put under the hams and
passed up between the knees, the whole bound
together with a cord and then wrapped in a coarse
mat and buried.
Sometimes the inhabitants of a village deposited
their dead in one large cavern.
The fishermen, after wrapping their dead in red
native cloth, cast them into the sea to be eaten by
the sharks, in the belief that the sharks would be
animated by the spirit of the dead and never devour
the survivors. The bodies of human sacrifices,
and those who broke tabu, were left to rot, after
which the bones were piled up in the temple. The
method of killing was by strangulation or by striking with a club or stone, within the precincts of the
temple, or the victim was decoyed into the bush
by cries of help and knocked in the head. The
next morning after burial, it was necessary for
those persons who were defiled by handling the
dead to bathe in fresh water and seat themselves in
a row at the door of the house, when the priest
would come along with a calabash of holy water,
pronounce the form of purification, and they
became clean.




IIO


Funeral Rites-Sorcery.


Although the funeral rites were not attended by
any ceremony, the death of a great chief was
accompanied by human sacrifices and with paroxysms of grief so violent that the people lost all
reason. They would knock out their front teeth,
shave one side of the head, and tattoo their tongues.
The whole community would exhibit a scene of
confusion and cruelty that the most barbarous
condition could devise. The people would run to
and fro without clothing, acting more like demons
than human beings. Every vice was practiced and
every species of crime perpetrated. I-ouses were
burned, property plundered, murders committed,
every base and savage feeling gratified without
restraint, and long forgotten injuries revenged with
unrelenting cruelty.
If the service in the temples, idolatry, and the
restrictions of the tabu imposed such great severities
on the people, they did not have the debasing
influences that sorcery had. The basis of sorcery
was a kind of spiritualism, hypnotism, and faith
cure, with a belief that all forms of sickness and
disease were caused by evil spirits, with whom
communication could only be held through the
sorcerers. There were many omens by which the
sorcerer judged whether the patient would recover or
not. In addition to prayers and sacrifices, herbs
and hygienic treatment were also used. They had,
through their arts, powerful agencies of death, and
were great experts in the knowledge and use of
poisons. Some of these sorcerers were so expert




Sorcery- Souls.


III


in their profession that superstitious fear of them
was often sufficient to make the victim give up all
hope and pine away until he died. They were
frequently employed to use their black art to gratify
personal revenge upon an enemy, after which the
speedy death of the unsuspecting victim was sure
to follow.  To accomplish his purpose it was
supposed to be necessary for the sorcerer to secure
something connected with the person of his intended
victim, such as the parings of the nails, a lock of
the hair, and the like. For this reason the chiefs
always kept their most faithful servants around
them, who carefully buried everything of the kind
or sunk it out at sea.
The more respectable class of sorcerers were the
astrologers, soothsayers, and prophets. They were
comparatively harmless persons, attached to the high
chiefs as counselors. They helped to keep alive
the knowledge of astronomy and navigation and
kept up a continual study of the heavens, predicted
future events and changes in the weather.
The Hawaiians believed that each individual was
possessed of two souls, one of which occasionally left
the body in trances and dreams and returned again.
The sorcerer was believed to have not only the
faculty of seeing the souls of living beings, but of
catching them.  If he desired, he could either
squeeze them to death or imprison them, whereupon the owner of the soul would be terrified and
willing to do anything that the sorcerer required.
Kamehameha II, in order to ameliorate the




112


End of Tabu-Missionaries.


condition of his wives, and women in general, whom
the tabu had sunk into a state of extreme wretchedness and degradation, and to destroy the power of
the priests, abolished idolatry and the tabu system
by which it was upheld, a few months prior to the
advent of the missionaries. One of his first acts
upon coming to the throne was to commit several
violations of the tabu, especially the tabu which
prohibited men and women from eating together.
The abolition of idolatrywas the immediate occasion
of war. The high priest acquiesced in the acts of
the King; but some of the subordinate priests and
chiefs took up arms, and in a decisive battle, in
December, 1819, the rebels were completely overthrown, their leader killed, and forces scattered.
This resulted in the destruction of their idols, the
abolition of the system of the tabu and of human
sacrifices. The people were thus left without a
religion, opening the way for American missionaries, who arrived and commenced their labors early
in 1820. The devotees of the ancient cult, with its
cruel and bloody ceremonies, though cowed by the
changed condition, were not exterminated, but continued to exercise powerful influences.  There
have always been those who have clung to the faith
of their fathers, who in secret have kept up the
worship of their ancestral gods and the superstitions relating to sorcery, and the influence of this
faith is destined to survive for generations to come.
Under the royal favor and sanction of Kalakaua and
his sister, Queen Liliuokalani, the heathen doc



Revival of Idolatry.         I13
trines of the past were publicly revived, and the influence of the kahunas over the people encouraged;
the King even securing the passage as late as I884,
by a subservient legislature, of an act authorizing
the licensing of kahunas. This determined spirit
of retrogression is what finally wrought the downfall of the monarchy.




CHAPTER VIII.


RESOURCES, PAST AND PRESENT.
At the time of the discovery of the Hawaiian
Islands by the whites, the industrial resources of
the country were of a nature to support only a barbarous race of people. The sea supplied a great
portion of their wants, and as fishermen the Hawaiians were unsurpassed. They used a great
variety of hooks, lines, nets, and other apparatus,
fishing in the shallows, on the reefs, and even going
miles out to sea in frail canoes and catching fish
from depths as great as a hundred fathoms. All
kinds of superstition attended success in their fishing, and the hook made from the shinbone of some
noted chief was of incalculable value. Such was
the importance attached to particular hooks of this
kind that different tribes have gone to war for the
possession of one, and to avoid the use of their
bones for that purpose it was the custom for
faithful attendants to hide the remains of their
chiefs in some secret cavern or bury them at sea.
Sharks were caught for sport, and eaten to
some extent. Shark hooks were very large, and
were frequently baited with human flesh. One
method of catching these monsters was to carry
pointed sticks which were thrust between the jaws
of the shark or into his vital parts. Men would
perch themselves upon some outlying rock or swim
114




Rishing- Canoes.


II 5


around in the clear warm water, until they caught
a glimpse of a shark, and then jump or dive under
the big fish and attack it as it would turn on its
back to bite. As a rule the fight would result favorably to the man, but sometimes he was worsted.
In the shoaler waters and inside the reefs, large
schools of rare edible fish run, and were caught in
great quantities by the natives, in various forms of
nets. Certain kinds were placed in the large ponds
to fatten. These ponds are large and shallow, made
by the construction of long sea walls, requiring much
time and labor. Sluices and gates are provided to
permit the flow of the tide and the admission of
spawn. When once in, the fish cannot get out, and
can be easily caught as needed.
The importance attached to the supply of fish
food caused canoe-making to be one of their
greatest industries, which, like all other works of a
similar nature, was accompanied by superstitious
incantations and ceremonies. When completed
the canoe was christened, not by the breaking of a
bottle of wine over the bow, but by sacrifices to a
particular god of the sea. In the case of a large
canoe for some noted chief a human sacrifice was
necessary to insure its safety and lucky voyages.
These canoes were low, narrow and light, drawing
but little water and made out of a single tree.
Some of them were upwards of fifty feet long, one
or two feet wide, and sometimes more than three
feet deep. The body of the canoe was generally
covered with a black paint, made of various




Ii6


Canoes-Fruilt.


earthy and vegetable materials, in which the bark
and oil of the kukui tree were the principal
ingredients. On the upper edge of the gunwales
was neatly sewed a wash-board or small strip of
hard white wood about six inches wide. These
wash-boards met and closed over stem and stern.
The tackling was very simple, consisting of a stub
mast supporting a sail made of mats in the shape
of a sprit. The paddles were large and strong,
with an oval-shaped blade and round handle, and
were made of the same hard wood employed in
building the canoe. Neither the canoe nor paddles
were carved or ornamented, but were nevertheless
very neat. To give the canoe greater stability and
steadiness, curved outriggers extended to one side
and supported a narrow float, giving the whole
the appearance of a catamaran. In these canoes
the natives would go through any kind of surf,
with a velocity that would excite the apprehension
of any man-of-war's-man, were he even in a good
whale-boat. Should they capsize, the natives swim
around, right the canoe, and get in as though no
accident had occurred.
The wonderful productiveness of the Hawaiian
Islands made it easy for the natives to obtain a livelihood on shore, and had it not been for the system of
tabus and traditions, by which the common people were held in subjection and their privileges
confined to a practical serfdom, life would have
been one continual pursuit of pleasure. Bananas,
yams, and other edible plants grew wild in all the




Irz~riation.-. Taro,


II7


valleys of the wooded districts; while bread-fruit,
cocoanuts, and a wild apple constituted the indigenous fruits of the islands. The mostimportant of all
the vegetable supply for food was the taro, and the
cultivation of this plant occupied all the farming
abilities of the native Hawaiian. It consists of two
kinds, the upland and the lowland. The former
grows on the hillsides, in dry ground, whereas the
latter, or more important staple, is propagated, like
rice, under water. Long irrigating ditches were
constructed to supply the water, and great skill
was required in preparing the bed, to obtain a good
crop. The ground was leveled off and enclosed
by a low wall impervious to water. The floor of
the patch was made as rich and as free from clods as
possible, and the tops cut from the ripe roots set
out in hills several feet apart. The water was let
in upon them, to remain until the crop was ripe,
usually about twelve months. The only labor
required was to keep the weeds out, and keep a
depth of about six inches of running water. The
climate permits planting at any time, so that a
continuous supply of ripe taro can be insured. No
other plant yields more food to a given space. The
root of the taro is oblong, from three inches to a
foot in length, and three or four inches in diameter.
The substance of the root is somewhat like that of
a yam, but more fibrous. Before it is cooked the
taste is exceedingly pungent and acrid. The
young leaves of this plant are cooked either separately or with meats, making a delicious green,




II8


2~Nat/ive Foods.


known as " luau."  The method of preparing the
root by the natives is by cooking it in a stone oven
or pit in the ground. The stones are first heated
red-hot and then, after brushing off the dust and
ashes at the bottom, the taro is laid in the oven till
it is full, and a few leaves spread on top. Hot
stones are then placed on these leaves, and a covering of leaves and earth over the whole. In this
state the taro is steamed or baked about half an
hour.
Potatoes, yams, fish, and meats are cooked in the
same manner. From the baked taro poi is made.
This is the national dish of the Hawaiian people.
The baked root is pounded into a moist paste and
thinned down by the addition of water, when the
mixture is allowed to ferment. To a stranger it
appears to be almost tasteless, but upon use it becomes very palatable. It is very nutritious, easily
digested, and can be retained on the stomach of an
invalid when no other food can be. When thinned
down to a thick liquid, by either the addition of
water or milk, it is called a poi cocktail, and is
most soothing to the stomach and highly beneficial
to an invalid. A pudding called " kulolo" is made
by the natives by mixing poi with the grated meat
and milk of the cocoanut, which is sweetened and
baked. Cocoanut mixed with sweet potato, and
baked, forms a compound called " poi-palau." In
no case does poi ever induce dyspepsia and its kindred afflictions. With poi the natives usually eat
the roasted kukui nuts salted with a coarse salt,




The Ti Plant.


II9


which is regarded as a great condiment. Limu, a
kind of sea-moss, is also eaten with relish by the
natives.
Another very important plant much used by the
natives is the ti. It is a slow-growing plant with
a large oblong root, which, when first dug from
the ground, is hard and fibrous, almost tasteless,
and of a white or yellow color. The leaves are of
a lively, shining green. The natives bake the root
in large ovens under ground. After baking, it appears like a different substance, and is of a yellowish-brown color, soft though fibrous, and saturated
with a highly saccharine juice. It is sweet and
pleasant to the taste, and much of it is eaten in this
state. It is used to make an intoxicating drink by
bruising the roots with a stone and steeping the
mass with water until it ferments. The liquor is
then drawn off and drunk without any further preparation. Since the introduction of the still by the
whites the fermented mass is distilled, making a
powerful liquor called "okolehao." It is an excellent antiscorbutic, and as such became very
useful to the whaling ships on their long voyages. The leaves are the best provender obtainable on the islands for stock taken to sea. The tileaves were woven together and formed a short
cloak which the natives sometimes wore. They
are also universally used to the present day to tie
up meat, fish, and other articles in the markets,
and in which to wrap meats which are to be
cooked under ground, imparting a delicate flavor
thereto.




120


Nuts-Meras.


The kukui (candle) nut, a heart-shaped nut about
the size of a walnut, was used by the natives for
many purposes. The tree furnished a gum used in
preparing varnish for their tapa; and when burned
to a charcoal and pulverized, was used for tattooing
the skin, or for making paint. The hard shells of
the nuts were removed and the kernels slightly baked
in an oven, when they were strung on the center
rib of a cocoanut leaf and burned as a torch, giving
a tolerably good light. The nuts were also baked
or roasted, and eaten with a coarse salt.
The meat supply of the natives was exceedingly
limited. The only indigenous quadrupeds consisted
of a small species of hog, with long head and small
erect ears; dogs, lizards, and a small animal between the mouse and a rat. In the mountains there
were several varieties of birds and wild geese, and
near the lagoons or ponds in the vicinity of the seashore there were great numbers of wild ducks and
other aquatic birds, and plover. The domestic fowl
was raised as an article of food. Fish were eaten
raw, dried, or baked. Pigs, dogs, and fowls were
killed, dressed and baked in the oven. In this way
the flavor was much improved over that of the other
methods of cooking. No labor was required to
raise hogs and fowls; they were simply permitted
to roam about. The dogs used for food were of a
breed that was rather small in size, something like
our terrier, and when raised for food were exclusively fed on vegetables and poi. From experience
I can say the flesh is sweeter than that of the pig,




Early Trade.


121


and much more palatable than that of goats or
kids.
With the introduction of the whites, the abolition
of the tabu system, and the distribution of lands,
the industrial conditions underwent great changes.
For several years after the discovery of the islands
by Captain Cook, very few vessels communicated
with them; but later on, when Vancouver and
other navigators made public the accounts of their
voyages, nearly every vessel employed in the
Pacific visited the country. Hence in the course
of time a regular market was established for the
sale of the products of the islands, and the harbor
of Honolulu soon became crowded with ships of
all nations. The discovery of sandal-wood in the
mountains opened a profitable channel of commerce, and from I8io to 1825 its sale became a
source of great revenue to the islands. Adventurers, chiefly from the United States, opened an
advantageous trade by collecting it from the natives.
They found a ready market for it in China, and
the goods from that country were brought in return, laying the foundation of an extensive trade.
The chiefs became very rich and accumulated
large treasures from the supply of this precious
wood, by means of which they were enabled to
purchase guns, ammunition, liquors, and vessels,
and the luxuries of life. They indulged in all
manner of extravagances and created extensive
establishments, the maintenance of which soon
exhausted their means. Dissipation, ruinous pur



I22


Sandal- Wood.


chases, and expensive ideas combined to leave
them in a worse condition than they were before
this boom.
The sandal-wood requires many years to arrive
at a fit state for the market, and there being no
cultivation of a fresh supply it soon became exhausted. The common natives were forced to
exceedingly severe labor and suffered increased
oppression, being obliged to remain for months at
a time in the mountains, searching for the trees,
felling them and bringing the wood down on their
backs to the royal warehouses. The odor of sandal-wood is very strong and is retained for years
after the tree is cut. The wood was extensively
used by the Chinese for the manufacture of fancy
articles and ornaments and to burn as incense in
their joss-houses. With the failure of a supply of
sandal-wood, the profits arising from the sale of
salt, and from the port dues from merchant vessels
visiting the islands, were not adequate to meet the
expenses of the government, much less liquidate
the debts of the chiefs.
Attempts were made to manufacture sugar from
the cane, which grew very abundantly and in great
luxuriance. Tobacco, coffee, and spices were introduced, and an attempt made to raise cotton,
which was tolerably successful the first year, but
by neglect the crop was not gathered and it rotted
in the pod.
In exchange for an immense quantity of vegetables, hogs, and native presents, Vancouver, on




Cattle — Whaling-Szugar.


123


his second and third voyages to the islands in
1793-'94, landed some live stock, consisting of
cattle and sheep, and a tabu was laid upon them
for ten years. In consequence of this tabu they
increased very rapidly, until now there are not
only large cattle ranches on the islands, but the
mountains are full of wild herds. Later on, in
1803, Captain Cleaveland, on his way from California to China, touched at the islands and landed
a few horses, which soon multiplied, and the
natives became expert horsemen, making excellent
cow-boys.
The principal receipts of the islands for a long
while were from the sale of supplies to the whaleships, of which a great number made their headquarters at Lahaina or Honolulu. This source of
revenue continued up to the civil war in the United
States, when the whaling fleet suffered so much
that the industry never recovered.
At first the cultivation of sugar-cane and manufacture of sugar met with many obstacles, in consequence of the lack and great cost of the proper
machinery and plant. The first sugar plantation
was started on the Island of Kauai in 1835, under
a concession, signed by the king, to Ladd & Co.,
an American company, by which certain lands
were leased for the purpose of agricultural development. A start was made, and though labor was
cheap the methods were so crude and wasteful that
but little progress was made, and the company
failed.  With the importation of laborers from




124     Effect of Reciprocity Treaty.


abroad, and the hope of reciprocity with the United
States, the sugar industry revived, but it never
amounted to much until 1876, when a treaty of commercial reciprocity with the United States went
into effect. Under the provisions of this treaty an
era of unexpected prosperity set in and the production of sugar and rice increased more than was
ever dreamed of. Not only the rich valleys that
were well watered were planted in cane, but large
tracts of previously barren land were brought under
cultivation by extensive irrigation.  Canals were
constructed for that purpose. Artesian wells were
bored, and the water pumped to heights of four
and five hundred feet. Great mills were erected
at enormous cost, and sugar became the chief
product of the islands.
Although the rainfall on parts of the islands is
sufficient to supply the growing wants of vegetation,
in other parts everything requires irrigation, as the
soil is disintegrated lava, frequently over beds of
porous coral. Some of the irrigation ditches are
forty miles in length, through dense woods, tunneled
through solid rock, and spanning wide canons by
means of substantial iron bridges, wooden fluming
or steel piping. The Ewa plantation, near Honolulu, one of the largest, was originally a worthless
and unproductive area of land, unsuitable even for
pasturage; but by means of artesian wells and
enormous pumps the water is pumped through
pipes to an elevation of several hundred feet to
irrigate the cane. It is now one of the finest plan



Sugar Production.


125


tations on the islands. There are about sixty sugar
plantations on the islands, covering about go,ooo
acres of land, employing about 20,000 laborers, with
a yield per annum of about 225,000 tons of sugar.
It requires an average of eighteen months for a crop
to mature, and the ordinary yield is about three
and a half tons per acre; yet on specially rich
alluvial soil the yield is sometimes as great as nine
tons to the acre.  Steam  plows, the latest improved cultivators, and the most modern, elaborate,
and perfected machinery are used. Both the diffusion and crushing methods are used to extract the
sugar from the cane.
The cane is cut and stripped in the field and by
means of portable railways is transported to the
mills. It is then run between several sets of large
rollers, steam being applied to the crushed material
between each set of rollers to extract the juice; or
if the diffusion method is used the cane is cut into
thin slices by means of revolving knives, and the
juice soaked out in tanks of hot water, under hydraulic and steam  pressure.  After the juice is
extracted it passes through filters into clarifiers,
where it is heated and skimmed, passing thence
into the boilers, where it is boiled down into syrup.
From these boilers the syrup passes into a vacuum
pan, where it is boiled to granulation, passing
thence through centrifugals, where it is freed of all
molasses or syrup, the dried sugar dropping into
bins for bagging and shipment. The molasses is
boiled, granulated, and passed again through the
centrifugals, making a lower grade of sugar.




I26


Sugar-Rice.


The market for the sugar produced in the Hawaiian Islands is the Pacific Coast of the United States
and Canada. For a number of years the entire
crop has been purchased by the American Sugar
Trust, but this year (i898) about two-thirds of the
crop has been sold to rival refineries in New York
and San Francisco.
The passage of the McKinley bill giving a bounty
on domestic sugar, and the cultivation of beet sugar
in California and the northwest, and placing imported sugars on the free list, lowered the price of
Hawaiian sugar so much that the value of Hawaiian sugar property was materially lowered.  It
became apparent that the country could not exist
on a single industry that was liable to fluctuations
by every modification of the American tariff laws;
hence the cultivation of new products on the large
extent of country unsuited for the culture of sugar
or rice was commenced.
Rice, which is also admitted free of duty to the
United States under the provisions of the reciprocity treaty, is extensivelycultivated. Its culture
is principally carried on by the Chinese, and in the
markets of San Francisco it grades with the best
shipped from China. The ground is plowed and
well harrowed and the field then submerged and
the water allowed to stand until the crop
ripens, when it is drawn off. The method of cultivating rice is crude and primitive. On a small
field the Chinaman thickly sows the seed. When
the plants are about six inches high they are pulled




CofTeee- Tea.


127


up and taken in great bales on the backs of men to
the field for planting. The plants are set out in the
mud by hand, in rows about eight inches apart.
As the crop begins to ripen it takes about all the
time of one man to about ten acres to scare off
the small birds that devour the crop. When matured the water is run off for the ripening of the
straw, and the crop is harvested with hand-sickles.
It is spread on the ground to dry, and then bundled
and carried to the threshing-floor. The grain is
separated from the straw while on the floor by
walking a lot of horses or Chinese cattle over it,
and by beating the straw with hand-flails, the straw
being then carefully raked off and the chaff separated by fans. The rice is then milled. Very
little of it is shipped to the United States as paddy.
Coffee cultivation has been begun with most flattering prospects. Hawaiian, or Kona coffee, as it
is called, takes a high place among the best coffees
in the world. The trees are grown anywhere from
the sea-level to 3,800 feet above the sea. In three
years from the time of setting out, the plantation
will yield expenses, and in five years commence to
pay well. One of the greatest difficulties in coffeegrowing is the blight, but by the introduction of
peculiar parasites and lady-bugs for each kind of
pest the various blights have been very nearly
eradicated.
The cultivation of tea has met with good results.
It grows to better advantage on the higher elevations than in the lower sections. The high price
of labor has prevented its extensive cultivation.




Fibres-FJruit.


I28


Hemp has been experimented with, and the samples grown were pronounced by experts to be of
good length, clean, strong, and fairly bright. The
plant is free from enemies among the insect tribe,
and it is not injured by rain or storms nor by
drought. The expense of cultivation is almost
nothing, and the yield per acre was found to be at
the rate of thirteen and one-half tons of clean
fiber.
Ramie, or vegetable silk, grows luxuriantly, but
the want of proper machinery to prepare its fiber
for the market has prevented development of the
industry.
Tobacco has been produced of a quality that
compares favorably with the best manila wrappers.
There is no question but that the raising of tobacco
in the islands can be made a paying industry.
The soil and climate of Hawaii cannot be excelled for the production of tropical and subtropical fruits, and their introduction has added largely
to the industrial enterprises of the islands, especially so in the case of semi-tropical fruits, such as the
avocado pear, banana, pineapple, orange, lime, and
lemon. The avocado pear is common to the West
Indies and Mexico, and of different varieties, varying in size and color, the largest being about six
inches long and weighing upwards of three pounds.
The trees grow to a large size in the Hawaiian
Islands, and the fruit is of a superior quality. It
is of a butter-like consistency, with a nutty flavor,
and makes a delicious dressing for salads. The




Fruit — Vegetables.


129


mango grows in great profusion, and several varieties are used for making chutney. The best
qualities of mangoes were imported from Jamaica
and India, and, for eating, their flavor is exceedingly
fine. The mango tree is an evergreen, with small
glossy leaves, makes a good shade-tree, and the
gum which exudes from the trunk is used in medicine. It is very prolific, and bears fiuit which
ripens during several months of the year. Frequently trees are found with ripe fruit on one side
and blossoms on the other.
Cocoanuts, which grow along the shore where
nothing else will, are now very little cultivated. If
attended to they will, after about ten years from
planting, bear steadily for generations. Not only
the nut, but the husks or fibrous covering and the
leaves furnish valuable marketable material.
The sapodilla, soursop, cherimoya, custard-apple,
jack-fruit, pomelo, papia, citron, mammy apple,
water-lemon, granadila, pomegranate, and tamarind are some of the desirable exotic fruits that do
well in the islands.
Vegetables of all descriptions are raised the year
round, and watermelons and cantaloupes are superior to those grown in most countries.
Pineapples were introduced in the islands by
some of the early navigators. They grow wild on
all the islands, but the later introduction of a superior quality, and recent revival of the industry, have
developed quite an export of this fruit. There are
some twenty-five varieties, known by different names




130


Pin eaJals, les-Bcan an as.


in the various localities from which they are obtained. Near Pearl City is quite a plantation where
a most excellent variety is cultivated. They have
good shipping qualities and grow to a good size,
some reaching the extreme weight of seventeen
pounds for a single fruit, though a fair average is
from six to ten pounds. The season of pineapples
is from the middle of May to the middle of August,
although some varieties bear fiuit throughout the
year. In the year I893 no less than 6o,ooo pineapples were shipped from the islands.
The banana business has of late become of great
importance. At present bananas are raised in very
small patches, yet in the year I892 there were
$I75,ooo worth of bananas shipped from the islands. There is a great market for bananas on the
western coast of the United States, and the cost of
raising them is very small.
Along the mountain ranges is a most luxuriant
growth of trees and vines, large forests of magnificent trees whose wood is beautifully marked and
takes a high polish that would place them in competition with the best walnut or mahogany for the
mlanufacture of ornamental furniture. All that interfered with an exceedingly rapid development of
the industries of the country was the uncertainty
of the political future, for capital is ever wary of
investment in a country in which political stability
does not exist. The Republic of Hawaii was
honest, able, and progressive, but the intelligent
leaders had every reason for anxiety and future




tli
iAMMO FN Z  ZPPLESPFARL H ARBR..




I




Independence Impossible.


I31


uncertainty, as they fully recognized the fact that
there did not exist the elements, in sufficient numbers, to maintain a stable independent government.
Now that the Hawaiian Islands have become an
integral part of the United States, development will
proceed with giant strides. Since the annexation
of the Islands to the Great Republic of North
America a desirable class of people have begun to
look about for both large and small investments.
With American industry and American thrift and
American emigration, with the present conditions
considered, the future industrial outlook of the
Hawaiian Islands is very flattering, and as soon as
the large leaseholds shall expire and the government
lands taken up and developed, there will be a great
increase in the production, manufactures will
spring up, and great shipping industries established.




CHAPTER IX.


LAND TENURE.
One of the most important features of Hawaiian
evolution is the system of land tenure, past and
present, by which the soil was distributed and is
now held by the present owners. At first, during
the time of the earliest native occupation of the
islands, there were land and water enough for all,
and possessions were based upon use only. Industrial enterprises were commenced; canoe-building
was developed; the manufacture of native cloth
flourished. Great engineering feats were undertaken, such as irrigating ditches and sea walls, inclosing bays and reefs for fish-ponds; and implements of stone and wood for mechanical and industrial works were invented and improved upon.
As the different communities began to crowd the
limited areas of the valleys, and the population
grew until the whole group was stocked with people, the principles of land tenure developed from
the patriarchal system into one of tribal or communal ownership. The improved condition of the
lands by irrigation led to strict rules for the distribution of the water supply, and the developed localities acquired a special value. As the population
continued to increase, and the best lands became
occupied, an increasing demand gave them a market value, giving rise to disputes over boundaries,!32




Power of Chiefs.


133


and gradually developing a feudal system of land
tenure. The head men acquired the rank of chiefs,
and class distinction became very marked, by which
the people were divided into a nobility, comprising
the kings and chiefs; the religious order, including
priests, sorcerers, and doctors; and the common
people or laborers.
Internal wars were frequent, and the ambition of
the chiefs for political power and personal aggrandizement led to their increased importance, which
was prejudicial to the rights of the common people,
who were oppressively taxed in support of the wars
and in defence of their chiefs from the attacks of
ambitious rivals. Necessity for the protection of
life and property caused the people to become
closely attached to some chief, who afforded protection in consideration of service and a portion of
the produce of the soil. The chiefs assumed not
only political power, but also that of a sacred and
religious character, claiming to be of divine origin
and in close alliance with the invisible rulers, and
they were looked upon with superstitious awe by
the common people, who became separated from
them by a wide and permanent distinction. When
they went abroad all the common people prostrated themselves upon the ground, face down.
Death even became the penalty for the slightest
breach of etiquette. It was death for a common
man to remain standing in the presence of the King,
or even at the mention of his name, or when the
King's food, drinking water, or wearing apparel




134


Control of Land.


was carried by; to enter his inclosure or house
without permission, or even to cross his shadow or
the shadow of his house; to touch his head or occupy a position above it. It was the custom for
any one approaching the King's presence to crawl
on the ground and leave in the same manner. No
one but a chief could wear the red or yellow feather
cloak and helmet or ivory clasp, and his canoe and
sails alone were allowed to be painted red. Wherever he went he was surrounded by a retinue of
attendants, some of whom carried the royal kahilis
(feather ornaments); others took charge of his spittoon, while others were always at hand to knead
and shampoo him whenever he desired. There
were also in attendance priests, sorcerers, bards,
and story-tellers, with dancers, drummers, and buffoons. With a growing power like this the chiefs
became not only the owners of the soil, but of all
the products that grew out of it, as well as of the
time and labor of the people. The constant wars
between the rival chiefs resulted in the smaller or
weaker of their number allying themselves to some
one of the more powerful warrior chiefs, until each
island was under the control of its high chief, when
finally the whole group passed under the sovereignty
of Kamehameha I, about I79o, and the feudal system was complete. Each of these smaller chiefs
divided his territory among an inferior order of
petty chiefs, who owed to him the same service and
obedience that he owed to the high chief. In this
way the land was subdivided again and again, down




People without RZights.


I35


to the serfs who tilled the soil. The common people received not more than one-third of the products
of their industry, while the other two-thirds were
divided between the chiefs of different grades. The
taxes were paid in articles of food, vegetables, fruit.
hogs, dogs, fowls, and fish, ku-kui nuts for light,
kapa, nets, calabashes, and feathers, besides personal labor on certain days of every moon, which
consisted chiefly in working the taro-patches of the
chief. They were made to work on all public
works, such as building and repairing the temples,
fish-ponds, houses, and canoes of the chiefs.
Whenever the chief travelled about, his horde of
retainers were supported entirely by the contributions of the people, and if sufficient quantity was
not forthcoming, the people were plundered of
almost everything they had. Upon the death of a
chief, or the accession of a new one, either by
inheritance or conquest, it was the custom  to
redivide and distribute all the lands among his
adherents. The only redress the colmmon people
had was the privilege of moving from one land to
another and joining the forces of a new landlord,
becoming in each case merely tenants at will and
liable to be dispossessed at any time, subject to the
personal whim of the ruling chief. Thousands of
unoffending people would in this way be sent
houseless and homeless to find a resting-place in
some other section of the country. This redistribution of lands was carried out with great severity,
and especially so if the chief came into power as




136


Lands uzder Karmehameha.


the result of war. When the islands were conquered by Kamehameha I, the fullest and severest
application of this custom was carried out. He
divided the lands among his principal warriors and
chiefs, retaining a portion to be cultivated by his
own immediate servants or attendants.  Each
principal chief divided his lands anew and gave
them out to an inferior order of chiefs, by whom
they were again and again subdivided, passing
through the hands of five or six persons, from the
king down to the lowest tenants. Each island was
divided into several districts, and each district was
subdivided into long strips extending, as a rule,
from the sea to the mountains, so that each chief
should have his share of all the products of the
mountain regions, the intermediate cultivated land
and the sea. These strips were again subdivided
into smaller holdings, which in turn were divided
into patches. Each division had a carefully defined
boundary and a name.
During the long reign of Kamehameha, affairs
became settled, and the long and undisturbed
possession of the lands by the chiefs developed a
sentiment favorable to permanent individual rights
in land, which finally crystallized into law. Upon
the death of Kamehameha I, his son came to the
throne, and it was his desire to redistribute the
lands according to custom, but the united opposition was so strong that beyond a few assignments
among his intimate friends he relinquished his
purpose, and from that time on until the year 1839




Evolution of Tenure.


I37


the chiefs remained in possession of their lands.
In that and the following year laws were passed
to prevent evictions without cause and the wanton
seizure of the property of the tenants.  This
increased security of tenure led to activity in land
transactions. Chiefs transferred lands to others,
they became a marketable commodity, and incited
speculation in buying and selling. The King even
gave away and sold some of his personal lands,
and foreigners became land-owners.  But these
sales carried with them no permanent title to the
lands, as the act of the chiefs was simply an
expression of an opinion, and not a binding law.
Nevertheless, purchasers felt a degree of security
in their holdings through a public sentiment favoring permanent occupation and hereditary succession. Besides, the possession of lands by foreigners
with strong governments back of them, and zealous
consuls to insist upon their claims, supported by
men-of-war in the harbor, rendered their occupation secure.
When Kamehameha III came to the throne the
unsatisfactory status of land tenures was pressed
upon his attention, and realizing the defenceless
and wretched condition of his people, he became
deeply interested. The increasing demand of the
foreigners for the right to buy and hold land finally
brought about a national crisis forcing the King
to decided action. He thereupon consulted the
chiefs and conferred with the whites on the subject, the result being the proclamation of a Bill of




I38


Division of Lands.


Rights on the 7th of June, I839, by which protection was secured to the persons of all the people,
together with their lands and their property, while
they conformed to the laws of the kingdom. Although the Bill of Rights did much towards defining the rights in lands granted by it, the feudal
right of controlling transfers of land was still retained by the King, and all lands forfeited for nonpayment of taxes reverted to him personally. His
consent was necessary for any transfer of real estate
in the kingdom, for real mortgages, and for the
seizure of land for debt. Upon the adoption of the
constitution of I840, the question of the proportionate interests of the King, the chiefs, and the
common people in the lands of the kingdom was
one of great difficulty, and the necessity of an organized government, separate from the person of
the King, became apparent even to the chiefs. This
was carried out by three comprehensive acts in
1845, 1846, and I847. The King retained all his
private lands as his own individual property, subject only to the rights of the tenants.  Other
lands were designated by him, about one-third of
the lands of the country, to maintain the royal state,
since known as I' crown lands."  One-third ofthe
lands were set apart as the property of the Hawaiian
government, subject to the control of the sovereign
as pointed out by the constitution and laws; and
one-third to the chiefs, and common people, each
receiving what he was actually in possession
of. The division in nowise interfered with the




Division of Lands.


I39


lands that had been or might be granted by the
King or his predecessors in fee simple to any Hawaiian subject or foreigner, nor with unexpired
leases. It was left optional with any chief, holding
lands in which the government held a share, to
pay into the treasury one-third of the unimproved
value of said lands, or surrender portions of land in
lieu thereof, which payment or surrender extinguished all claims of the government to them.
The division between the King, chiefs, and the people was carried out in 1848. Laws were also
passed providing for the purchase of land from the
government by private land-holders. A record of
the division and sales by the government is contained in books of registry of land titles, deposited
in the office of the Minister of the Interior.
In 1850 most ofthe chiefs ceded a third part oftheir
lands to the government in lieu of paying for the
government interest therein, receiving allodial title
for the remainder, this being accepted by the privy
council. By these cessions the crown lands received
their designation from the King's donation, and much
of the government land was derived from the chiefs.
In all the awards of each of the divisions the rights
of the tenants were reserved, and the acts of I850
and I$85  protected the common people in the
right to take wood, water and fish from the sea
appurtenant to the land, but gave them no right to
pasturage on the lands of the chiefs.
By the act organizing the Executive Department
a Board of Royal Commissioners to quiet land




14o


Crown Lands.


titles was created. The Land Commission began
its work in T846, and made great progress in
adjudicating the claims of the common people, but
its powers were not adequate to dispose of the
still unsettled questions between the King, the cliefs,
and government. As the chiefs and tenants alike
were required to make proofs of ownership to the
lands they occupied, and failing to do so their
rights were barred, the result was that the ignorant
natives failed in many instances to comply, and so
lost their property. The division between the
King and the chiefs was effected through partition
deeds signed by both parties. The chiefs then
went before the commission and received awards
for the lands partitioned off to them.
Kamehameha III and his immediate successors
dealt with the crown lands as their private property,
selling, leasing, or mortgaging them at pleasure,
until I864, when. the supreme court decided they
should descend to the successors to the throne.
The following year the legislature passed an act to
relieve the royal domain from encumbrances and to
render the same inalienable. It provided for the
redemption of the mortgages on the estate which
had been incurred by the kings, by the issue of
exchequer bonds not to exceed $30,000, and enacted
that the lands reserved by the act of I848-i. e., the
crown lands-should be henceforth inalienable and
descend to the heirs and successors of the Hawaiian
crown forever; also that it should not be lawful to
execute any lease for a term exceeding thirty years.




Crown Lands-Spreckeds.


T4V


A board of commissioners of the crown lands was
created consisting of three persons appointed by
the King, two of whom were to be appointed from
among the cabinet ministers. The King thereupon,
in consideration of the payment by the legislature
of the debts with which the estate had become
encumbered, and of the income rents, renounced
all personal claim to the lands which were set
apart for the successors to the throne, instead of
being governed by the general laws of inheritance.
Since that time the government has exercised control over them, and the legislature has passed
various acts relating to their disposition. The
courts have also, by several decisions, drawn the
distinction between these lands and the private
lands of the Kamehamehas and their heirs. Now
that the Hawaiian royalty has ceased to exist, the
republican government claims title to these lands
as the " successor" to the kingdom, and is selling
the lands to actual settlers.
On the death of Kamehameha V, the last of the
old line of kings, his half-sister, Princess Ruth,
inherited his private lands. The boom in sugar,
under the reciprocity treaty with the United States,
had its effect about this time and Claus Spreckles
made his appearance on the islands. He was
desirous of obtaining a fee-simple title for a sugar
company of certain rich crown lands on the Island
of Maui, and secured from Ruth a quitclaim of all
her interest or claim in and to the crown lands for
the small sum of $Io,ooo. These lands are now




142


A S5reckels Deal.


worth millions. This conveyance was disputed,
but the Prime Minister of Kalakaua compromised
the claim without taking it to the courts, an act was
carried through the legislature to authorize the commissioners to transfer to Spreckles 24,000 acres, more
or less, in fee simple, worth some $500,000, and a
royal patent was issued to that effect. Spreckles
then applied for a perpetual monopoly of the water
for irrigating this tract, and upon refusal by the
cabinet to grant it, he made an effort to secure the
removal of the cabinet by a vote of the legislature
of want of confidence. Failing in this, he made a
bargain with the King by which the latter sent
messengers at 2 o'clock in the morning demanding
the resignation of each member of the cabinet.
This was one of Kalakaua's first arbitrary and despotic acts, for which Mr. Spreckles was directly
responsible. He then appointed a new ministry,
who granted to Spreckles the water privilege for
thirty years at a small annual rental.
The crown lands until recently were generally
leased to corporations for cane culture and grazing,
at very low rentals, for long terms of years. Legislative efforts were made to have them divided up
(some 876,ooo acres) into small farms for the
settlement of industrious and thrifty farmers. The
monarchy prevented this, but it is now being rapidly
done under the republic. Between the years I850
and i86o, most of the desirable government lands
were sold, generally to natives, but in consequence
of their thriftless dispositions they soon sold out,




Distribution of Lands.


I43


and the natives have become largely landless.
Subsequently the natives purchased government
lands under an act providing for the sale of residence lots from one to fifty acres each.
In I850, one-twentieth of the lands belonging to
the government was set apart for the purpose of
education.  Another large tract, known as the
Bishop estate, a gift from a native, Mrs. Bishop,
is devoted to educational purposes.
The chiefs generally were extravagant, got into
debt, and, as they obtained title to their lands,
these debts were mostly paid with lands which
have become a part of the plantations. The distribution of the lands at present is about 830,000
acres of government lands, about 876,ooo acres
crown lands, and about 1,850,ooo acres of private
lands. Of these, in I892, Europeans and Americans owned nearly,0o6o,ooo acres; natives, 257,ooo; half-castes, 530,ooo; Chinese, I2,ooo, and
Japanese, 200 acres.
Many of the old surveys made under the orders
of the commission are full of defects.  Some of
the surveys are recorded which were made with a
ship's compass or a pocket needle, with no allowance for variation. Very little attention was paid
to local marks or topographical features of the
country. This has resulted in many overlaps and
gaps. General maps of districts or tracts giving
the location of claims were scarcely thought of.
Portions of government lands, sold to private
parties, were surveyed at the expense of the pur



I44           Survey Bureau.
chaser. The pieces sold were of all sizes and
shapes, and were surveyed without reference to
previous surveys of adjoining land, frequently cutting across each other, leaving the worthless and
unsalable portions after the rest had been sold.
An efficient government survey bureau has been
engaged for many years, however, in straightening
out this tangle, and has now reduced the system to
comparative certainty. A most careful and exact
trigonometrical survey of the country has been
made, and the details of most of the districts filled
in. The late President of the Hawaiian Republic
is an able lawyer, thoroughly posted on the landed
system of the islands, and under an act drafted by
him government lands with good and sound titles
can be purchased.




CHAPTER X.


TRIP TO THE OTHER ISLANDS AND THE VOLCANO.
A failure to remove the Jones-Wilcox cabinet
by a vote of want of confidence exhibited a strength
in the cabinet, revived business interest, elicited
expressions of satisfaction amongst the people, and
indicated a final settlement of the political crisis,
which made it justifiable for the Boston to leave the
'harbor for a long-needed target practice.  The
Boston got under way on the 4th of January, 1893,
with the United States Minister and his daughter
on board as passengers and proceeded to Hilo,
situated on the Island of Hawaii, about 250 miles
from Honolulu.
just prior to leaving Honolulu I drove about
town in a carriage with the ex-Minister of Foreign
Affairs, and in listening to his talk with a number of the native members of the legislature, and
their answers, I became convinced that a movement was under way to oust the cabinet, and that
the chances were in favor of its accomplishment.
In a conversation with the United States Minister,
Mr. Stevens, shortly after, I remarked that I believed
that the cabinet would be voted out before the adjournment of the legislature, and from what I had
heard from reliable royalist sources, the Queen had
no intention of permitting them to remain in office
until the meeting of the next legislature; that she
'45




148


H4awaii-Mauna Loa.


days gone by, but is now simply a dilapidated
village of ancient buildings and abandoned houses,
scattered about beneath a thick foliage of shadetrees and cocoanut-palms. Through these trees a
glimpse of cane fields can be seen running up to
the foot of immense hills in the rear, that are cut
by deep ravines between rugged bluffs.
Leaving Maui, we were in a few hours off the
north coast of Hawaii, the largest island of the
group. The scenery along the northern or windward side of the island is both grand and beautiful.
The land terminates in cliffs, varying from 200 to
2,000 feet in height, plunging down almost vertically into the Pacific. The long, heavy swell or
the ocean, driven for several thousand miles before
the trade-winds, breaks with great force against
these bluffs, throwing spray high into the air and
decorating the walls with innumerable small rainbows, produced by the soft rays of the morning
sun.  These bluffs are frequently cut by deep
ravines, canons, and narrow gorges, through which
copious streams discharge their waters in magnificent waterfalls and foaming cataracts, tumbling
into the sea, giving an additional splendor to the
scene.  Above these bluffs, the surface slopes
upwards towards the mountainous interior, at first
with a gentle acclivity, then steeper, until at length
it is almost precipitous, culminating in the snowcapped mountains of Mauna Kea and Mauna Loa,
upwards of I4,000 feet high.
All along the coast-line can be seen the rich cane



I
i
RAINBOW FALLS-111LO.








Hifo.


I49


fields, sugar-mills, and plantation-houses, little
villages, school-houses, and church-spires, while
in the valleys and ravines and on the face of the
bluff there is a luxurious growth of ferns, vines,
and tropical vegetation. About three miles inland
from the cliff-bound shore is a forest some ten to
fifteen miles in depth, so dense that it can hardly
be penetrated. Higher up, the sides are clothed
with bushes, ferns, and mountain plants, while still
beyond, the summits are composed of dark lava,
partly decomposed, and entirely destitute of every
kind of verdure, snow lying there throughout the
year.
Finally we let go an anchor in the Bay of Hilo,
from which a black sandy beach rises gently to the
pretty little town of Hilo, situated at the mouth of
the Wailuku river. Nature has been prodigal in
her gifts of beauty to this town by the sea. On
either side of the streets are merry bubbling
streams, and every little nook and hillside is banked
with masses of ferns and plants. Stately trees are
in leaf, and roses and lilies bloom the year round.
It is difficult to imagine any scenery more lovely
than that which borders the Wailuku river, which
has its source on the slope of Mauna Kea, and in
its course dashes in foaming cataracts over cliffs,
through dense tropical forests, and past the rich
lowlands into the Bay at Hilo. Along its banks
are scattered houses, and the lands adjoining are
very fertile, producing all the tropical fruits in
profusion.  Just across the bay fronL  Hilo is




150     Cocoanut IsAand-Mountains,


Cocoanut Island, with a delightful white-beached
bathing-place, where picnics are held. The people
of the town gave us a grand reception there one
afternoon. This island was the legendary scene
of one of the greatest exploits of the last of the
heroic kings of Oahu. To obtain the daughter of
the great Kamehameha, the chief of Oahu quietly
stole ashore here, abducted the sleeping princess
and carried her from the magic shore across the
moonlit waves in safety to his home, and as the
picnickers while away the time on the wave-lapped
beach, beneath the clustering cocoanut-trees, they
still feel that Love treads the bleaching sands, a
willing captive.
Hawaii is the largest and most southern island of
the group, and resembles in shape an equilateral
triangle, somewhat less than 300 miles in circumference. Nowhere else can the results of the interior forces of the earth be seen to better advantage
than in Hawaii. The bulk of the island has been
estimated to be z,6oo cubic miles of lava rock
above sea-level, and it is remarkable that the soundings around the island show that less than four
miles from shore there is a water depth of three and a
half miles. The Pacific, if laid bare, would show
these islands as a number of mountains, 32,000 feet
high, with truncated tops, and presenting an appearance just the reverse of the mountains we see on
shore. Instead of their being covered with vegetation at their bases, while their tops are barren, or
covered with snow, they would be perfectly bare at




Hlawa'Iian Volcaanoes.!5


151


their bases, and all around their tops they would be
covered with beautiful vegetation and coral polypus.
Unlike other volcanic piles of the world, which are
covered with cinder cones, the lava of the great
volcanoes of Hawaii flows out evenly in enormous
deluges, running sometimes for months, or even a
whole year, with little or no explosive action, except at the point of exit, which gives to the colossal
piles an exceptional form —a great dome with a
nearly flat summit-in the center of which is a
sunken pit, two and a half to three miles in width,
and upwards of a thousand feet in depth. At intervals an outbreak of lava occurs through huge
fissures which open in the side of the mountain.
The lava spouts out in gigantic fountains from 200
to I,oo000 feet high, collecting into a river of fire
from a mile to two and a half miles in width, which
flows toward the sea, varying its velocity according
to the slope. Sometimes it runs ten miles an hour,
and at others it spreads out into great lakes and
fields, making little progress for days. As the flow
descends, small rivulets are shot out on the sides,
which soon blacken and harden, only to be covered
by another and another stream. As the surface
cools it remains hot within, and beneath the hardened covering the liquid river flows on, advancing sometimes less than a hundred yards a day,
leaving in its train fragmental products from which
are formed, by explosions, steep conical hills.
These flows are destructive of everything within
their path. In I88So the flow stopped within half a




'5P,


Lava- Flows.


mile of the beautiful little town of Hilo. So mild
in action are these flows, as a rule, that an observer
may stand a few feet to the windward of one, so
near that the heat will make the face tingle, yet
without danger. The people flock to witness the
sublime spectacle, and display as much eagerness
to approach the scene as the people of other countries show to get away from one. These lavaflows have crossed and recrossed one another in a
confused network, in the paths of which desolation
is complete.  The more recent ones are black
masses of lava, covering many thousands of acres of
valuable land. The great central valley between
Mauna Loa and Mauna Kea is a vast tangled wilderness of lava-flows, which sometimes extend
down the mountain-side for miles without a break.
The last great flow occurred in I887. A stream
of molten lava broke through a fissure in the side
of Mauna Loa, nearly 7,000 feet above the sea-level,
and in three days it reached the coast, a distance of
20 miles. The most extensive flow of recent years
took place in ISSo, and came near destroying the
town of Itilo. The lava stream burst forth from
the eastern slope of Mauna Loa, i,000 feet above
the level of the sea, and continued to flow for nine
months. Along the entire upper line of its advance, it was one crash of rolling, sliding, and
tumbling mass of red-hot slag, from io to 30 feet
in height, accompanied by tremendous roaring and
incessant explosions. Its progress was from the
interior plain down through dark forests and dense




The Volcano Road.


I53


jungles, toppling over mammoth trees, filling up
streams, and driving before its lurid glare every
species of beast or fowl, until finally ceasing to
flow, within a half-mile of Hilo. Some of these
eruptions are attended by a preliminary series of
earthquake shocks and destructive tidal waves.
Others are accompanied by no such phenomena.
After a few days off Hilo, engaged in great gun
target-practice, a fellow officer and myself were
given an opportunity to visit the greatest active
volcano in the world, the volcano of Kilauea. We
made arrangements the evening before with parties
on shore for a conveyance, horses, and guide, and
early in the morning started out in a light buggy
over an excellent macadamized road being built by
the government to the volcano, but not then completed. The road took us through cultivated fields
and avenues of rich tropical jungle and foliage up
a gradual incline until we reached the lower slopes
of the majestic Mauna Loa on our right, with a
beautiful vista of rich fields, fern-forests, and the
broad Pacific on our left. Arriving about noon at
a small tavern on the side of the road known as
the Half-Way House, we stopped for refreshments,
and then drove on until we reached a point near
the terminal of the finished road, about 25 miles
from Hilo. There we met our guide with saddlehorses, and a man to take care of the buggy.
In the saddle, and preceded by the guide, we
entered a narrow trail leading through an intensely
thick and marshy fern-forest.  The horses were




154


Volcano of Kilauea.


protected from sinking by a corduroy of fern logs.
For about three miles we were in this forest, emerging
into an open, covered with tough grass and shrubs,
between great lumps of lava-rock, and the trail
became easier. For six miles more our way lay
over rough and desolate tracts of lava occasionally
covered with a thin layver of soil on which grew, here
and there, a green tuft of grass, a straggling shrub
or creeping vine. In every direction we could see
little conical hills of lava in distorted forms,
resembling small extinct craters.
Late in the afternoon the welcome Volcano House
hove in sight, and all about were to be seen jets of
steam rising from the ground in every direction.
The Volcano House stands but a few feet fiom the
edge of the great crater. Its close proximity to the
crater subjects it to frequent shocks of earthquake,
and it looks as though it might be insecure, yet no
accident has occurred since its erection.  The
vicinity is marked by fissures, cracks, and steamholes. Over some of these fissures and holes are
deposits of sulphur, and from these pipes are led
into the hotel, forming natural steam and sulphur
baths, highly beneficial upon a return friom the
tedious trip to the crater. From the front of the
hotel we could look down into the great crater,
which is nine miles in circumference and 6oo feet
deep, with perpendicular walls, stretching out like
a great plateau. In this crater and about three
miles distant is the active lake of molten lava, the
smoke from which could be distinctly seen.




XIn the Crater.


I55


So soon as we had rested a little, our impatience
to see the lake before dark caused us to arrange at
once for the descent.  Fresh and experienced
horses were secured, and with a crater guide we
set out once more. Just in front of the hotel we
descended into the great crater by means of a steep
zigzag road. The floor of this vast pit is covered
with black lava hills in gigantic convolutions,
fantastic forms and irregular shapes, piled up in
endless confusion, while the level portion is crossed
by many cracks and fissures, from which jets of
hot steam and sulphuric vapors are constantly
arising. This glistening surface crackles under
foot like a thin icy crust on snow, but is firm
underneath, except in some places, where the brittle
covering treacherously conceals a fissure or cavity.
Myriads of thread-like filaments of lava resembling
twisted hair are seen floating in the air or deposited
here and there, the products of volcanic fires-a
product similar to blown glass. This is known as
" Pele's hair," Pele being the mythical fire goddess of the lake. Over this great waste a trail has
been constructed to within a short distance of the
final pit, in which is situated the burning lake.
At the end of the trail there was a paddock, where
the horses were left, and we went the remainder of
the distance on foot. We arrived in time to view
the scene by daylight, and to make the descent
about 300 feet into the inner pit, to within a few
feet of the molten mass.
In this great bed we saw a volume of liquid fire,




I56


Zn the Crater.


like molten iron, moving to and fro, surging and
hissing like a sea in a storm. Conducted by the
guide, I went across a thin shell of lava, burning
'to the soles of the feet, and over crevices through
which the livid fire could be seen only a few inches
down, until I calne to the edge of the cone-shaped
wall that confined the liquid mass of some twenty
acres or more. Ascending to the top of this cone,
I stood within a few feet of the boiling lake, and
with a stick stirred its surface. The heat was intense, as the lake of fire, boiling like a caldron,
covered in places with hardened crust, separated
by great lanes of fire, surged and rolled its heavy
surf against its enclosingwalls. The whole surface
was constantly changing, fountains were playing at
many points, and liquid tongues of fire would leap
up as the congealed surfaces would meet with a
crash, and new lanes form, sometimes opening
clear across the lake. One of the fountains broke
out just in front of me, and threw its clots of melted
stone over the wall close to my right. I immediately climbed down the cone and made for the
bluff in a straight line, against the advice of the
guide. One of my feet broke through into a crevice
and the whole sole of the shoe was burned off. In
less than an hour the cone on which I had been
standing fell in and the lava overflowed several
acres.
After that I followed the guide, and reaching the
top of the bluff surrounding the pit, we sat down
and waited for darkness to set in, that we might




F                                     I
I.AKE OF MOLTEN TAVA-KILAUEA




I




In the Crater.


'57


get a good view of the lake by night. As daylight
faded away, the walls of the pit began to glow with
the reflection of the lurid volcanic fire, and the
heavy gases hung in clouds, like reflectors in the
star-lit sky. As the darkness deepened, the light
from the lava grew brighter, while the jets and
surges of molten fire continued without intermission, fountains of liquid fire shooting up some
thirty feet. The peculiar sullen or angry roar of
the fiery surf was distinctly heard, sometimes like
the noise of cannon or rattling fire of musketry.
The crust, which by daylight appeared to be uniformly black, now showed a network of cracks and
fissures, through which the light of the molten mass
could be seen. All of a sudden the fiery flood on
the left rose above its embankment, and in an instant a lava stream began to flow, and soon became
a river of living fire, covering a large space on that
side of the pit. The effect was grand and suggestive
of the great hidden force within the bowels of the
earth. We sat for hours looking down on the boiling mass, entranced and fascinated. At last fatigue
and hunger reminded us of the lateness of the hour,
and we retraced our steps to the hotel. Arrangements had been made beforehand. so that we had
dinner served immediately on our return. After
dinner came a chat in the cosy room, by a cheerful
fire, over what we had just observed, a quiet smoke,
an exhilarating sulphur bath, and a good night's
rest in comfortable spring beds.
One of the very interesting objects in the hotel,




I58


Volcanic Ac/ion.


and over which a number of pleasant hours can be
spent, is the register in which the various people
who have visited the volcano have written their
impressions, and sketches have been drawn of the
lake at different stages. The tourist may find a
different scene in the great pit of Kilauea upon each
visit. Sometimes the lava will overflow and fill
the entire pit, and then without warning suddenly
drop out of sight, hundreds of feet, as though the
bottom had fallen out; then again rise to the
surface.
A couple of years before my visit, the lake
disappeared down a pit a thousand feet deep, into
an unknown abyss. When I was there it had
risen again to within 300 feet of the surface of the
inner pit. This was a repetition of what must
have happened on a grander scale, when the crater
was formed, for the entire floor of the great crater,
three miles in diameter, was formed by one of these
great " break downs." The lake continued its
upward tendency until it completely filled again
the great inner pit, overflowing all over the floor
of the main crater, until it again fell in, in July,
I894. The inner pit is now (April, I898,) about
1,500 feet across and 500o feet deep, an inaccessible
well with hot lava at the bottom. After two days'
pleasant enjoyment of the cool crisp weather of
this altitude, 4,000 feet above the level of the sea,
we turned our faces toward Hilo and arrived in
due time.
Upon our return to Hilo a plunge in one of the




Return to Honolulu.


I59


large stone bathing pools for which the place is
famous had the effect of removing the soreness and
fatigue caused by the long horseback ride.
The next morning we returned to the ship, and
the Boston got under way and steamed to Lahaina,
where we engaged in target practice in the roadstead, with the secondary battery. This being
completed, orders were given on the evening of
the I3th of January to have steam  up and all
preparations made for getting under way at midnight for the return to Honolulu.
Shortly before that time, the inter-island steamer
from Honolulu came into port and anchored near
the Boston. The purser, who was an intimate
friend, came on board, bringing the Honolulu
papers, and stated that the Wilcox ministry had
been voted out the preceding afternoon, and another
one appointed in their stead.  I immediately
informed Captain Wiltse and the American Minister; they both expressed much surprise and asked
which of the white members of the legislature had
joined in the vote, which information could not
then be obtained.
The Boston got under way at midnight and
steamed slowly back to Honolulu.   When off
Diamond Head a pet dog fell overboard, and the
ship steamed around the spot looking for him for
over an hour. Not finding the dog, the Boston
was once more headed for port, and about io
o'clock in the forenoon of the I4th of January she
was moored in her old berth in the harbor of
Honolulu.




CHAPTER XI.


THE REVOLUTIONARY ACT OF THE QUEEN.
As soon as the Boston came to anchor I was
sent for by the commanding officer, who read to
me an invitation from the Minister of Foreign Affairs
to be present at the prorogation of the legislature
on that day, January I4th, at noon. The Captain,
in compliance with this invitation, instructed me to
put on special full-dress uniform, and in company
with the American Consul-General proceed to the
government building as the representative of the
ship on that occasion. After having dressed myself as directed, I went on shore and met the
Consul-General at the consulate, and we took a
carriage and drove to the government building.
Upon arrival, and before entering the hall, I was
informed by a very prominent citizen that the
Queen, immediately after the adjournment of the
legislature, was going to proclaim a new constitution from the palace —a constitution that would
abrogate the rights and privileges of all foreigners
in favor of native rule and autocratic power; that
danger was imminent, and he wished I would
return to the ship at once and inform Captain
Wiltse. I laughed at the matter, and in reply said
I placed no credence in the report, to which he
said he had the news from the very best of authority,
I6o




Prorogation of Legislature.


I6I


one of the cabinet ministers, and urged I should
inform my commanding officer, which I declined
to do. On entering the building I spoke to the
Consul-General of what I had heard. He remarked
that the gentleman who informed me was of a
rather nervous disposition, and that he placed no
credence in his statement, nor did he believe the
Queen contemplated any such movement.
At the door of the legislative hall we were met
by the Secretary of Foreign Affairs and conducted to
seats assigned to us. The legislative hall is a spacious room, about sixty feet long by thirty feet wide,
having at one end a raised platform or rostrum and
speaker's desk. Just in front of and below the
speaker's desk is the clerks' circle, and beyond this
was the hall proper, where both nobles and representatives sat together as one body, and behind them
was a railing separating the legislators from the
section allotted to visitors. Not long after we took
our seats, the hall proper began to fill with members of the legislature, foreign officials, and distinguished guests. The space back of the railing was
packed with native spectators. Nearly every member of the legislature present was decorated with the
various orders of Kamehameha I. and Kalakaua,
consisting of great gilded stars, covering the left
breast and dangling from the neck by silk bands.
I was surprised to notice the entire absence of the
white members, and in my cogitations as to the
reason of this, began to surmise there was some
truth in the information conveyed to me by the gen



162


Prorogation of Legislature.


tieman on the outside, in which surmise I became
more convinced when a native nobleman, who sat
to my left and a little to the front, and with whom
I was on quite intimate terms, turned around and
in a boastful tone said to me: " We have them at
last. Wait until we leave the hall and you will see
something. Come over to the palace when you go
out." I asked him what he meant, and he said:
"Never mind, but come over to the palace." I
then inquired: ' Do you refer to the new constitution? " and he smiled and nodded his head in assent.
Our conversation was interrupted by the entrance
of the Chamberlain from a side door on the left,
who, with a few assistant attendants, quickly arranged the fixtures upon the rostrum and retired.
Immediately after, a few lackeys entered, followed
by the Governor of Oahu, dressed in a flash uniform, covered with gold lace and embroidery, and
ornamented with orders that would have pleased
the Shah of Persia. He took post on the left side
of the rostrum. From a side door came the royal
procession with all the pomp and paraphernalia this
semi-savage Queen could surround herself with, a
comedy compared with which Pinafore and the
Mikado would be considered Shakesperean.
First came the Chamberlain, supporting in front
of him a large portfolio containing the Queen's
message of prorogation. From it were streaming
the ends of white and blue silk ribbons. Next
came four dusky aides-de-camp in full uniform,
somewhat similar to that worn by a colonel in the




Prorogation of Legislature.


I63


United States army. They were stiff and pretentious, varying in personal appearance, size, shape,
and color, and exhibiting the air of fully realizing
the importance of their exalted positions. After
them were the feather kahili bearers, supporting
the emblems of savage royalty. These were followed by her Majesty the Queen, dressed in a light
colored silk which tended to add somewhat to her
dark complexion and negro-like features, and more
plainly exhibiting in the facial outlines a look of
savage determination.  The dress was provided
with a very long train, which was supported by four
Kanaka lackeys dressed in blue velvet cut-away
coats, knee breeches, white stockings, and buckled
slippers.  They were extremely awkward and
ungainly, and were a source of annoyance to the
Queen, who appeared to be unfamiliar with this
ornamental appendage. Next came four homely
ladies in waiting, dressed in the loud colors so
much admired by all dark-colored races. Then
the two royal princes, modest in demeanor, but extremely spick and span. After them came the newly
appointed cabinet ministers, and then the dignified
justices of the supreme court, whose manly bearing
and intellectual appearance gave a relief to what
had preceded. One of them, Mr. Dole, afterwards
became the President of the Provisional Government and of the Republic.
As the procession entered, the Chamberlain turned
to the right and placed the portfolio on the desk,
opened it, arranged the message for the Queen's con



I 64    Appjearance of Liliuokalani.


venience, and took his stand just to the left. The
kahili-bearers formed in line to the rear. The Queen,
in turning to face the legislative body, caught her
feet in the cumbersome train and partially stumbled.
It was due partly to. her own awkwardness and turning too quickly, and partly to the slowness and ignorance of the train-bearers. She immediately turned
with flashing eyes and angered features and spoke
to her lackeys, and then stepped up to the desk and
waited. The aides-de-camp formed in a diagonal
line on her left, and the maids of honor were similarly disposed on her right, all facing the Queen.
The ministers and the justices of the court remained
on the right. As soon as all were in position the
Chamberlain stepped up, and taking the message
from the desk handed it to the Queen, who slowly
and deliberately commenced to read it, first in
English and then in Hawaiian. While reading
she exhibited evidences of both anger and great
mental strain. Her eyes flashed, and the facial
expressions of a nervous yet determined temperament indicated an excitement in no way associated
with what is known as stage fright.
As soon as the Queen had finished reading her
proclamation the procession reformed on the rostrum, and in the order of entering passed through
to the room then used as an office by the Minister
of the Interior, where she held a sort of reception.
She took her seat, and, surrounded by the court
attendants and cabinet ministers, received the then
ex-members of the legislature and other officials.




Liliuokdlani's Reception.


i65


The Consul-General said he would not go in, and
I went into the reception-room alone. As I enterned the door the governor of Oahu, who was
standing near by, stepped up to me and entered
into a short conversation. He was very nervous
and his language rather disconnected, conveying to
me the impression that he wished to prevent my
going further. But as I was there under orders
and in an official capacity, and desired to see the
remainder of the show, I passed on. Arriving
before the Queen I extended my salutations and
congratulations, which were coldly received and
with evident dissatisfaction that I was there. Her
manner and general appearance were such as to
convince me that I was right in the opinion I had
formed when she was reading her proclamation,
namely, that she was under the influence of some
intoxicant rather than mere excitement.  This
opinion was borne out later in the day when a very
high and distinguished official, who had been near
her person all the afternoon, said to me, " We have
at last induced her to postpone her coup, and if
she had not been full of gin we would have accomplished it long ago." A similar statement was
made to me by one of her personal favorites several days later. I paid no attention to her conduct
towards me, but entered into a cordial conversation
with one of her ministers, of whom I was fond,
and from whom I had been the recipient of many
acts of friendly hospitality. After a short talk and
friendly exchanges of courtesies with some of the
attendants, I left the building.




I66


Military Preparations.


On the outside a large crowd of natives and a
few whites were congregated, while great numbers
were moving towards the palace grounds. I was
again told of the Queen's intention to proclaim a
new constitution, and a half-white by the name of
Wilcox, an ex-member of the legislature and generally mixed up in every revolution that takes
place, in a burst of confidence, said to me that he
would have nothing to do with it; that the
Queen, in anticipation of resistance on the part of
the whites, had sent for him the night before to
take command of four small pieces of cannon
which she had caused to be placed in the upper
halls of the palace, enfilading the approaches to
that building from all sides, and that he had declined. These cannon were still there when the
Provisional Government took possession of the
palace. I also learned that the household guards
to the number of eighty, who were at that time
drawn up in line firom the palace to the entrance
gate, were armed with ball cartridges and under
the command of a favorite who had received explicit instructions. The police-station had been
fortified with two Gatlings and a force of police
under the Marshal, and were in readiness for immediate use. I still had my doubts as to the accuracy
of either the whole or part of the prevailing rumors;
but on entering the palace grounds and noticing
the extraordinary gathering and the position and
armament of the troops, I began to realize the
seriousness of the situation and felt it my duty to




The New Constiution.


i67


at once go on board ship and report to my commanding officer what was going on, which I did.
He was very much surprised, and said he had just
before received a message of similar import, but
paid little or no attention to it; but from what I
reported to him he thought it best to find out all he
could. I was then ordered to shift into citizens'
clothes and return on shore as soon as possible,
and in a quiet way obtain any and all information
and keep him posted.
Immediately upon my return on shore, I found
at the landing a number of native boatmen loitering about who informed me that the Queen was going to make a new constitution, and that there was
much excitement at the palace and uptown. A few
minutes later I met an American, who was on his
way to the Boston to convey the news to Captain
Wiltse. He informed me the Queen had commanded the ministers to countersign the new constitution and they had refused, in consequence of
which she had threatened their lives. To avoid
personal danger, in great fear and excitement they
had hastily made their way down town and appealed to the leading men of the community to protect and sustain them. I was further informed that
at the office of W. 0. Smith, on Fort street, a large
number of prominent men were holding a meeting.
I hurried on to that place, only a few hundred
yards from the landing, and found the two rooms
of the office crowded with the best men of the city,
irrespective of political affiliations, busily devising




I68


Opposition to Liliuokalani.


ways and means to avert serious consequences, and
to prevent, if possible, the Queen from doing such
an unconstitutional act. Some excitement was exhibited on the part of a few, and much uneasiness
shown by all, yet every one was outspoken in a
determination to do something to prevent the
arbitrary promulgation of a constitution. Short
speeches were made, voicing this sentiment, but
nothing was said or intimated beyond a condemnation of the Queen's act as unconstitutional, and
threatening the business interests of the kingdom.
I left them still in session and went on to the palace grounds, where the native crowd still remained
waiting for news from the inside of the palace. The
soldiers were still drawn up in line ready for a move.
The natives in the grounds appeared to be unconcerned and quiet. I made a circuit of the city, and
in the eastern suburbs met a body of natives on
horseback coming in from the country. I learned
later that they were simply returning from a feast
up the adjoining valley. I immediately returned
to the center of the town and visited the hotels,
clubs, and public places, and heard the people discussing the situation. The prevalent talk was a
denunciation of the Queen in no measured terms.
The intelligent people appeared to be alarmed and
exceedingly apprehensive of serious trouble, and
throughout the city the excitement and uneasiness
were growing. At W. 0. Smith's office the crowd
had increased, with many people on the sidewalk,
in front of the door, while those inside were still in




Lliuokalani's Sfpeech.


I69


discussion. I then went again to the palace, meeting the Chief Justice coming in a carriage from the
palace. IHe stopped and informed me that, after
hours of argument and persuasion, the Queen had
been induced to defer her coup d'e'al, but that she
had announced her determination to promulgate
the new constitution in a few days. The Chief
Justice thought she would attempt it again on Monday, and that such was her stubbornness and determination they would have the whole affair to go
through with again.
I went on to the palace grounds and there saw
the Queen in front of the palace, standing on the
balcony. She had just finished a speech in the
throne-room, before a large gathering, stating her
desire to promulgate a new constitution, declaring
that she had been prevented from doing so by her
ministers. She repeated, in substance, this speech
from the balcony to the crowd in the grounds.
There was no cheering, or any evidence of enthusiasm or regret on the part of the natives. They
were simply unconcerned as to what was going on,
beyond the novelty of the affair and a morbid curiosity over something that was unusual in their daily
life. While the Queen still stood on the balcony,
two natives near her began to harangue the crowd,
stating that the ministry, under the influence of the
whites, had prevented the Queen from giving them
a new constitution, and appealed to them to rise
and kill those opposing her. A few natives in
front, realizing what the effect of such language




Io70


The Queen's Program.


as this would be, climbed up the balcony and, by
force, removed the two incendiary speakers from
the scene. Neither the Queen, nor any one near
her, made any effort to stop these speakers, and her
actions indicated that she was pleased with their
remarks and conduct. After this the natives began
to disperse and leave the palace grounds. At night
quiet crowds gathered about the streets, in the
hotels and public places, and the conversations
there were universally condemnatory of the Queen's
revolutionary act.
From all these sources I learned that the Queen,
immediately after leaving the government building,
had gone direct to the palace and retired to the
blue room, where she summoned the ministers to
come to her at once. She presented to them the
draft of the new constitution and demanded their
signatures, declaring at the same time her intention
to promulgate it at once. In the meantime a native
political association, all dressed in evening dress
and tall hats, carrying banners and badges, had
marched in columns of two from the government
building. They were headed by their president
carrying a large flat package suspended in front of
him by ribbons about his shoulders. This was a
draft of the new constitution, a prepared address
and petition for the promulgation of the constitution. All this had been prearranged by direct
orders from the Qjueen. They marched to the throneroom and took position in regular lines, the president to the front and holding in his hands the




.ueen's Revolutionary Act.


I7I


address opened and ready to read at the given
signal when the Qleen took her position on the
dais. In the throne-room were also assembled a
few members of the diplomatic corps, two of the
judges of the supreme court, the Governor of Oahu,
the two princes, and a number of the native members of the late legislature, all in position for a state
ceremony, but they were kept waiting by what was
going on in the blue room. Two of the ministers,
Colburn and Peterson, positively refused to sign the
document, and the other two reluctantly followed
their example. The Queen became enraged and,
in most excited and emphatic terms, accented by a
sudden striking of the table with her clenched fist,
informed them if they did not sign the paper laid
before them she would go out on the balcony and
denounce them. To gain time and means of escape, they asked for fifteen minutes to retire and
deliberate. This was at first refused, but finally
granted. They had no sooner left the room than
they hurried over to the government building and
immediately sent word down town calling on the
citizens to support them in their resistance to the
revolutionary acts of the Queen. They sent for
several of their leading opponents of the Reform
party and asked their advice. They were promised
the support of the Reform party, and advised to
resist the Queen; to issue a proclamation declaring
the Queen in revolution against the constitution and
calling on the people to support them; also to request the assistance of the American naval forces,




1 72


Armed Resistance.


if necessary, to maintain order. The cabinet acquiesced in the plan, if the Queen persisted, and at
their request a draft of proclamation and request,
in accordance with such advice, was drawn up on
the spot. Two of the ministers signed the request
to land troops, but it was never delivered. Two
of them, Colburn and Peterson, more apprehensive
of their safety and impatient of delay, rushed down
town and personally addressed the meeting at
Smith's office, appealing for their support against
the Queen. Leading people hurried together at
Smith's office and, after brief consultation, unanimously agreed to support the laws and resist the
revolutionary encroachments of the Queen, and sent
a message to that effect to the ministers. A document pledging the armed support of the signers, to
the Cabinet, for the purpose of resisting the revolutionary acts of the Queen, was drawn up and signed
by nearly every one present. The ministers were
advised not to resign, and to hold out to the last.
Meanwhile the Queen was in the blue room awaiting the return of the ministers. She finally sent a
messenger requesting their immediate return. Two
of the ministers refused, on the ground that their
lives would be endangered. Two went to the palace, and somewhat later, upon receiving assurances
of support from the people at Smith's office, the
other two reluctantly followed.
In the meantime the Queen's especial favorite,
C. B. Wilson, the Marshal, and one who was
known to have great influence over her, was sent




Refutation of Blount's Charges.        173


into the blue room. He used all his power to induce her to go no further. He even threatened her;
but finding her obdurate, he assured her of his support if she persisted. Just as the ministers returned,
he went to the police-station, called in all the police
that could be spared, appointed and armed a few
white friends as deputies, and made preparations
for armed resistance or aggression, as the occasion
might require. Other efforts were made to induce
the Queen to retrace the revolutionary steps she
had already taken, but without avail, she only consenting, with great reluctance, to a temporary postponement of the premeditated coup.
The importance of the measures taken by the
Queen, the Marshal, and the Cabinet, above set
forth, consists in the fact that they constitute an
absolute refutation of the reiterated charge made by
Commissioner Blount, Secretary Gresham, and
President Cleveland, that there was profound peace
in Honolulu when the Boston troops landed and
the Provisional Government was formed.
From my personal observation, made at the time,
on the spot, and an intimate personal acquaintance
with all the leading people of all parties, I assert
unhesitatingly that during the three days between
the attempt of the Queen to overturn the constitution and the proclamation of the Provisional Government Honolulu was a slumbering volcano, liable
to break out into bloody conflict at any time on two
minutes' notice. I repeatedly urged Captain VVWiltse
to land the troops on Sunday, but he waited until the




174


The Committee of Safety.


evidences of impending conflict became so strong
that he would have been wilfiully negligent of his
duty to have waited longer, and did not land until
Monday afternoon.
The assembly in the throne-room, after listening to her announcement, left the building, and
the news was sent to the citizens down town of
what had transpired. The impromptu meeting at
Smith's office, appreciating that the Queen did not
intend to give up, and that the trouble had but begun, continued their deliberations.  A Committee
of Public Safety, composed of thirteen members,
was formed,to which the further consideration of the
situation was delegated, and the assembly adjourned.
The committee remained where they were and continued their deliberations for about an hour, but
with little or no plan of operations.
The unanimously expressed opinion was that
the Queen, having violated her oath to support
the constitution, the people were absolved from
further obligations to her; that she was in revolution against the government; that this was only
the last act of a series extending over years, all
tending in the one direction, viz., the concentration
of arbitrary power in the hands of the sovereign,
and encroachment upon the just rights of the people; that the limit of endurance had been reached,
and the abolition of the monarchy was the sound
course to pursue. Before adjourning, the sense of
the committee was formally expressed in the following resolution, which was adopted by a vote of I2




Annexation Resolution.


I75


to I, the one explaining that the only reason why
he voted " no" was because there was no assurance
as to what the United States would do:
"Resolved, That it is the sense of this committee
that in view of the present unsatisfactory state of
affairs, the proper course to pursue is to abolish the
monarchy and apply for annexation to the United
States."
The committee adjourned about dark, without
having come to any decision as to means of carrying
the resolution into effect, agreeing to meet on the
following morning. Several of the committee and
some other leading citizens held an informal meeting that night, at the residence of a prominent citizen, which gathering was reported to the Marshal,
who at once informed the Queen and her supporters
and requested that she would declare martial law
and permit him to arrest the Committee of Safety,
but she was afraid to do it. The Marshal deserves
great credit for his course throughout this exciting
period.  Fully realizing and disapproving the
Queen's unlawful project, he nevertheless was loyal
to his mistress and displayed more judgment and
genuine pluck than all of her other followers put
together.
The main features of the constitution which the
Queen attempted to promulgate had been at her
order drafted and submitted to Peterson and Colburn weeks before, meeting at the time with no disapproval by them. Parker and Cornwell, the other
two ministers, were in ignorance of its full text.




176    -Features of New  Constitution.


The knowledge of the extreme character of the instrument, and of the effect which it would have
upon the determined characters who had led the
fight against both Kalakaua and Liliuokalani accounts for the great fear on the part of the first two
and the less anxiety shown by the latter two ministers at the critical moment.
The most objectionable clauses of the proposed
constitution provided that the Queen should have
the power to appoint and remove at will her ministers; that all members of the upper house of the
legislature were to be appointed for life or good
beheavior, the choice being absolute with her instead of their being elected by the people for terms
of six years as had theretofore been done; that the
tenure of office of the Supreme Court judges should
be changed to six years only instead of for life, as
theretofore; that all whites theretofore possessing
the voting right should be disfranchised except
those married to native women.
Such was the condition of affairs when I returned
to the ship at midnight. I made a detailed statement of the situation, and expressed the opinion
that i;othing would happen that night, but that,
from the state of feeling of the people, serious
trouble would come as soon as the counter-revolutionists could organize.




CHAPTER XII.


THE LANDING OF THE BOSTON S TROOPS.
The following morning, Sunday, January I5,
I893, the Committee of Safety met again, and, after
discussing the situation in all its bearings, came to
the conclusion that a proclamation should be issued abrogating the monarchy and establishing a
provisional government in its place. Word was
sent to the Cabinet that, in accordance with their
request, the people had organized to support them
with armed force against the Queen's revolutionary
course; that the Committee of Safety would act in
subordination to the Cabinet if they would lead in
taking the Queen at her word; but that the committee insisted upon action. The Cabinet were
requested to declare that by violating the constitution the Queen had vacated the throne, and were
informed that if they failed to take this course the
committee would proceed to act without them.
The Cabinet asked for time to consider the proposition. They were told that the committee were
proceeding with their preparations and would stop
for nothing; that it rested entirely with the Cabinet whether they led the movement or not; but in
any event the committee would act as soon as it
was ready to do so. The committee decided to
call a mass-meeting, make a report, and ask this
1;7




178


8 Mass-MeetingY-Resistence.


general gathering of citizens to confirm their appointment, and authorize the taking of whatever
further steps were necessary to advance the public
welfare and secure the rights of the people from
future aggression.  The mass-meeting, of about
2,000 men, was held on Monday, noon, the report
presented, and strong resolutions adopted condemning the Queen, approving the course of the committee and authorizing it to continue to act. The
committee continued its meetings and began the
work of organization and preparations. Couriers
were sent all over town to notify friends of the
movement to arm themselves, and be prepared to
answer a call when needed. The various old volunteer organizations and the people who had
brought Kalakaua to terms in I887 and put down
the revolution instituted by Liliuokalani in I889
now began to stir themselves, and by night one
squad of about 50 men reported with arms at a
rendezvous on Emma street. Another squad of
75, mostly Germans, met at a place on Fort street,
back of the Chinese church. Posters were displayed calling on the people for a mass-meeting
on the following day, to be held in the old armory
on Beretania street. The result of the deliberations of the Committee of Safety, the posting of
these notices, and the gathering of armed men
were known to the Marshal and by him reported
to the Queen, but her advisers were afraid to act,
and the meetings of the committee and gathering
forces were left undisturbed.




A  Critical Situation'


I79


The Marshal afterwards told me he had urged the
ministers to let him open an attack on the opponents of the Queen before they got too strong, but
they would not let him do it. All this time the
forces at the palace and station-house were kept
under arms. Transpiring events were reported to
Captain Wiltse at various times during the day,
and he went on shore twice to make personal observations. On his return to the ship he informed
me the situation on shore was very critical, and expressed the opinion that he ought to land a force to
protect Americans and property, but he did not
want to do that unless absolutely necessary. IHe
said he had several interviews with the United
States Minister, who informed him that he and the
English Minister had used their best influences to
stop the Queen, but could do nothing, and that he
(Wiltse) and the Minister had agreed upon great
caution. In the meantime the aggressive spirit of
the Queen had weakened. She began to realize
the seriousness of the situation, and exhibited grave
fears of being deprived of her throne. She and
her followers became frightened at the tone of intense feeling manifested by the people, and began
to cast about for means of saving themselves. A
peace was patched up between the Queen and her
ministers, and for the time being she forgave them
for their perfidy. Without a moment's hesitation,
and without replying to the proposition of the
Committee of Safety, the Cabinet abandoned the
citizens whom they had called upon for help, and
who had organized in good faith to assist them.




I80


Honolulu a Hiostile Camp.


A secret meeting was held on Sunday noon, at
the office of the Attorney-General, in the government
building, by a few citizens and hangers-on of the
palace and the now reconciled cabinet, and they
decided to call a counter mass-meeting of natives the
next day at Palace Square. It was decided that the
tone of this meeting should be very conservative.
A " by authority," to be signed by the Queen and
countersigned by the Cabinet, was drawn up, announcing that the Queen had abandoned her intention to force a new constitution, and that in future
she would abide by constitutional requirements.
Speakers were detailed and posted as to what they
should say, in a temperate and peaceful manner.
On Monday morning, although outwardly quiet, the
city was the recruiting ground for two hostile camps.
The Queen, the Marshal, and the Cabinet were increasing their forces and preparing for the demonstration of the people acting through the Committee
of Safety, which was preparing swiftly and with little concealment of its objects. The people were,
by this time, organized into armed bodies ready at a
moment's call, with squads still forming, of sufficient force to command the entire situation. The
palace guards were kept constantly under arms and
ready for active work with a battery of field artillery, while the police-station was barricaded and
fortified with two Gatling guns, and nearly the
whole police force and a number of special deputies.
The city was full of Canadian refugees, beachcombers, and loafers from all over the world, eager




Hionolul'u ac HostiZe Camt.


for incendiarism and loot, with two mass-meetings
of opposing factions, to be held in the afternoon at
points only a block apart. The situation was alarming, excitement intense, and a feeling of uncertainty
as to what would take place. The bubble was
likely to break at any moment, and disorder and
riot be precipitated. The Marshal had notified the
leaders of the Committee of Safety that the massmeeting should not be held, and receiving no favorable answer, he reported to the Queen's headquarters that it would be impossible to stop it without armed interference. A message was sent to the
Committee of Safety by the Cabinet on Sunday, stating the ministers would like to meet and consult
with representatives of their number, which request
was complied with on Monday morning. In that
interview the ministers urged the committee to go
no further, stating that the Queen bad agreed to go
no further with the constitution matter. The committee replied they could place no confidence in the
Queen's pledges, that she had gone too far, and
they would proceed with their deliberations without regard to what the Queen said or did.
This alarmed the Queen and her supporters still
more, and impressed upon them the enthusiasm
and determination of the respectable and conservative portion of the community to put and end to the
corrupt monarchy. The ministers made public the
"by authority" referred to, and sent copies to all
the foreign legations in the hope of obtaining their
support, but without avail. Not only was this con



I823


Why Troops Landed.


dition of affairs reported to Captain Wiltse, but, to
make sure, he went on shore in the morning to ascertain the facts, and with a personal knowledge of
the danger to life and property that existed, there
was no other course for him to pursue than to land
a force before it was too late, and he made up his
mind to do so. Immediately upon his return to
the ship, about Io A. M., he called me to the cabin
and with closed doors told me of the condition of
affairs as he had learned them, confirming what I
had already reported.
The leading citizens of the town were openly and
publicly preparing to oust the Queen's government
by force of arms. They were making no concealment of their intentions. On the contrary, they informed the Cabinet on Sunday morning, again on
Monday morning, and the Marshal on Monday
noon, what their intentions were. The Queen and
Cabinet were making such preparations as they could
to resist.
There were several thousand American citizens
and many million dollars' worth of American property at the very focus of this cyclonic condition of
affairs.
It was manifest that the government was unable
to protect itself, and could not under any circumstances protect life and property.
If ever a situation warranted the landing of troops
to protect American interests, this was such an occasion, and Captain Wiltse, after consulting the
American Minister and myself, decided that his
duty plainly required him to land.




IlIIl)\lIN tx  rZ  Rlt li:  It'TI.I;D
I:i — I ~ I I 
Pi I  " l | I I ~ - ~
~ ~|~~~~~,~~~             a  w 
w g R  ~~~~~~~~~~~~J
la % | |,;.~.     1X}   H'..f.
qg F1iiyX e  l}  w'X,,"A t-~~
A... gE 5 d i~,,. -tr;, B
( S;; Eg Pi(&5, k4A~lr, ja ue 1. VaA:Stl,i44l  Ij~(l~ji-  Il ff 








Landing of Troops.


i83


He asked me how long it would take to get ready
for landing the two revolving cannon, and two Gatling guns, with ammunition. I replied, half an
hour.
Shortly afterwards the executive officer instructed
me to get one revolving cannon, and one Gatling
gun, with their field carriages, and one caisson
ready, and to let him know how many men I needed
to fill up the complement, and to get the boats
ready for lowering. All of which I did. Other
preparations were made and the men of the battalion
instructed to get their dinner, and to pack their
knapsacks for heavy marching order. Captain
Wiltse sent for me again and, in a confidential manner, as was his usual course with me, read his confidential letter of instructions from the Navy Department, and from Admiral Brown, commanding the
United States naval forces in the Pacific. In the discussion which followed I fully agreed with him as
to the necessity of landing a force. I remarked that
the situation was such that great tact and judgment
would have to be used to avoid being accused of
interfering or taking sides with one or other of the
contending parties. His reply was that he intended
to maintain a perfectly neutral attitude, but he
would prevent any injury to Americans or their
property, incendiarism or pilfering, even if he had
to fight all hands. As soon as the men had finished
their meal, the battalion was gotten ready, ammunition put up, belts filled with ball cartridges, and
the men fitted out for heavy marching order, with




I84


The Mass-Meeling.


instructions to be ready to land at 4 o'clock. The
time set was supposed to be about the hour the two
mass-meetings would finish their deliberations, and
should they come together in a hostile manner, we
would be on the scene in time to prevent riot and
bloodshed within the city proper, or in the vicinity
of the innocent women and children. The battalion consisted of one company of artillery, two companies of blue-jackets, and one of marines, with
musicians, and hospital corps. The men were
provided with knapsacks and double belts, each
holding from 6o to 80 cartridges. The caisson and
ammunition-boxes were filled with ammunition,
taking in all I4,000 rounds of rifle, 1,200 revolver
cartridges, and 174 common explosive shells for the
revolving cannon.
At 1.30 the citizens began to assemble, and before 2 o'clock the large armory on Beretania street
was crowded to its utmost capacity with the largest
and most enthusiastic mass-meeting ever held in
Honolulu. Every class in the community was fully
represented-mechanics, merchants, professional
men, and artisans of every kind being present in
full force. The report of the Committee of Safety
was submitted and unanimously adopted, which
was a condemnation of the acts of the Queen and
her supporters as being unlawful and unwarranted,
endangering the peace of the community and tending to excite riot and cause destruction of life and
property. The appointment of the Committee of
Safety was confirmed or ratified and they were in



The Counter Meeting.


185


structed and empowered to further devise such
ways and means as might be necessary to secure the
permanent maintenance of law and order and pro'tection to life, liberty, and property in Hawaii.
At the same time that the mass-meeting was in
session at the armory, the royalists, under the instruction of the government, were holding a counter
demonstration at Palace Square. A resolution, as
previously agreed upon by the Queen and her supporters, was adopted, accepting the royal assurance
that she would no longer seek to promulgate a new
constitution by revolutionary means.  Notwithstanding the instructions of the night before for the
speakers to be most conservative in their remarks,
some of them gave vent to expressions of a desire
for bloodshed. During the sessions of the two
gatherings the stores in town were closed, business
suspended and drinking-saloons stopped from selling liquor, and excitement was intense, while the
city was at the mercy of a mob, as most all the
policemen had been called into the police-station.
The Committee of Safety met as soon as the massmeeting adjourned. Numerous citizens, fearing a
repetition of the mob of I874, and probable destruction of the town, outrages upon the persons of
women and children, urged the committee to
request the American Minister to land a force from
the Boston for the protection of life and property.
This was prepared but was not delivered until after
the Minister's visit to the Boston hereunder referred
to, and had nothing to do with the subsequent land



I86       Caft. Wiltse's Instructions.


ing. While the two mass-meetings were in session
the American Minister came on board the Boston,
several hours after the order had been given for the
battalion to land. Captain Wiltse immediately
sent for the officers who were to accompany the
men on shore, to come into the cabin, and be present at the interview and consultation with the
Minister.  The Minister spoke of the Queen's
proclamation to abandon her attempt to proclaim
a new constitution, and of the attitude of the leading people of the city in support of the Committee
of Safety; also of the large mass-meeting being
held by order of the committee, and of the counter
meeting, composed mostly of low whites and natives. He thought they might come into conflict
and that trouble was imminent; that Captain
Wiltse should be prepared to land if necessary.
"Should you land," said he, "you need not apprehend any one firing upon you, as they have
never done such a thing under other and similar
circumstances; " referring to the landing of American troops in 1874 and 1889. Captain Wiltse replied
that he realized the necessity and had already given
orders to land the troops at 4 P. M., to protect
American interests. Then turning to the officers
present he read a short letter of instructions to
them. These instructions were taken bodily from
his confidential letter from the Navy Department,
and were prepared in the morning when he first
decided to land. One of the officers present asked
how far he was to go in the event of a change in




Salute to Liliuokalazni.      i8


i87


the state of affairs, or should he be attacked by
either of the contending forces. Captain Wiltse
thereupon supplemented his written by oral instructions, to this effect: Under conditions as he
then understood them to exist, he would have to
largely depend upon the judgment of the officers
going on shore; that they had been long enough
in Honolulu to be thoroughly acquainted with
all Americans and the location of their property;
that they should be protected so long as they preserved a neutral attitude.
The Minister, after remarking, " I am glad you
are going to land," and that he thought the landing
absolutely necessary, left the ship. At 5 P. M.
the battalion was landed at the regular landing at
Brewer's wharf, and after being formed on shore,
marched to the corner of Fort and Merchant streets,
where a squad of the marine company was detailed
to protect the United States consulate. The rest
of the marine company was marched to the United
States legation, on Nuuanu avenue. The main
body of the force was marched up Merchant street
through Palace Square. As it passed the palace
entrance, the Queen was seen standing on the front
balcony of the palace, whereupon a royal marching
salute was given her, arms port, drooping of colors,
and ruffles on the drums. As we marched through
the city there were no policemen or guardians of the
peace at their posts for the protection of the public.
A little beyond Palace Square, the battalion halted
for the purpose of finding some place to go into




188


Camp at Arion Hall.


camp. An effort was made at first to secure an
old armory near the boat-landing, as that was in
touch with a base on board ship, but it was refused,
as was the opera house, the only two places of
suitable dimensions available. These being refused, the forces were marched on out King street,
nearly a half mile, to the residence of an American,
and in his yard the troops were bivouacked under
the trees. About 9.30 P. M. Captain Wiltse drove
up, and said he had secured a temporary place in
a hall to the rear of the opera house, commonly
known as Arion Hall. This building was a small,
low, wooden structure with a wide porch front and
rear, and was originally erected by the corrupt
minister to Kalakaua, Gibson, for the purpose of
high carnivals and political gatherings of their ring.
The battalion was immediately formed and
marched to the hall and went into camp. I was
made officer of the day and posted pickets inside
the yard at all the approaches to the camp, and
kept watch myself for anything unusual along the
front of the opera house. I soon saw that this was
the best strategical position in the city for the main
body of the troops to encamp, with the two smaller
bodies of troops in the narrow business portion of
the city, and at the United States Legation. The
broad streets diverging from Palace Square afforded
an easy means of mobilizing at any point, while the
opera house in front constituted a formidable
breastwork. From in front of the opera house a
good view was obtained of the vicinity of the




Number of Opposing Forces.


189


fortified police-station and center of the business
portion of the city, along King and Merchant
streets, and of the vicinity of the government
barracks across the Palace Square; the park of the
principal hotel; the approaches to the armory
occupied by the citizen forces, and the grounds
surrounding the government buildings.  The
whole section was, with the exception of the
government buildings, occupied by American
property and residents. I immediately procured
several men whom I knew well, and in whom I
had implicit confidence, to scour the town and
obtain all information possible of the situation,
disposition and number of troops on each side,
movements of the citizens, and from time to time I
received information afterwards corroborated by
actual participants. I was informed that the police
had all been called in, and a few deputy marshals,
newly appointed, in citizen's dress, were the only
government officers doing duty in the streets of the
city; that the government forces, consisting of the
household guard and policemen, were divided into
two detachments, one of 6o men at the barracks
and palace grounds, the other of So men at the
fortified police-station, making in all i40 men.
With the exception of a few newly appointed
deputy marshals, these were all the forces that the
Queen had at her command up to the time of the
overturn of the monarchy. At the same time, I
learned there were i75 men of the volunteer forces
under arms, mostly members of a military organi



I90o


Committee's Forces,


zation known as the "' Honolulu Guards," famous
for the aggressive and determined part they had
taken in forcing Kalakaua to terms in i887, and in
putting down the Liliuokalani-Wilcox revolution
of 1889. They were quartered in three different
sections of the city, within convenient positions for
a quick and easy mobilization of a part or whole
at any desired point within the city. One of these
squads to the number of 8o men were in a building
on Fort street, in rear of the Chinese church.
Another squad of 50 men were in an old building
on Emma Square, while a third of 45 were
encamped in the armory on Beretania street,
commanding any flank movement from the government barracks. It was apparent to my mind
that the citizens were the masters of the situation,
as they had much fighting material yet to draw
from, while the Queen's supporters had melted
away. Our forces were so placed as to enforce
upon both sides a proper regard for the safety of
property and the protection of non-combatants, and,
if necessary, to prevent fighting in the streets, as
our forces did when they landed in Panama during
the revolution there in 1885. Early in the evening
the deputy marshal, dressed in citizen's clothes,
called to see me with an apparent friendly message
from the Marshal, but obviously to find out the
disposition of our forces, and the part we proposed
to take in the event of a fight. I understood his
mission and extended to him a most cordial
reception, took him all through the camp and




Boston Troops Neu/trald.


1I9


emphatically informed him we were there simply
to protect American life and property, and under
no circumstances would we take part with either
side; but I believed no fighting would be permitted
in the streets or residence portion of the city. He
replied, they knew that, and the next evening the
Marshal told me he knew we would have nothing
to do with either side, and that he wanted to go
out and fight, stating at the same time the cowardly
ministers would not let him. The deputy departed
with a friendly message and with cordial feelings,
and offered to send me something for my comfort
in camp, which he did later that night.
All night long, rumors of an alarming nature prevailed of the intention, by native supporters of the
Queen, to burn the residences of her leading opponents, and the business portion of the city. The
fire-patrol was kept on the alert for immediate use.
Many women were very much frightened, and some
of the people sent their families out of the city to
Waikiki. There were two fires during the night
of an incendiary nature, and on each occasion I
called out the guard ready for a move, and sent couriers to find out where the fires were. Learning
that they were of little importance and that American property was not involved, I returned the guard
to their quarters. This calling out of the guard had
a good effect, and was the means of quieting the
extreme tension of feeling. The fact that we were
ready and on the alert to protect them inspired
confidence among orderly people.




T92    Judge Dole and the Commnitee.


That evening the Committee of Safety continued
their deliberations and perfected their plans. They
finally decided to abrogate the monarchy and establish a provisional government in its stead, and this
accomplished, to submit an appeal for annexation to
the United States. Mr. J. H. Soper was appointed
to take command of the military forces. A committee of two was appointed to select four persons
to constitute an executive council, and others to
act as an advisory council. Judge Dole of the
supreme court was chosen to act as the head
of the government. A messenger firom their number was sent to invite Judge Dole's attendance at
the meeting. He came, and after hearing their
proposition said that he doubted the advisability of
abrogating the monarchy yet, and that he did not
entirely favor the idea of annexation to the United
States. He suggested that it might be better to
establish a regency and place Kaiulani on the
throne. Kaiulani had been appointed heiress apparent by her aunt, Liliuokalani, and confirmed as
such by the legislature. Dole's advice, even at this
time, might have been taken and the monarchy pre-,
served, had that young princess been educated in
the United States, and not in England under the
self-appointed guardianship of T. H. Davies, an
Engl ishman of pronounced bitterness against American interests, and who had repeatedly in the local
press of Honolulu, over his own signature, denounced
in bitter terms and unfriendly spirit the rights of
the United States to establish a naval station at




Judge Dole Accepts.          193
Pearl Harbor. It was also reported that his son
was engaged to marry the princess. Even as it
was, there was a long discussion as to the acceptance of Dole's advice, but the feeling prevailed that
bitter experience had demonstrated that the Kalakaua blood was not to be trusted, and that if action
were not taken now, it would have to be taken at
some time in the future, after another struggle, and
under, perhaps, more unfavorable circumstances.
Finally, upon the earnest persuasion of the committee, Dole consented to take the matter under advisement and further consideration, and give them an
answer on the following day.  After persistent
efforts on the part of the committee, Judge Dole
agreed on the following day to accept the responsible position, which acceptance sealed the doom of
the monarchy in the Hawaiian Islands.




CHAPTER XIII.


ESTABLISHMENT OF THE PROVISIONAL GOVERNMENT.
Early on the following morning, I7th of January, 1893, the battalion was drawn up in line,
mustered and inspected, guards detailed for the day
and a routine established. Breakfast was brought
off from the ship and served to each company, after
which the men were exercised at drill.  Every
assurance was given to convince both sides that we
occupied with our forces a neutral position and
were there only for the purpose of protecting American life and property. The men were cautioned
not to say or do anything that would cause them to
be accused of partisanship, and no one was permitted to leave the limits of the encampment.
Whatever rumors either side caused to be circulated to the contrary was due to no word or act of
either the officers or men of the Boston's battalion.
They were simply there in the performance of duty,
as was the case when American forces had been
landed in Honolulu on previous occasions of riot or
revolution, and this fact was thoroughly understood
by both the contending factions in Honolulu. Some
of the members of the Committee of Safety made
an eflort to intimidate the royalists by starting the
report that the American forces were on shore for the
purpose of supporting them against the Queen and
194




Formation of Provisional Government. I95


her forces; but Marshal Wilson informed me, the
night after the surrender, that he knew better, and
that the craven ministers used that canard as an excuse for their own cowardice. The only effect the
false rumor had was to induce a few timid whites,
who were anxious to join the movement of the
citizens but held aloof on account of the fear of reactionary consequences, to become publicly supporters of the committee where they had previously
secretly supported it, and it formed a pretext for
the protest under which the final surrender of the
royalists was made.
The people of the city were astir earlier than
usual, yet everything was outwardly quiet. The
two hostile forces still occupied the same positions
they did the evening before. The royalists kept
within their fortified places, well knowing the
active progress being made by the Committee of
Safety, who were actively at work completing
their plans. Several of the prominent members
had been to Judge Dole, urging upon him an immediate answer and acceptance of the offer tendered
him the day before. Others had waited upon those
who had been selected to serve upon the executive
and advisory councils of the new government, to
obtain their consent to serve. The preliminaries
having been attended to, the Committee of Safety
met at Io o'clock A. M. in the office of W. 0.
Smith and proceeded to organize the Provisional
Government. An order was sent out prohibiting
the inter-island steamers from leaving for the other




196


Dole's Character.


islands before the next day.  Judge Dole came
before the committee and notified them of his decision to accept the presidency, but before doing so
he sent in his resignation to the Minister of Foreign
Affairs as one of the justices of the supreme court.
No better man could have been selected. In fact,
there was no one else available gifted with those
great qualities which nature lavishes on men born
to rule. Quiet and unobtrusive, modest in demeanor and of sterling integrity; possessing a cultivated mind and a benevolent heart; a leader in
all the moral, religious, and progressive movements on the islands; careful in thought, fair in
judgment, honest in convictions, an excellent lawyer, and a cool, deliberate statesman, Judge Dole
was fortified with the universal confidence of the
citizens of Hawaii of all nationalities. He was
born in Honolulu, of American parentage, in 1844.
He was educated in Honolulu, and at William's
College in the United States; studied law in Boston
and was admitted to the bar in that city before returning to his native country, where he not only
became one of the leading lawyers, but a member
of the supreme bench.
The Committee of Safety adjourned at noon for
lunch, meeting again at 1.30 P. M., when they
completed the organization of the Provisional Government upon the plans previously agreed upon.
An executive council was appointed consisting of
four members, with Dole as chairman and Minister
of Foreign Affairs; the other three filled the offices




-   - -----...








Formation of Provisional Government. 197


of Ministers of the Interior, Finance, and AttorneyGeneral.  An advisory council, to have general
legislative duties, was selected, consisting of fourteen
members. The proclamation abrogating the monarchy and proclaiming the Provisional Government
was signed by the committee, and the executive
council confirmed J. H. Soper as Commander-inChief of the Military. A guard was sent out to
order arms and ammunition, which the committee
had in one of the stores in town, to be taken to the
armory. A messenger was sent to the government
building to ascertain whether there was any armed
force there to oppose them. He reported that
there were none.
In the meantime the forces from the Boston were
being exercised in an afternoon drill within the
enclosure, in ignorance of what was going on in
town, when a messenger from the police-station
came and informed me that the counter revolutionists had completed their organization and were
going to make an effort to take the government
building at 3 P, M. and from there issue a proclamation formally establishing a Provisional Government, and to prevent this, the Marshal was going to
send 50 armed men from the palace and policestation to guard the building. We stopped drilling
and the officers went to the front of the yard to see
if there was any movement. In a few minutes we
saw some men coming up the street headed by
Judge Dole, and immediately after heard that a
policeman had been shot in town. It looked as




ig98


]First and Only Shot.


though a fight was imminent and the Boston's men
were in consequence not dismissed, but kept in the
rear of the opera house, with Arion Hall between
them and the government building. The shooting
of the policeman precipitated matters, and the executive and advisory councils, accompanied by the
Committee of Safety, immediately went by different
streets to the government building fully half an
hour before they intended the cousp should take
place. It appeared that the officer in charge of the
squad who were directed to gather the arms and
ammunition was seen by one of the special deputies
to drive into the back yard of the store where some
of these arms were.  The special immediately
notified the Marshal, who sent out four or five
policemen from the station to capture the arms, and
in their efforts to do so the officer of the guard shot
one of the police. The others permitted the wagon
to proceed to the armory and deliver the arms to
the men waiting to receive them.
When this shot was fired and the story of its results flew through town, it created a panic in the
royal ranks, and all those who could reach the
police-station rushed in such numbers to that building for shelter that the Marshal had to close the
doors. The Marshal afterwards told me that two
of the cabinet ministers, one of whom was the Attorney-General, and the immediate head of the military forces of the kingdom, rushed to the rear of
the room and stood there trembling and would
not permit the Marshal to either send men to the




Cozwardice of Cabinet.


I99


government building or open a fight, and there they
remained, clustered in the closed station-house,
afraid to move, while Dole and his party moved on
the government building unmolested. Had the
plans which the Marshal mapped out been sustained by the ministers, and a guard sent to the
government building, supported by the cannon
from the palace and the forces at the barracks, with
the fortified police-station as a base, it is exceedingly doubtful if the counter-revolutionists could
have taken the government building or palace that
day, and it would have necessitated the proclaiming
of the new government from some other place. In
that event they could not have obtained control of
the government building and archives, and the
treasury, or secured any recognition from the foreign representatives until they had driven the royalists out. They had a sufficient force to eventually
capture the place, yet there would have been a
fight. The ministers knowing the force and the
character of the mnen opposed to them were afraid
to make a stand. However, the leaders of the
Provisional Government, while on their way from
Smith's office, had grave apprehensions, and the
excitement was intense. Several of them told me
that they expected at every corner to be fired on.
The armory on Beretania street had been designated as the place of rendezvous for the volunteer
forces, and as soon as they heard of the shot on
Fort street, they formed their companies and squads
and moved towards the government grounds from




200


Reading of Proclamation.


different approaches. Upon the arrival of Dole
and his followers at the entrance to the building,
only a few employees were to be found, and the
demand upon the chief clerk of the Interior Department for possession of the building was immediately complied with. A crowd began to gather,
and from one of the rear gates of the yard a company of about 50 armed volunteers entered and
formed in front of the building.
The committee now proceeded to read the proclamation abrogating the monarchy and formally
establishing a Provisional Government instead, "to
exist until terms of union with the United States
can be negotiated and agreed upon."  During
the reading of the proclamation, armed forces were
gathering in the yard, and by the time it was finished
fully 175 determined volunteers were in position to
guard the building and protect the new government,
and the royal forces could never have driven them
out. The yard was cleared of all lookers-on, and
sentries posted at the gates to prevent outsiders from
entering.
After reading the proclamation the councils convened in the office of the Minister of the Interior
and issued an order calling upon all persons favorable to the new government to report at the government building and furnish such arms and ammunition as they might have in their possession or
subject to their control. Martial law was established, liquor-saloons closed, and letters sent to
each of the different members of the foreign diplo



A//titude of Wiltse.


20I


matic and consular officers announcing the establishment of the Provisional Government, and requesting their recognition.
All this time the American forces were peaceful
spectators from their camp of what was going on.
Captain Wiltse and myself were standing on the
front porch of Arion Hall, where we had a partial
view of the proceedings. Calling me to his side,
he remarked: "' This ends it; the royalists are not
going to fight." Just then a messenger from the
Provisional Government came up and reported the
formation of the new government, with a message
from Judge Dole asking if he, Captain Wiltse,
would not recognize them. The reply was that such
recognition could not be made until they were in
possession of the police and military forces, and
fully in condition to protect life and property. A
few minutes later I was ordered to go over to the
building with his compliments to Judge Dole, ask
him what the new government was in possession
of, and to inform him that if he did not have control of the police and military forces Captain Wiltse
could have nothing to do with them. I found
Judge Dole, and the officials of the new government,
and some others, clustered around him, in one of
the large rooms of the government building.
When I delivered my message, with a wave of the
hand Judge Dole said: "' You see we have possession of the government building, the archives and
the treasury, which is the government of Hawaii."
To which I replied, " I see you are here, but how




202          A/tilude of Wilise.
about the police-station, palace and barracks, and
the armed forces at those places? " To this Judge
Dole remarked they would soon have them.
"Well," said I, " Captain Wiltse directed me to
say to you that until you obtain possession of them
and are in position to guarantee safety to life and
property, he could not recognize you or have anything to do with you." Several persons asked me
if we were not going to stand by them. I replied,
"Gentlemen, you beard what I said." A few
looked at each other in surprise, but the majority
and Judge Dole appeared to anticipate my answer.
I reported the conversation and result of my observations to Captain Wiltse on my return, and he
repeated in the most emphatic terms that under existing conditions he would have nothing to do with
them. Shortly after this another messenger from
Mr. Dole came over and requested Captain Wiltse
to come and see him, as he desired to speak with
him on the situation. The Captain requested me
to go with him, expressing a desire to have a witness to his conversation present. The commanding officer of the battalion was standing near and
said he would go, and the two went over, resulting in another refusal of Captain Wiltse to recognize them. A summons was sent by Judge Dole
to the palace, demanding an immediate and unconditional surrender of the palace, police-station, and
barracks. To gain time the ministers who were
at the police-station sent a messenger to invite
the leaders of the new government to come and




Oueen's App5eal to Stevens.


203


consult with them, which was of course declined, and word sent back that if the ex-ministers
wished to see the Provisional Government they
must come to the government building. Two
of the ex-ministers came in company with two
members of the Provisional Government and after
obtaining an assurance of safety returned for
the other two ex-ministers, when all four appeared
at the government building and entered into negotiations for a surrender.
In the meantime the adherents of the Queen,
realizing that all hopes were gone, appealed to the
American Minister for protection, and being refused,
advised the Queen to take advantage of the presence
of the American forces on shore and to surrender
to them. This proposition was refused by Mr.
Dole on the ground that the United States forces
had nothing to do with the present state of affairs,
and he did not understand why such a proposition
should be made, unless it was a dodge. The
royalists then began to evolve some other means
to escape, and were at a loss for plans, when Paul
Neumann came to their rescue. Neumann was
one of the best lawyers in I-Tonolulu, a thorough
Bohemian, an excellent entertainer, of superior
education. He also had more influence with the
Queen than any other man on the islands. A
German by birth, an American by adoption, and a
Hawaiian by domicile, he was at this time the
Queen's only adviser who possessed more than
ordinary abilities or education, but was not over




204


The Surrender.


scrupulous when a fee was in sight. He drew up
terms of surrender by which the Queen was to give
up, under the pretext that the armed forces of the
United States were the supporters of the new government, and stating that impelled by that force
she would, under protest, yield her authority,
appealing to the government of the United States
to reinstate her upon a presentation of her case.
The ex-ministers were no longer trusted by the
Queen as advisers, but to give official force to this
act they were required to sign the document with
the Queen. When the document had been signed,
the ex-ministers in company with the agents of the
new government, who had been sent to demand
the Queen's surrender, returned to the government
building and the terms were accepted. The Queen
then gave orders to the Marshal to give up the policestation, Oahu prison, and government property
under his control, and an officer with a squad of
men was sent to take possession. The commander
of the forces at the palace and the barracks went
over to the government building and offered to
surrender, but was instructed to continue in charge
until the following day, when those two places
were taken possession of.
Late in the evening, and during and following
the time of the negotiations between the officials of
the new government and the Queen's representatives, I saw a number of the foreign diplomatic
corps entering the government building, and was
informed at the time that all had verbally recog



Foreign Recognition.


205


nized the new government as the de facto government of Hawaii. Each stated he would confirm
recognition in writing at the earliest opportunity,
and on the following day this was done by all the
representatives of the foreign powers in Honolulu.
With the final surrender the Provisional Government was in full possession of the public buildings,
the archives, the treasury, and in control of the
Hawaiian capital. Armed sentries were posted
about the city and a mounted patrol detailed to
guard the approaches to and the main streets. No
one was permitted to be on the streets after 9 P. M.,
unless provided with a pass from military headquarters, and for the first time since Saturday afternoon a feeling of quiet was restored, and the people
were able to retire to rest in full confidence of safety.
The forces from the Boston remained all the
time within the limits of their encampment, and
never lifted a finger in either physical or moral support of either the falling monarchy or the rising
Provisional Government. Their men were amply
protected by the opera house and Arion Hall from
all harm, even if fighting had taken place in the
government grounds.
While at the Hawaiian Hotel that evening, I met
the ex-Marshal, C. B. Wilson, and had a long talk
with him in relation to the past events, before he
became biased by the later false statements made
by the Queen's advisers. The Marshal recounted
to me all his plans and how he had expected to
carry them out, had he not been interfered with




206


Wilson's Plans and Forces.


by the ex-ministers. Wilson is a man powerful of
physique, a half white, of strong natural, but uncultivated mind; of good judgment, and possessed
of great confidence in his own prowess. He was
intense in his loyalty to the Queen and bitterly dencunced the ex-ministers as cowards and traitors.
He had intended to resist, and said that it was fully
understood that if a fight took place, the government buildings and palace grounds were to be the
scene of battle, as had been the case in all the other
uprisings in Honolulu. Both he and the ministers
well knew that the government building was the
objective point of the counter-revolutionists. The
forces, he informed me, that were under his command consisted of 60 men at the palace and barracks, 85 armed police and a lot of scared and unarmed refugees, the ex-ministers at the police-station,
and about 20 special deputies in civilian clothes in
the city. With this force so disposed, his plans
were to detail about 30 men early in the forenoon
to guard the government building, and as the volunteers from the armory on Beretania street would
have to approach the government grounds from the
eastern approaches, they would be opened upon by
the cannon in the top of the palace, and the forces
at the barracks and government building. At the
same time he would move up the two Gatling guns
to enfilade the streets from the western approaches
to Palace Square, reserving the station-house for a
base of supplies, and a stronghold to rally on in
case of defeat. Had the Marshal been permitted to




Overthrow of Monarchy.


207


carry out those plans, there would have been loss
of life and the Provisional Government would have
had difficulty in establishing itself that day. However, the provisional forces had everything their
own way from the time of the organization of the
military squads on Sunday night, and I am thoroughly convinced, from personal knowledge and
careful observations, that the counter-revolutionists,
by their superior intellect, greater couLrage, and superior numbers, would have easily won in any event,
and could have sustained themselves when once
established.
Without the loss of a single life this remarkable
revolution in the Hawaiian Islands came to an end.
The Provisional Government immediately received
the support of the best citizens, and nine-tenths of
the property-owners of the country. It resulted in
the complete and final overthrow of the rank hypocrisy and unconcealed paganism of the house
that Kalakaua founded and his sister Liliuokalani
brought to grief.




CHAPTER XIV.


TEMPORARY AMERICAN PROTECTORATE.
From the preceding it will be seen that for three
days, from the 14th to the I6th of January, 1893,
inclusive, there were two parties in Honolulu confronting each other in angry hostility, with every
indication of an armed conflict at any moment, before the forces from the Boston were landed. When
they did land it was purely as a precautionary
measure, and in conformity with established precedent and instructions, authorizing and requiring
the protection of American lives and property in
cases of imminent danger. Their disposition was
such as to subserve that particular object, and in
their distribution at the Legation, Consulate, and
Arion Hall, where they occupied enclosures, they
were isolated and inconspicuous, beyond a sentry
or two on post. No one was permitted to leave
the camp, and no demonstration whatever was
made intimidating to the Queen, or in support of
the organizers ofthe Provisional Government. Prior
to filing her protest, and twenty-four hours after the
troops from the Boston were landed, the Queen and
her ministers requested the aid of those troops for
her re-establishment and protection, which request
was refused and they were again informed that the
force would only be employed to protect American
property and neutral American citizens. On the
208




Establishing' the Government.


209


other hand, the head of the Provisional Government, late in the evening, and after they were in
full possession of the capital of Hawaii, and recognized by the foreign representatives as the de facto
government, requested the support of the American
troops, and further suggested that Captain Wiltse
assume command of their forces.
The reply to this request was the same as that
given to the ex-Queen and her ministers, and at no
time did Captain Wiltse or any officer from the
Boston take command of the Hawaiian forces, or
permit the troops from that vessel to perform any
kind of military duty for the Provisional Government. During the night of the Iyth the officers
and men from the Boston were kept ready for a
moment's call, but everything passed off in a quiet
manner. The interior of the government building
was transformed into a barrack for the volunteer
forces, and the legislative hall and other rooms
were assigned as quarters for the different companies.
The household guards completed their surrender
on the following day, and they were disbanded,
except a small squad that was detailed as a body
guard to the ex-Queen, as it was feared some one
might attempt to do her bodily injury. The
barracks were taken possession of, and all the arms
and ammunition of the late government were
turned over to the proper officials of the Provisional
Government. In view of the unsettled condition
of affairs, and the fact that most of the volunteer




210


Camp Boston.


forces were men of business, and the police were
in sympathy with the royalists, it was thought to
be to the best interest of the United States for the
Boston's troops to remain on shore. In consequence an unoccupied house on King street,
about 300 yards from the temporary camp at Arion
Hall, was obtained for permanent quarters, and
the Boston's battalion, on the forenoon of the i9th,
was moved into the building, known afterwards as
" Camp Boston," where they remained until finally
recalled on board ship, April ist. This house was
a square, two-story building of stone, with broad
verandas on three sides, and as it had formerly
been used as a hotel, the accommodations were
excellent for the health and comfort of the men.
Everything was put in order, and the bills for
expenses were paid by the paymaster of the Boston,
although the Provisional Government offered to do
this; but Captain Wiltse refused to accept their
proposition. The lower floor was occupied as barracks for the men, an office for the adjutant, and
officer of the day, and a guard-room. The upper
rooms were assigned to the officers, and an outside
building was set apart for a hospital and armory.
The grounds around the building had a frontage of
about 250 feet separated from the street by a high
stone wall with two broad entrance gates. On the
east side and to the rear was a splendid lawn for
drill, shaded by tropical trees, and enclosed by a
high broad fence having a rear entrance. The
next day after going into the new quarters a com



to




1,




The Annexation Commission.


21 1


pany was sent through the principal thoroughfares
as a grand guard to make observations, and inspire
confidence. With the exception of this the men
were constantly and rigidily kept within the camp
enclosure during their entire stay on shore, except
a dress parade every evening in Palace Square,
which was attended by most every one in Honolulu.
One of the first acts of the Provisional Government was to appoint a special commission to
proceed to Washington, and negotiate a treaty of
union of the Hawaiian Islands and the United
States. The commission sailed on the g9th of
January for San Francisco, in the chartered steamer
Claudine, and proceeded thence by rail to Washington, where they presented their credentials at the
State Department on the 4th of February. The
ex-Queen, to offset the plans of this commission,
employed Paul Neumann as her diplomatic agent,
to proceed to Washington and present her claim.
He was instructed to obtain for her restoration to
the throne, or a large indemnity as a price of final
abdication, and to try and save her the crown lands.
A full power of attorney, signed and acknowledged
by Liliuokalani, was given to Neumann, authorizing him in his discretion to release all her claims
and make such settlement as he thought best.
To inspire Neumann's zeal in this behalf, she paid
him $5,000 down, and agreed to pay him $5,ooo
more should he succeed. This money she had to
borrow from one of the local banks, having spent
her ready cash on the preparations for change in




212        T7reatment of.Queen.
the constitution.  Neumann sailed on the regular
mail steamer, which left Honolulu a few days after
the Claudine. It leaked out that the ex-Queen in
her instructions had sold out her friends, and they
regarded it as a purely selfish and personal effort on
her part to escape with the spoils of compromise and
leave them in the lurch.
On the ISth the Queen was notified to haul down
the royal standard, which was still flying from
the palace, and to vacate that building. With
her body-guard she accordingly removed to her
private residence on Beretania street, and the palace
was taken for the executive building. Every courtesy and friendly consideration was shown her, even
the salary she had been drawing as Queen was
given her. She was permitted to live quietly in
her own home residence, close by her former palace, and in the fullest enjoyment of all the immunities and privileges of a distinguished citizen. There
she persistently clung to her royal claims, and her
attitude as the rightful ruler of the Hawaiian Islands was not in the least weakened. Her firm confidence in her royal dignity did not show any tremor
in the face of the strong, quiet, and well-ordered
administration of the Provisional Government. She
gathered around her the former ring of political
supporters, and openly threatened and intrigued to
overthrow the new order of governmental affairs.
She was strongly encouraged in this attitude by the
support given by the British residents and officials,
the English Minister being the leader. Prior to her




Thle British Attitude.


213


extreme proceedings just previous to the revolution,
he had been an ardent partisan of the Queen. On
her retirement he continued a notorious sympathizer, and was a frequent caller at Washington
place, the ex-Queen's residence. The rumor was
spread broadcast by the royalists that lhe had requested an English fleet to come to Honolulu and
restore her, and that one was coming.
Another source of great uneasiness to the Provisional Government was the fact that there were
20,000 Japanese in the country, over I,500 of whom
were on a plantation only 20 miles from the city.
These Japanese had been admitted to the country
as contract laborers, under the provisions of a
special labor-immigration treaty.  The general
Japanese treaty gave to Japanese all the immunities
of the peoples of the most favored nations. The
privilege of the franchise had, however, been denied
to them. The royalist leaders made an effort to
stir them up to hostility to the government, by making them believe that if the islands became a part
of the United States, as proposed by the Provisional
Government, they would, under their contracts, become forever slaves, and they promised them full
rights of Hawaiian citizenship if the monarchy
were restored. There was one Japanese man-ofwar in the harbor, and another coming, with every
indication of discontent on the part of both the
Japanese officers and laborers, and when some
400 of the laborers approached the city one evening,
armed with sugar-cane knives, or machetes, and




214       7The Japanese Attitude.
threatening an attack, the situation became serious.
They were stopped with some difficulty and sent
back by the Japanese officials.  There were a
number of renegade whites and of the hoodlum
element of all nationalities ready to nag the Japanese on and for trouble of any kind, and for nights
the town was full of rumors of incendiarism, assassination, and threatened attack on the government
building. The fear entertained by the Provisional
Government, that the captain of the Japanese manof-war might take advantage of the discontent of
his people on shore to land an armed force, and
the expected arrival of an English war vessel, by
the aid of which the British Minister would undoubtedly try to embarrass them, decided them to
request the American Minister to assume a temporary protectorate over the Hawaiian Islands for the
purpose of assuring the status quo and checkmating foreign intrigue until the decision of the annexation proposition.
With the flag of the United States over the government building, they felt confident that neither
the Japanese nor English officials would attempt
to insist that their government had a right to interfere. With the sole object, therefore, of holding the existing status unchanged and free from
foreign complications until the United States could
act, the United States Minister acquiesced in the
propriety of this, and on the morning of February ist the Boston's battalion was paraded and
marched to the government building, where they




TtHE G ONV, ER M - N-I IN N II ', l   INr- HON(OL FI'U'l.
717  u1?~va11  L1;  7~~L1V








Proclamation of Protectorate.


2I5


were received by the civilian troops in line at a
salute. All the officials of the Provisional Government were present, and the custody of the building was turned over. A proclamation signed by
the United States Minister and approved by Captain
Wiltse was then read by the adjutant, establishing
a protectorate over the Hawaiian Islands in the
name of the United States, pending negotiations
and action in Washington. At the close of reading
the proclamation the United States ensign was
hoisted over the building, the battalion and civilian
forces presenting arms. Then the front of the
battalion was changed to the rear, and the Hawaiian
flag was hoisted to the staff in the grounds in front of
the building, the forces again presenting arms, and
a salute of twenty-one guns was fired from the Boston.
The civilian forces were then withdrawn and the
company of marines of the Boston's battalion took
charge of the building. The rest of the battalion
then returned to their quarters. The assumption
of a United States protectorate, and the hoisting of
the flag, had the effect at once of allaying fears and
restoring confidence, and was approved by all the
leading men of the community. A paper edited by
a Canadian, and one by two adherents of the exQueen, filled their columns with abuse of the
United States officials, and with weird utterances
in the native dialect urged the people to rise
against the government, whereupon the editors
were arrested and brought before the courts, and
their papers suppressed until they gave bond to ab



218


JaEpanese Hlostilily.


assistance of the English tars whenever a curbstone encounter took place, in the evident hope
that in the excitement something might be done to
upset the police power of the Provisional Government, and start a counter insurrection, or cause the
English forces to land from the Garnet. To stop
this it became necessary to deprive the men of both
the American and English ships of their liberty on
shore for the time being.  After remaining in
Honolulu several weeks, the Garnet got under way
and left the harbor, leaving the British ship
Hyacinth in her place; but no further rumors of
English interference were circulated. However,
the disaffection among the Japanese spread to the
other islands, and upon the arrival of the large
protected Japanese cruiser Naniwa, on February
23, they became more bold in their threats, and it
soon became necessary to send that vessel to the
other islands to check this growing menace towards
the government of Hawaii. On one occasion a
Japanese convict, sentenced to life imprisonment
for murder, made his escape from Oahu prison and
took refuge on board the Japanese man-of-war,
and upon an application fi:om the Provisional Government for his delivery the Japanese officials
refused to give him up. For a time it looked as
though there would be a breach in the friendly
relations between the two countries, but after a few
days' correspondence the Japanese Commissioner
delivered the convict to the prison authorities, and
from that time peaceable, if not cordial, relations
existed.




Royal and Annexation Cluzs.


2I9


In the meantime the provisional forces were
organized into a company of Ioo men under pay,
a volunteer artillery company of 60o men, two
companies of infantry consisting of 60 men each,
and a home guard. The home guard was composed of the leading men of the town, divided into
corporal's squads, and each squad had a secret
rendezvous at different places in the city. The
whole was under the command of one man, and
by a system of signals they could be called out at a
moment's notice and mobilized at any point, either
by squads, companies, or battalion, to the number
of over 400. From the time the American flag
was hoisted, there was, with the exception of the
above, perfect quiet. Political clubs were organized, one of which was called the Annexation
Club, which was the largest, and composed of
leading whites and natives, having for its object
the political union of Hawaii with the United
States. A large club of natives was formed for
the purpose of supporting the claims of the Queen
for restoration. The majority of the English and
Canadian residents affiliated with the latter club,
and between these two clubs there was intense
feeling and race prejudice. President Dole pursued
a most conservative policy, retaining the natives
in office, which was bitterly opposed by some of
the leaders of the Annexation Club, who at times
even went so far as to undertake to dictate a policy
for the government, and insisted that they should
be invested with all power. President Dole, how



220


Reception to Capt. Wilse.


ever, continued in his wise policy of tolerance and
indulgence, endeavoring to conciliate the native
population, and eventually won a very large
proportion over to the support of the Provisional
Government.
The ex-Queen took advantage of this leniency,
and, assisted by a few sympathizing foreigners, continued her plotting and intrigue at her residence,
until it became necessary to deprive her of the
salary she had been permitted to draw after her retirement from office. Without this salary and the
revenues of the crown lands, having spent on the
coup and in fees to her commissioner all the-money
she could raise, she was without ready means to do
any serious damage.
On Washington's birthday all business houses
were closed at noon, the stars and stripes were seen
on all sides, the shipping in the harbor was dressed
with flags, and the American holiday was celebrated
to the fullest extent. The citizens of Honolulu,
hearing of Captain Wiltse's detachment, decided
upon giving him a farewell reception, and on the
evening of February 24th, it was given in the
opera house. The parquet was covered over for
dancing, and space set apart for the orchestra. The
stage, the proscenium arch, and the walls were
blazoned with flags, mostly American. President
Dole and Captain Wiltse received the more than
two thousand guests. The English Minister and
officers of the English and Japanese men-of-war in
the harbor declined the invitations and were not




American Holidays.


221


present. Their absence, however, did not mar the
festivities in the least, and the affair was a grand
success.
On April ist the temporary protectorate was removed, and the last of the Boston's troops embarked
aboard ship, where they remained until the Boston
returned to Mare Island Navy Yard, in September,
and was put out of commission.
On the 4th of July, the American Independence
Day was celebrated with as much enthusiasm as
in any typical town of the United States. Business was suspended and the American flag displayed everywhere, while the people, in holiday
attire, gathered in a beautiful grove near the city
in such numbers that the place seemed the incarnation of American patriotism.  The Declaration of Independence was read, patriotic songs
were sung, music was furnished by the band,
and appropriate speeches were delivered. Finally,
a few days before the Boston left the port for the
United States, a grand ball was given to the officers
in the executive building, and a great feast to the
crew, by the citizens of Honolulu, which was pronounced by all to have been the grandest affair of
the kind ever given in Honolulu. The old palace
had never presented so fine an appearance as it did
that night. The front of the building was hung
with hundreds of small and large Japanese lanterns,
and all arrangements made to bring out the beauty
of the building and add to the festal splendor of
the scene. The newel posts and grand stairway




222


2A Ball to tAe Boston.


were draped with American and Hawaiian flags
alternating with each other. The numerous chandeliers of the hallway were trimmed with wreaths
and festooned with red, white, and blue ribbons. In
the center of the entrance was placed a large ottoman of red silk surmounted by a silver flower-stand
filled with red and pink blossoms. The council
chamber, where the ball was held, was decorated
with festoons of fragrant ferns. The dais, lately occupied by the President's chair, was covered with
evergreens, behind which was draped the American
flag, over which was placed the single word " Boston" in large gold letters on a blue background.
The large mirrors were ornamented by a skilful
arrangement and contrasting of colors ranging from
the dark green of tropical vines to the brilliant
glow of variegated carnations in crystal containers.
The gilt window-frames were each surmounted by
an alternate gold and silver shield placed at the
center. The ceiling was crossed and intercrossed
with red, white, and blue ribbons, hung from the
crystal chandeliers. In the main hallway above
were laid the magnificently provided tables for
supper, and the four verandas on the sides of the
building were provided with chairs and tables to
accommodate the guests. Promptly at the appointed hour the guests began to arrive and it
seemed as if the whole population of Honolulu had
turned out with the exception of the English officials
and a few leading royalists. The guests were received by Mrs. Dole, assisted by several prominent




Departure of the Boston.


223


ladies. The music was furnished bythe Hawaiian
band and that of the United States flagship.
At 8 o'clock the grand procession was formed,
headed by Admiral Skerrett and staff, who were
followed by the other officers of the three American vessels in port, all in full-dress uniform. They
were presented to Mrs. Dole and the ladies receiving. The reception of the other guests followed
and at 9 o'clock the ball was opened with the Saratoga lancers. Dancing was kept up until a late
hour. The entertainment was in every sense a
flattering success and the officers of the Boston can
forever look back upon it as one of the most agreeable occasions in which they ever participated.
The Boston got under way the following afternoon, and as she left the harbor of Honolulu was
followed to sea by the President and government
officials on the harbor tug, with the band playing
patriotic Hawaiian and American airs. Off Diamond Head they gave farewell cheers and Godspeed to the cruiser that had been in their waters
a welcome guest during fourteen months of severe trials and a witness of the triumphal overthrow of the corrupt and semi-savage monarchy
which for the past twenty years had been a menace
to the Christianity and civilization of the nation.
Kalakaua, whose election was secured by American influence, and who was established on his
throne by American protection, alienated the support of the foreign residents in his efforts to gain
native popularity and revive Hawaiian superstition;




224


Cause of Fall of tueen.


he laid the foundation and commenced the revolution which Liliuokalani carried on with such determination that she thereby lost her crown and relegated herself to private life.
But for the determined retrogression of this
family, monarchy would probably have survived for
many years in Hawaii, as none of the leading
whites thought of such a thing as revolution until
they were fairly goaded into it in defense of the
elementary principles of freedom and liberty.
The Provisional Government, up to the time of
the sailing of the Boston from I-Ionolulu, was
moderate in its demands, humane in its actions,
uniformly considerate with the whole people,
whether native or foreign, and exceedingly patient
with the deposed monarch, who was permitted
to enjoy every privilege, even when it was well
known how sullenly, persistently, and determinedly
she was plotting against them, backed by the powerful support of the English Minister and his clique.




CHAPTER XV.


FOREIGN INTERFERENCE AND TREATIES.
The Provisional Government was administered
by men of intelligence, education, and high character, and at the time of departure of the Boston
was protected by an efficient military and police
force. The officials saw, however, that by reason
of the undisguised hostility of the diplomatic representative of the great maritime power of Europe,
and his flagrant intimacy with the fallen Queen and
her adherents, together with the threat of interference in their internal affairs on the part of other
foreign officials, it would not be long before
troubles of a serious nature would arise. It was
also manifest that the defunct royalist party, under
the encouragement thus given by these foreign
diplomatic agents, were intriguing in such manner
that it was only a question of time when a desperate effort would be made to restore the old regime.
This situation necessitated an unusual expense to
maintain a force capable of protecting the government against these internal foes. But, to meet the
perils from without, it was fully realized that an
alliance with some strong nation was necessary.
The United States was preferred, and in compliance with the provisions of the proclamation under
which the Provisional Government was formed,
annexation to that country was attempted, a measure
22i




226


6Russian Aggression.


which after many set-backs is now an accomplished
fact.
A review of the intrigues in the past on the part
of the French and English agents, having for their
objects the subversion of the native government
and the seizure of the islands, is enough to sustain
the grave fears entertained by the supporters of the
new government. From the earliest period of discovery of the Hawaiian Islands by the whites,
the subject of their control has been one of bitter
contention between various foreign governments,
and this contention will continue so long as they
remain independent. As early as 1794, Vancouver took possession of the islands in the name
of Great Britain and hoisted the English flag,
but when the news reached London his acts were
not ratified. Following upon this, in 1815, the
Russian governor of Alaska sent a vessel to Honolulu, and upon her arrival a block-house was
built, a few guns mounted and the Russian flag
hoisted. A fortified post was also established on
Kauai. To resist this encroachment, the King, in
the following year and under the advice of John
Young, a boatswain of an English ship, who had
been detained on shore and raised to the rank of a
high chief, built a large fort at Honolulu and
mounted upon it about forty guns, as well as a few
more on Punch Bowl hill. Upon the completion
of these works, Kamehameha gave orders to expel
the Russians.  In their attempt to depart, their
vessel was sunk in the harbor, but the crew was




British Aggression.


227


kindly treated by the natives, and the act of the
Russian agent was disavowed by the Russian governmnent.
The King, still fearing a repetition of Russian
interference, sailed, in 1823, for the United States
and England to secure their protection. WVhile in
England he and his wife died, but his attendants
were sent back with the royal remains, in an English man-of-war, with a promise from George IV
to protect them against all foreign aggression. At
the same time a coarse and illiterate man, Richard
Charlton, was appointed as British Consul, who
immediately put himself at the head of a lawless
and depraved class of foreigners, and persistently
labored to destroy the influence of the American
missionaries and attempted to involve the native
government in difficulties that would result in
hoisting the British flag over the group.  This
arrogant Consul even went so far as to deny the
right of the native chiefs to make laws or treaties
without the approval of the British government,
and a series of outrages were perpetrated, under his
direction, to enforce the repeal of the laws which
had been enacted to restrict drunkenness and prostitution. In all his acts he was backed by the
crews of the whaling-ships, which on several
occasions landed a body of men and committed
many acts of a riotous nature, even going so far as
to attack the residences of the missionaries, and on
one occasion they actually fired upon the town of
Lahaina, the then capital of the kingdom. These




228


British Aggression.


lawless acts became so common that an American
man-of-war was finally sent out to suppress them,
and after ridding the islands of a lot of runaway
sailors the captain agreed to the terms of a commercial treaty with the United States, which, however, was not ratified by the home government.
The English Consul bitterly opposed this treaty
and issued a manifesto that the islands were under
the control of Great Britain and that the King,
therefore, could not enter into any treaty with the
United States or any other power.  Following
upon this line of dictation the English Consul, on
the accession of Kamehameha III, made every
effort to lead the King into dissipation and to
estrange him from his political advisers, hoping
thereby to gain his influence. With the assistance
of a renegade Tahitian he was very successful:
laws were abrogated, distilleries set up, obscene
dances and drunken revels were encouraged, and
heathen practices revived. The King finally realized the hold these people had upon him, broke
away and asserted himself, which resulted in a
change for the better and the adoption of a constitutional government.
In the meantime a renegade Frenchman by the
name of Rives, a man who had been dismissed as
interpreter to Kamehameha II while on his voyage
to England, went to France, and by false representations succeeded in getting a few French laborers
and three priests to follow him back to the islands.
The English Consul saw in the landing of these




Trouble with France.


229


priests an opportunity to further his designing intrigues with the internal affairs of the government,
and to offset the influences of the American mission, enlisted their support, and together with
Rives plotted to bring about a civil war, which was
only averted by the boldness of the native chiefs.
In I831 the council of high chiefs, in opposition to
the advice of the American missionaries, passed a
formal order for the departure of the priests, and
they sailed for California. This banishment, however, was of short duration, for the exiled priests
soon returned to the islands in an English vessel,
but in an attempt to land they were sent back to the
vessel. The captain refused to receive them, whereupon they were put on board by force. The captain in consequence sent the crew ashore and hauled
down his flag, and made a protest to the English
Consul, who was always on the alert for some pretext to force the native government into a quarrel.
The Consul declared that the vessel had been seized
by the Hawaiian government, for which he made
claim for $50,000 damages. An English and a
French man-of-war shortly after came into harbor,
and their commanding officers, upon exaggerated
reports by the Consuls of their respective countries,
made a vigorous protest against the detention of
the priests on board ship. The native government
was forced to permit tlhe landing of the priests, but
under a solemn promise that they should depart as
soon as an opportunity would permit. The port
was declared under blockade, and the French cap



230


2French Aggression.


tain in a brief conference with the King forced him
to sign an agreement to accord to the French equal
advantages with those of the most favored nations.
The two men-of-war then sailed away.
For the next five years the French and English
became very active in their efforts to occupy the
islands of the Pacific, and the Hawaiian government more than ever became a bone of contention.
The French made another effort to land Catholic
priests on the islands as a pretext to opening hostilities with the native government, but after a vigorous protest, the King, in June, I839, met the demands of the French by issuing an edict of toleration
for all religions on the islands. This was not what
the French wanted, and the captain of the man-ofwar, in the following month, drew up a series of
articles by which the King was to grant not only
the freedom of the Catholic religion and the erection of a Catholic church in Honolulu, but the flag
of France must be saluted with twenty-one guns.
The sum of $20,000 was exacted from the government. A battalion of one hundred and fifty men,
with fixed bayonets and a band of music, were
landed and took possession of the King's residence,
and after the priests had celebrated mass, the King
was made to sign the convention without amendments. Under duress the series of articles were
agreed to, and, in addition, French merchants were
granted extraordinary commercial privileges, and
in future all Frenchmen who should commit any
crime in the islands were to be tried by a foreign




France-Englcznd.


23I


jury, selected by the French Consul. Following
upon this the Catholic mission became a settled institution. Shortly after, a bishop and many priests
arrived in the islands, and a considerable number
of natives were enrolled as converts. Petty disputes
arose between the Catholics and Protestants, and
the French Consul endeavored to support the former
by constantly interfering in the internal affairs of
the government.
This state of affairs continued until 1842, when
another French man-of-war arrived in Honolulu,
and from the very first exhibited an unfriendly disposition by failing to exchange a national salute.
The captain made a number of demands, which
were answered by the King in a dignified manner,
stating an embassy had been sent to France to negotiate a new treaty. The English Consul, stimulated by the French action, and jealous of the advantages that might be obtained by a rival country,
thereupon manufactured a lot of grievances intending to involve the native government in difficulties
that would result in hoisting the English flag over
the islands. The King, after vainly trying to satisfy
the Consul, petitioned the British government to
remove him. The Consul, failing to produce an
open rupture, engaged in another move by taking
advantage of the schemes of a private firm who, by
a secret contract, had obtained a lease of a large
tract of land at a low rental.
The Hawaiian government, realizing the danger
that would follow the designs of the English Consul,




232


Cession to England.


made an effort to avoid a crisis by appointing a
commission to visit the United States, Great Britain,
and France, with power to negotiate new treaties,
and, if possible, to obtain guarantees of the independence of the kingdom. This embassy quietly
embarked in a small schooner for Mazatland, and
crossed to Vera Cruz. As soon as it was known
that they had left the islands on such a mission, the
wily English Consul secretly embarked for London,
leaving an English adventurer as his deputy to carry
out the designs in which both were interested. The
hostility of this deputy to the native government
was so well known that the King refused to recognize him, whereupon he sent dispatches requesting
that a man-of-war be sent to protect him, and representing that the property and persons of his
countrymen were in danger. The complaints of
the Consul induced the British Admiral to send an
English man-of-war, under the command of Lord
George Paulet, to Honolulu to investigate. The
Consul had met Paulet on the Mexican coast, and
made a convert of him to his schemes. Hence,
upon arrival, Paulet, without ceremony, demanded
the recognition of the English Vice-Consul and immediate submission to the English government.
The peaceful submission of the King was not what
the hot-headed Paulet wanted, and he followed these
demands up with one for the absolute cession of the
islands to the Kingdom of Great Britain. The
King, amid perplexity and the indignation of the
American residents, was forced to sign a provisional




Restoration by England.


233


cession and the Hawaiian flag was hauled down
and the British colors hoisted instead. The officers
of the American man-of-war in the harbor, after
doing all in their power short of open hostilities,
showed their displeasure at this outrageous seizure
of the islands at the cannon's mouth, gave a ball
and declined to invite the officers of the English
vessel. Paulet appointed a commission, including
himself, to govern the islands, which arrogated
to itself executive, legislative, and judicial powers.
It seized all the lands claimed by the English
Consul, and expelled all natives living on the
same.   It abrogated all laws against vice, released all prisoners, and enlisted a small army of
natives, who were made to swear allegiance to
Great Britain, and were drilled by English officers.
Heavy drafts were made on the Hawaiian treasury,
and the seizure of the national archives was threatened. The impetuous anxiety of Paulet to inform
the home government of his acts caused him to
send his dispatches by the Vice-Consul direct to
England instead of through his Admiral, as he
should have done. This offended the Admiral, and
upon his arrival, when informed of what had taken
place, he became so indignant over the presumption of his subordinate that he not only disapproved
of Paulet's acts, but restored the King to authority
after obtaining his signature to a convention which
fully guarded English interests. The 3 I st of July,
the day of this restoration, has ever since been a
national holiday, and the place where the cere



234


Webster on Hawazi.


monies were held was made into a public square,
and called Thomas Square, after the Admiral.
These interferences in Hawaiian affairs by the
French and English officials, and their encroachments upon the commercial rights of other nations
in these islands, were encouraged by the absence
of any pronounced policy on the part of the United
States. When the Hawaiian Commission represented to the Washington government the true
condition of affairs, the United States immediately
declared that no power ought to take possession of
the islands, either as a conquest or for the purpose
of colonization. Daniel Webster, then Secretary
of State, while declining at that time to recognize
their full independence, announced definitely that
as between Hawaii and all other governments
Hawaii must be considered absolutely independent.
This declaration on the part of the United States
operated, without doubt, to prevent England
or France from taking possession of the islands.
The Hawaiian Commission at first met with
indifferent reception in England. The British
officials refused to receive them, claiming that
the influence of the United States was detrimental to British interests. But when the French
government treated the Commissioners with every,
consideration, and promised to recognize the independence of Hawaii, the English officials thought
better of their former course, and not only recognized the independence of the native government,
but promised to remove Charlton, the objectionable




England and France.


235


English Consul. They also assured the United
States and France that the English government
had no intention of retaining possession of the Hawaiian Islands. Finally, on the 28th of November, 1843, France and England entered into a joint
declaration not only recognizing the independence
of the island kingdom, but agreeing never to take
possession, either directly or under the title of a
protectorate, of the whole or any part of the islands.
The United States followed up their friendly act
by immediately sending a Commissioner, and the
English replaced the troublesome Charlton as Consul-General for Great Britain. The French, a few
years later, attested their friendly relations by restoring the $20,ooo extorted by the French captain
in 1839.
Notwithstanding these treaties and avowed relations of an amicable nature, the foreign consular and
diplomatic representatives continued to intrigue
and harass the native government by asserting the
rights of ready access to the King, diplomatic interference with internal affairs, and efforts to discredit the native government abroad and break it
down at home. Old claims were revived, and for
several years the government was involved in disputes with the English Consul-General over the
illegal Charlton claims, which had already been
settled by the courts and confirmed by Great Britain
in favor of the Hawaiian government. The French
Consul attempted to reopen the old disputes and
manufactured new grievances, for which the Ha



z36


French Aggression.


waiian government was compelled to request his
recall. Instead of complying with this request, a
French frigate arrived in I849, and the Admiral in
command supported the Consul in ten most unjust
demands. An armed force was landed, and, against
the urgent protests of the American and English
Consuls, the custom-house and public buildings
were seized, the fort dismantled, and much property destroyed, the King's yacht confiscated, and
communication with the other islands cut off. Although the French government disavowed the acts
of the Admiral, the King was, nevertheless, apprehensive, and for his better guidance installed some
of the leading foreigners as his advisers.
A  second commission was dispatched to the
United States, England, and France, and a new
treaty negotiated with the two former countries,
but they met with opposition in France. This
opposition was indicative that the acts of the
Admiral were in accord with instructions from
Paris, and as further evidence that such was the
case, the French sent out a counter commission,
who, to the surprise of every one, renewed the
demands of the Consul and assumed a policy of
interfering with the internal affairs of the kingdom.
The King and Privy Council became alarmed at the
new aggression of the French, and issued a proclamation on March Ioth, I850, placing the islands
under the protection of the United States. This
document was duly signed and deposited with the
government archives. When it became known, the




Annexation in 1854.


237


French Commissioner modified his demands, and
although arbitrary and unjust they were submitted
to by the native government. The officials of the
United States from this time on assumed a more
active policy, and in 85 I Secretary Marcy apprised
both France and England of the determination
of the United States not to allow the Hawaiian
Islands to be owned by, or fall under the protection
of, either of those two powers, or any other European government. In I854 the Secretary directed
the American Minister at Honolulu to negotiate a
treaty of annexation. Sailor riots and threatened
filibuster raids from California kept the native
government in a constant state of alarm, which,
together with internal political agitation and party
strife induced an active agitation in favor of annexation to the United States. A committee was
appointed to carry out these objects, which was
vigorously protested against by the British and
French Consuls. Petitions were presented to the
King based upon strong commercial interests, and
he favored such a course as a refuge from the
annoying demands made upon him by the foreign
powers and the intrigues of their agents.
The prospect of annexation to the United States
stimulated speculation and led to new enterprises.
The King in February, I854, agreed to an annexation treaty, which was duly drawn up, but before
it was signed he died, and his successor, Kamehameha IV, declined to carry the negotiations further.
A treaty of reciprocity was concluded instead with




238     Continuous Annexation Policy.


the United States, but it failed of ratification at
Washington.
In I867 a minister was sent to the United States
to negotiate a treaty of reciprocity, and though it
was approved by the Hawaiian legislature and the
President of the United States, it failed of ratification by the United States Senate. Secretary Seward
instructed the United States Minister at Honolulu
that the peaceful annexation of the Hawaiian
Islands was more desirable.  In I86S President
Johnson, in his message to Congress, recognized
the precarious condition of the Hawaiian people,
caused by the unfriendly proceedings of the foreign
powers, and favored a treaty of reciprocity until the
people applied for admission to the Union. Again,
in I88I, Secretary Blaine, in his dispatches to the
American Minister, spoke of the advantage to be
derived from the annexation of the Hawaiian
Islands and the settlement of their future upon an
American basis, and not upon an Asiatic or British
solution. Secretary Bayard and other American
officials have since reiterated the same sentiments.
Finally, in S876, a treaty of commercial reciprocity with the United States, together with the
enactment of laws to carry it into effect, was
entered into in spite of strenuous opposition on the
part of a large party in the islands led by the English residents. Under the provisions of this treaty,
the United States became the controlling influence
in the commercial affairs of the island kingdom,
and an era of unexampled prosperity followed for




Japanese in Hawaii.


239


the people of Hawaii. So great was the influence
thus obtained by the United States that the French
officials have stopped their interference in Hawaiian
internal affairs. The immense and growing importance of American interests in the Pacific led
to an amendment to the original treaty of reciprocity, in I887, whereby the United States obtained the exclusive right to use Pearl Harbor as a
coaling depot and naval station, thus completing
her commercial control of the islands so long as
the treaty continues. The effect of the treaty was,
for the time being, to silence the discussion of annexation, and it was not renewed again until the
continuous aggressions of Kalakaua and Liliuokalani upon the rights of the people forced it to
the front.
In the meantime the English Minister, supported
by British resident subjects and naval officers, made
an effort to offset American influences, and by his
support of the fallen Queen and her adherents was
the means of giving intense alarm. Aside from
this hostile British influence, there was a new factor
of trouble in the Japanese, who even now threaten
future interference of a most serious nature.
There are about 25,ooo000 Japanese in Hawaii, of
whom over 9,000o are adult males. Nearly all
have had a military training, many having served
in the war with China. The adult male natives
number only about io,ooo, and the adult male
whites of all nationalities only 7,500. Japanese
immigration increased to an alarming extent, and




240


0 Jaanese in Hawaizi.


threatened by sheer force of numbers to possess the
country and make it practically, if not formally,
Japanese. By a clause in the treaty between the
two countries, the privileges of the most favored
nations were accorded Japanese residents in Hawaii,
and the government of Japan was continually demanding for its subjects the right to vote,-which
the Hawaiian government persistently refused.
Acting upon this refusal, and with a determination
of ultimately seizing the islands, the Japanese government, in I897, sent as many as 2,000 emigrants
a month to Hawaii, and amongst these emigrants
were a number of trained soldiers disguised as laborers. An attempt by IIawaii to limit this invasion resulted in a demand by Japan for damages,
for an apology, and a promise not to further interfere with Japanese immigration. All that prevented
the enforcement of these demands was the pendency
of the annexation treaty with the United States,
and the result was, for the time being, the creation
of most bitter feelings between the Japanese and the
people of the United States. On several occasions
our sailors were attacked by a mob in Kobe and
American tourists in Japan were insulted. The
difficulty was finally settled by the political changes
in the Orient, and the Hawaiian government agreeing to pay an indemnity of $75,000, which was accepted by Japan with reluctance; and were it not
for the fact she has to watch the political agitation
in the Orient, early and certain aggression by Japan
against the claim of the United States to Hawaii
might be looked for.




CHAPTER XVI.


EX-PARTE INVESTIGATION BY UNITED STATES
COMMISSIONER.
The great strategical value and commercial
importance of the Hawaiian Islands, and the
frequent interferences by foreign nations in the
internal affairs of the island kingdom, have warned
the I-awaiian people of their inability to permanently maintain an independent government. For
more than seventy years Americans and American
influence have been dominant in Hawaii, and
annexation to the United States has during all
these years been the subject of careful study and
contemplation. This has always been regarded
by them as the ultimate destiny of the country,
whenever the exigencies of fate should compel them
to make choice between independence and foreign
domination. In this they have been encouraged
by the public declarations of American statesmen,
and the diplomatic correspondence of the United
States with its Ministers to Hawaii, which has
from time to time been made public or communicated to the Hawaiian officials.  In this correspondence frequent and favorable allusion is made
to ' closer relations "between the two countries, the
term 'C annexation" being sometimes used, and at
others, more general language. Many times the
subject of annexation has been dealt with in a spirit
241




242    American Annexation Policy.


of friendly consideration for the advantage of the
country and the people. Daniel Webster, John
M. Clayton, W. L. Marcy, William H. Seward,
Hamilton Fish, Thomas F. Bayard, and James
G. Blaine as Secretaries of State, and Presidents
Pierce, Lincoln, Johnson, and Grant, all equally
maintained a settled policy that all other foreign
nations must be excluded from Hawaii, and that
if it should turn out that Hawaii could not maintain an independent stable government it should
be encouraged to gravitate towards political union
with the United States.  It became a conceded
axiom on the part of Great Britain, Germany, and
France that the islands would in the course of time
drift to the United States. The result has been
that the progress, education, development, laws,
commerce, and government of Hawaii have become
so closely identified with those of the United
States that there has developed an ever-increasing
mutuality of interests and gravitation of Hawaii
toward political union with the United States.
This peculiar relationship has repeatedly been
evidenced by official declarations that no intervention would be permitted in the affairs of Hawaii
by any foreign power which might tend to diminish
American control, or to gain any advantage over
the Americans who may have settled in that
country.  Finally a treaty of reciprocity was
agreed upon between the two countries, by which
the Hawaiian trade, both export and import, is
practically confined to the United States, while at




The Annexation Treaty.


243


the same time its terms are highly advantageous to
Hawaii.  It, moreover, prevents the disposal of
Hawaiian bays, harbors, and territory, either by
lease or otherwise, to other countries so long as
the treaty lasts, and gives to the United States the
exclusive right to Pearl Harbor as a coaling depot
and naval station. Hence when the Provisional
Government assumed the sovereign power, their
avowed purpose to secure the annexation of the
Hawaiian Islands to the United States was but an
event in the natural order of development; an
event which had been predicted, looked forward
to, and hoped for by two generations of American
statesmen.  The proclamation inaugurating the
new government explicitly stated that it would
exist "1 until terms of union with the United States
of America have been negotiated and agreed upon."
Therefore, the Executive and Advisory councils
proceeded to immediately carry out the provisions
of the proclamation under which they assumed
office, by appointing a commission to go to Washington, where they negotiated and signed a treaty
in conjunction with Secretary Foster for the
annexation of the Hawaiian Islands to the United
States, which was approved by the President and
sent to the Senate for ratification.
When the news reached Honolulu that the treaty
had been signed by the President and sent to the
Senate the majority of the people went into a
fever of enthusiam and blossomed out with handkerchiefs and head-coverings made of the stars and




244     Treaty Withdrawn-Blount.


stripes; the American flag was displayed from almost every house-top and flag-staff, and the Hawaiian band played the " Star-Spangled Banner."
The Senate of the United States delayed action
until after the 4th of March, when another administration came into power and Mr. Cleveland, the
new President, disapproving of the acts of his predecessor, withdrew the treaty from the Senate and
appointed Mr. Blount, of Georgia, a special Commissioner to Hawaii to make an investigation and
report upon the causes that led to the overthrow of
the Hawaiian monarchy. When the news reached
Honolulu of the withdrawal of the treaty from the
Senate it caused serious misgivings in the minds
of the government officials, and the royalist faction
exhibited their feelings in a series of jollificationmeetings, and drinking-bouts in the bar-room of
the Hawaiian Hotel, and at night the old court circles gathered at the ex-Queen's residence, and between poi, gin and music the party had a royal
time. On the other hand, while disappointment
was felt on the part of the leading citizens, they
nevertheless took a philosophical view of the situation and fully appreciated the fact that the President was new to the subject, and was entitled to
know the facts.  They therefore welcomed the
news of a Commissioner fiom the United States to
inquire into the state of affairs, and without fear of
the result, awaited and courted a fair, complete,
and impartial investigation and report to the President of the United States. But they were sadly
disappointed.




Arrzv taof Blount.        245
Commissioner Blount, with "s paramount authority," and accompanied by a stenographic clerk,
arrived in the harbor of Honolulu on the United
States Revenue Cutter Rush, about noon of the
29th of March, 1893. By the time the Rush came
to anchor an immense crowd of men, women, and
children had gathered on the wharves in expectation
of seeing the Commissioner. The United States
Minister and a delegation of leading gentlemen of
Honolulu immediately went on board to receive the
high official and extend to him offers of assistance and friendly courtesies. They informed him
that the manager of the Hawaiian Hotel was intensely partisan in his royalist sympathies, that
the hotel was the rendezvous of the royal supporters,
and for him to go there would simply be to place
himself within the circle of their influence. They
further informed him of a comfortable residence
then vacant, but furnished, removed from annoyances and interferences, which he could have on
his own terms. These courteous salutations and
friendly offers were met with a bluff refusal, and
in the midst of the conversation Mr. Blount abruptly turned on his heel and returned to the cabin,
leaving his visitors standing in amazement on deck.
Shortly after this incident the Commissioner left the
vessel and went on shore, where he was met by the
Chamberlain of the ex-Queen, who offered him the
use of her coach, which he politely declined, his
manner being in marked contrast with the treatment accorded the diplomatic representative of the




246     American Flag Hauled Down.


United States. Entering a cab, he drove to the
Hawaiian Hotel, where he took up his residence in
one of the cottages in the hotel grounds, and from
the very first, free access was given to the exQueen's ministers and the royal supporters, while
the members of the government and the leading
whites of the community were either denied that
privilege or put off with the remark that when they
were wanted they would be sent for.
Grave anxiety on the part of the government
officials began to assume shape, notwithstanding
Mr. Blount's letter of credence was to that government and of a most friendly and cordial nature.
They feared a partiality to the ex-Queen, and as
the methods of interrogation of a class of irresponsible persons became known in the progress of the
investigation, these fears increased. Friendly overtures and disinterested offers of ordinary courtesies
and civilities by the leading whites were met by
cool and deliberate snubs, which caused them to
refrain from calling or volunteering information.
The first two days were occupied by Mr. Blount in
presenting his letters of credence to the Provisional
Government and notifying the United States
officials, both diplomatic and naval, of his " paramount authority." On the afternoon of March 31 st
he notified the President of the Provisional Government of his intention to haul down the American
ensign and issued a written positive and direct order
to Admiral Skerrett, commanding the United States
naval forces in the Pacific, to haul down the United




American Flag Hauled Down.


217


States flag from the government building at I I
o'clock on the ist of April and embark the troops
on shore to the ship. This unusual and unprecedented order was obeyed by Admiral Skerrett,
although he exhibited unmistakable signs of irritation and humiliation, and afterwards wrote a complaint to the Navy Department.
Coming into town early in the morning of April
ist, in company with a friend at whose country
cottage I had spent the night, we passed the residence of the ex-Queen, where we met a couple of
native women coming out, who informed us they
had spent the night with the ex-Queen; that she
and her ex-ministers had been informed the evening before that the United States flag was going to
be hauled down that day at I o'clock; that the
Commissioner was going to restore her, and that
she was very nervous and excited. On arrival on
board ship I found that no one there had as yet
been informed of the fact, the orders from the Admiral coming later. At the appointed time the flag
was hauled down and the troops embarked, a humiliation which was keenly felt by both men and
officers. No demonstration was made by the people present, and no exhibition of disturbance, yet
the immediate effect of this movement was to increase the membership of the Annexation Club in
the city. No notice was given by Mr. Blount to
the government of what he was doing, nor was any
request made of them to present evidence or argument. He simply commenced and carried through




?48


Blount's Methods.


a secret and ex-parte investigation, examining only
those witnesses whom he selected, nearly all of
whom were avowed royalists. His method of examination was to put leading questions upon a few
points, either shutting off altogether or manifesting
by his manner that he did not wish to listen to evidence on other points. It soon became manifest
that it was his purpose to obtain evidence in support of a restoration of the ex-Queen, and in support of the theory that the American Minister and
the officers of the Boston were parties to the overthrow of the monarchy. The causes of the revolution, the grievances of the people, the justness of
their action, the rottenness, immorality, and irresponsible character of the late King, the ex-Queen,
and the entire court influence-all this was ignored,
and the investigation conducted as though he were
an attorney working up one side of a case. The
royalists were kept well informed of what was going
on, and freely predicted what the report would
show. Mr. Blount's stenographic clerk was a frequent visitor and most intimate associate at the
house of a leading royalist, one of the most notorious native gamblers and smugglers in Honolulu,
and from this house frequent reports came of what
Blount's doings and intentions were, that were afterwards corroborated in the published report of the
Commissioner. So-called patriotic societies, headed
by some of the worst characters on the islands, including the drunken Bush of Samoan fame, were
the first to present a series of resolutions. The




An Unfair Investigation.


7,49


statements of these men were given careful attention, and serious consideration without inquiry as to
their standing in the community. The ex-Queen's
ministers were examined at length, and encouraged
to state all they were supposed to know in support
of their cause; while, on the other hand, the few
officers from the Boston, and all the sympathizers
with the Provisional Government, were asked leading questions, sk-ilfully framed, to bring out any
facts tending to support " the theory," while further
explanatory evidence, which would have absolutely
refuted such conclusion, was suppressed. Any information or suggestions from the naval officers or
the United States Minister were met with the reply
that he simply wanted answers to the questions put.
I am not speaking from hearsay, but of my own
knowledge, when I say that Mr. Blount did not attempt to make either a fair investigation or a truthful report.
I was called before the Commissioner and made
several suggestions in relation to the revolution.
When I came to the statement that Captain Wiltse
would not have allowed any fighting in the streets
in the vicinity of the residences of Americans, Mr.
Blount eagerly asked me to write that down, saying
he did not care for the rest. On several occasions
I suggested the names of old white residents, of
high standing, who were familiar with the entire
history and progress of the islands and the events
leading up to the revolution, and in each case he said
he did want anything to do with them; whereas those




250


False Evidence.


who were in accord with the fallen Queen were
either sent for or permitted to make all manner of
statements, many in the form of written affidavits,
drawn up by themselves, without the slightest regard to their character or standing. In no case was
there anything in the nature of cross-examination
to test the credibility of the royalist witnesses or
the correctness of their statements. One noticeable
instance was that of the manager of the Hawaiian
I-Hotel, who was repeatedly sent for, and at all times
had ready access to the Commissioner's cottage. I
called Mr. Blount's attention to the fact that this
man was an intense royalist, and misrepresenting
facts to him. From what he had told me in relation
to the examination and his answers, I knew he was
not telling the truth; yet in the published report
of the Commissioner this man is represented as a
person of the greatest integrity and high social
standing.
One day I was passing through the corridor of
the hotel and met the ex-Marshal, Wilson, who requested me to look over and comment upon a typewritten manuscript which he held in his hand, and
which he informed me was prepared at the request
of the Commissioner. Upon looking over the document I observed the first few pages were devoted
to vilification and abuse of the American Minister,
and advised him to expunge it. I remarked that
the whole paper bore the earmarks of Peterson,
the ex-Attorney-General to the Queen, as I recognized some of the phrases that I had heard Peter



Wilson's Statement.


251


son use, to which Wilson replied that Peterson
did write it from  his notes, and that the part
about Minister Stevens was known to Mr. Blount,
who told him to put it in, as he, the Commissioner,
wanted full information about Stevens. The document, among other things, purported to give a
statement of the military forces at the disposal of
the Queen at the time of her overthrow and the
plans for a fight, had such an affair taken place, and
the number of men under arms as eight hundred.
I remarked that the number given was false; that
I was cognizant of the exact number, which was
only one hundred and forty-five. Wilson acknowledged that I was correct; but said that in a conversation with the Commissioner, the day before, he,
Wilson, had said to the Commissioner that he could
have gotten that many if he had been given time,
and that the Commissioner directed him to put as
many men down as he could have obtained.
Therefore the paper would go in as it was, and if the
Commissioner wanted more he would give them to
him. VWhether the Commissioner " wanted more,"
or whether Wilson's imagination fed upon itself,
I cannot say, but the identical report shown me by
Wilson appears in Mr. Blount's report to Secretary
Gresham, with the available force changed from
8oo, the number stated when I saw it, to 700, " and
a reserve of about 500 men, mostly foreigners," or
I,20oo altogether. The utter unreliability of the
statement is demonstrated by the fact that another
statement sworn to by Wilson and also printed in




252


Inconsistent Evidence.


Blount's report says that the police-station force
was 224, and an affidavit by Nowlein, commander
of the palace troops, gives the number at the palace
as 272, or a total of 496.
A summary of these statements, which are about
as near the truth as most of the evidence on which
Mr. Blount based his report, is as follows:
The real number of armed men supporting
the Queen was........................  I45
The number sworn to by Wilson and Nowlein was........................  496
The number enumerated in Wilson's statement when he showed it to me was......  800
The number enumerated in Wilson's statement when printed in Blount's report is.. 1,200
I called on the Commissioner the following morning, informed him of this conversation, told him
that of my own knowledge the paper was full of
misstatements, and that if he desired the facts I could
recommend a few actual participants, men of standing, both Provisional Government men and royalits, who would give them to him. He appeared
much embarrassed, but made no reply except to
ask: "Did he show you that paper?" In the
published report the paper appears in its entirety,
with the remark that the ex-Marshal was a man
who could be relied upon, and that he believed his
statements to be substantially correct.
On another occasion I met several native politicians, ex-members of the legislature, coming out
of the cottage. They told me they had just been




Bloount Annoyed.


253


examined by the Commissioner, and that from his
manner and the character of his questions they were
sure he was making an effort to secure information
in favor of the royalists.
Rumors began to be circulated that the Commissioner was strongly in favor of the monarchy
and had made secret visits to the residence of
the ex-Queen, which rumors came from the exministers, who were constant at and around the
cottage. These rumors appeared to irritate the
Commissioner, and when he accepted an invitation
to visit one of the other islands in company with a
party of the ex-Queen's adherents, who made the
most of the opportunity to augment the foundation
for these rumors, the Commissioner issued an explanation and denial. Another annoying episode to
the Commissioner was the arrival in Honolulu of
two persons on the 7th of April, one a New York
correspondent and the other an ex-U. S. Consul to
Samoa. It was given out that they were special
officers of the United States and were fully informed as to the intent of the President to annex
the islands. They were said to have stated that the
ex-Queen and the President of the Provisional
Government had agreed upon terms of settlement
for a monetary consideration to the ex-Queen, who
was to abdicate, and that her attorney was going
to Washington to close the deal. This was in
accord with the known instructions to hei attorney
when he went to Washington before, and credence
was therefore given to the rumor. This was




254


Discourtesy to Slevens.


decidedly distasteful to the Commissioner, as it was
directly opposed to his too apparent efforts to
secure evidence in support of the royalists and
against the annexation of the islands and he warned
the Queen against having anything to do with
them or with such a settlement. The American
Minister was accused of trying to support these two
supposed agents. The Commissioner intimated
that he was trying to mould native opinion in favor
of annexation of the islands to the United States,
which accusation brought about pronounced friction between the two. Mr. Blount's treatment
of Mr. Stevens was discourteous in the extreme.
Although the latter was instructed to assist the
Commissioner in his investigation, and possessed
the fullest knowledge of every detail, he was ignored
by the Commissioner, and virtually told to remain
silent in all matters connected with the Commissioner's investigation. The Minister was from
that time on such in name only. Shortly after, he
was recalled and Mr. Blount appointed in his
stead.
The active measures taken by a club, favorable
to annexation, to increase their rolls, and their
suggestions that the ex-Queen should be deported
in the interest of peace, together with a few editorials to that effect in a paper controlled by the club,
brought forth a letter of complaint from the Commissioner to the President of the Provisional Government, although the paper was controlled by a
private corporation and not under governmental




Blount-Nordho f-Sjreckels.


255


control. The native clubs and patriotic leagues
were differently treated; their memorials, reflecting
upon the existing government and condemnatory of
American officials, were not only received and
encouragement given, but the Commissioner, ignoring not only the amenities of civilized international
intercourse, but the first principle of international
law, caused to be published in the royalist paper a
proclamation, over his own official signature, entitled
"An address to the Hawaiian people," ignoring
the government to which he was accredited, setting
forth what his instructions were, what he proposed
to do, and wound up by stating that in the event of
any conflict, he would protect those Americans
who took no part therein. As practically all the
white men in the country had taken an active part
in the recent troubles, in common defense of their
elementary rights, this proclamation was looked
upon as a direct threat that the Americans of Honolulu were to be abandoned to their fate, so far as Mr.
Blount could accomplish it. It was interpreted by
the natives as a censure for the landing of the
Boston's troops and a hint for them to rise and by
force restore the Queen, and an assurance that
all domiciled Americans would have to keep off.
In the meantime two persons arrived in Honolulu who undoubtedly influenced greatly the results of the investigation. These two gentlemen
were Charles Nordhoff, a newspaper correspondent, and Claus Spreckles, the sugar king. Nordhoff, while on the steamer on his way to Honolulu,




256


VNordho f's Libels.


and before he had any opportunity to investigate
the situation, wrote an article for his paper denouncing the action of the Provisional Government
and reflecting upon the troops from the Boston,
giving the keynote of the course he intended to
pursue. This article was so full of misstatements
and of such a libelous nature that when it was
republished in the local papers he was threatened
with prosecution before the courts of law. The
Commissioner immediately came to his rescue, and
notified the officials of the Provisional Government
that Mr. Nordhoff should not be molested, nor
should he be deported, and the two became almost
inseparable companions.  This encouraged the
wily correspondent, and he continued to send out
false and inflammatory articles to the press of the
United States, which were republished in the papers
of Honolulu hostile to the existing government.
The tenor of these dispatches followed closely the
outlines of the leading questions and the desired
answers thereto that leaked out through those examined by the Commissioner, leaving no doubt in
the minds of the people that Nordhoff possessed
the confidence of the Commissioner, and that his
press dispatches outlined the tone of the final report of that official in censuring the American
Minister and the officers of the Boston, and in
favor of the restoration of the Queen. This impression became so fixed in the minds of the royalists that one day the leader of the ex-Queen's'Cabinet told me that he had learned from a reliable
source that such would be the report, and offered




Spreckels-Nordhoff-Blount.


257


to bet a large sum of money the Queen would be
restored. That Nordhoff had intimate connection
with Blount is demonstrated by the fact that considerable portions of his letters, published months
before Blount's report was made public, are verbatim copies of evidence appearing in Blount's report. Who paid Nordhoff for his services is a
question which I cannot undertake to answer.
Mr. Spreckles claimed that he did, as appears
hereinafter. Whether he did or not is a question
for those gentlemen to settle. Claus Spreckles,
upon his arrival in Honolulu, called a meeting of
the sugar stockholders on the islands, and at the
meeting attempted to obtain the support of the
planters to oppose annexation and continue the
government as an oligarchy, so that cheap Chinese
labor could be continued, which could not be done
if annexation took place. The planters almost
unanimously rejected his proposition. This defeat
not only irritated him, but broke his prestige with
the sugar-growers who were in favor of securing
stable government, which they believed could be
obtained only through annexation to the United
States.  Spreckles thereupon became an open
and violent opponent of the Provisional Government, denouncing it and " the missionaries" in
the most abusive language in the most public
manner, and became an enthusiastic supporter of
the ex-Queen, advocating her restoration and predicting the early downfall of the existing government. One morning a sign of a skull and crossbones was found pinned to his gate.  It was




258     S fireckels-NAnord/ho  Blount.


generally believed that he had it placed there himself. In any event, he immediately raised a hue
and cry, claimed that the Annexation Club were
trying to assassinate him, and called upon Mr.
Blount to protect his life. Mr. Blount had no
more jurisdiction over the matter than the King of
Dahomey, but the desired protection was promptly
promised. Referring to the matter one evening at
the residence of his neighbor, a well-known royalist leader, Spreckles boastingly remarked, in my
presence, that Blount would protect him, and that
he knew the Commissioner had no use for the set
who were running the government nor for the
" annexation missionaries."  His neighbor asked
on what he based that opinion, and what he
thought would be the character of the report of
the Commissioner? Spreckles' reply was to the
effect that he had Blount in the palm of his hand,
that he would do just what Nordhoff said, and
that he, Spreckles, was " paying Nordhoff to work
Blount."
The intimacy between the British Minister and
the Commissioner was also a matter of amazement
to the community. The Mfinister took up his residence in a cottage in the hotel 4grounds, just across
the street from the ex-Queen's residence. From
this cottage he became a frequent caller and adviser to the Qi:een, and was often the companion
to the Commiissioner, over whom he appeared to
have much influence.  He constantly sent out
word through his adherents that he knew the
Queen was to be restored by the Commissioner.




Return of Blount-Restoration.


259


After the Commissioner had completed his reports and forwarded them to Washington, he became very restless to return home. Finally, the
permission came, and Admiral Skerrett, commanding the United States naval forces in the
Pacific, was placed in charge of the legation, without any diplomatic authority. When the Commissioner left, the entire royalist faction followed him
to the steamer and loaded him down with flowers,
while the notorious Bush mounted a pile and in
fervid language thanked the Commissioner for his
services to the Hawaiian people and violently
abused the officials of the Provisional Government,
the former United States Minister, and officers of
the Boston. The royalists had been given direct
information of what his report would be, which
preliminary information was borne out when the
report was made public. They freely discussed
the Queen's restoration as a foregone conclusion.
The Queen herself firmly believed such would be
the case, and in consequence, the night following
the departure of the Commissioner, she gave a big
reception and luau to her especial favorites. On
the other hand, the officials of the Provisional Government were kept in the dark, being able to draw
inferences only from the one-sided partial method
of the examination, the Commissioner's friendly
intimacy with every royalist leader and opponent
of the Provisional Government, and his persistent
avoidance of examination of those who were in a
position to give him reliable information.




CHAPTER XVII.


EFFORTS TO RESTORE THE EX-QUEEN; AND ESTABLISHMENT OF THE HAWAIIAN REPUBLIC.
The uncertainty respecting the outcome of Mr.
Blount's report caused serious depression in business circles on the islands. Both public and private enterprises were hampered, for capital is wary
in the face of possible political overturn. The
royalists, believing firmly that the Commissioner had
recommended restoration of the Queen and that the
United States would act favorably upon the recommendation, renewed their secret intrigues, and, assisted as they were by the English Minister, they
became a constant menace to the peace of the community. There were constant rumors of an uprising, and reports of filibuster expeditions from the
coast to assist the royalists, keeping the community
in a condition of excitement and disquietude. In
addition to the interference with business, created
by this condition of affairs, it necessitated the government keeping up a comparatively large force of
artned men to prevent sudden uprising, at an expense which the depleted treasury inherited from
the monarchy could ill afford.
The Hawaiian Minister in Washington made
every effort to find out the intentions of the government in regard to Hawaii, but without avail.
This failure was still further depressing to the
cause of the Provisional Government.
260




Arrival of Willis.


26i


The report of the Commissioner was received at
Washington in July, but no action was taken
until in October, I893, when Mr. Willis was sent
to Honolulu as Minister of the United States and
publicly accredited to the Provisional Government
but actually and covertly for the purpose of destroying that government and restoring the exQueen before Congress should meet. Mr. Willis
had received both oral and written instructions to
do this. Upon his arrival in Honolulu he was received by the Provisional Government with great
cordiality, and an interchange of the usual courtesies
was had between them. Little did the Hawaiian
officials think that under the guise of this amicable
representation Mr. Willis had secret instructions
to take the earliest opportunity to inform the exQueen that the treaty withdrawn from the Senate
would not be returned, and that if she would
promise amnesty to all persons who had been engaged in overturning the monarchy, she would be
restored to the throne by the United States. Suspecting nothing of this kind, the officials of the
Provisional Government were greatly encouraged
by the friendly attitude of the United States as
manifested by accrediting a Minister to the new
government after full investigation by a manifestly
hostile Commissioner. Simultaneously with the
arrival of Mr. Willis, Admiral Skerrett was relieved and ordered to command the naval forces
in China, and Admiral Irwin took his place.
The American Minister lost no time in carrying




262      Restoration of Liliuokalani.


out his instructions relating to the ex-Queen.
Without a word to the government to which he
was accredited, he sent for Liliuokalani, and early
in the forenoon of November I3th she called, accompanied by her former Chamberlain. She was
informed that through the unauthorized intervention of United States officials and the troops from
the Boston she had been obliged to surrender her
sovereignty, and that if she would bind herself to
grant amnesty to all persons who had been engaged
against her authority, it was the intention of the
United States to restore her to the throne. To this
proposition the ex-Queen would not assent, replying that she would cause those people who had
been instrumental in her overthrow to be beheaded
and their property confiscated to the government.
This startling statement amazed the Minister, and
put a stop to further negotiations for the time being.
The Minister faithfully reported the facts to Washington, and notified the ex-Queen that he had no
further communication to make until he heard fi-om
his government, which would be in three or four
weeks.
Every precaution was taken to keep this interview and the ex-Queen's declaration a secret from
the Provisional Government. The Minister frankly
informed the American Secretary of State that, from
actual information received in a conversation with
the ex-Queen's best friends, it was plainly evident
that in the event of restoration there would be a
concerted movement to overthrow the constitution




Restoration of Liliuokalani.


263


and limited government, and establish the absolute
dominion of the Queen, as was attempted in the couib
d''tat which caused her downfall. Notwithstanding the great secrecy maintained in regard to this
interview, the officials of the Provisional Government got some inkling of it, for that very evening
the tension of feeling became so great as to threaten
disastrous consequences, and the town was filled
with rumors of an outbreak. The greatest excitement prevailed at the executive building, in consequence of which the military forces were increased
and the volunteer companies were ordered on duty
at night. This condition of affairs continued for
nearly two months; business was practically suspended; the people subjected to a severe strain of
excitement, and the military was again increased
to meet apprehended contingencies.
On November 24th and December. 2d, respectively, a British and a Japanese man-of-war arrived
in the harbor, and, on the same day that the English
vessel came in, a letter of the Secretary of State recommending the restoration of the monarchy was
published in the Honolulu papers. Although this
was simply a newspaper publication, it was given
credence and created a great sensation. Crowds
gathered and the excitement became intense. A
public meeting was called for the following night
of all friends of the Provisional Government, at
which over,200 men were present, and at which
the Vice-President prsiided, and vigorous protests
voiced in several speeches by leading men of the




264          Demnand on Willis.
community. The Provisional Government withdrew its permission, formerly given to Admiral
Irwin, to land troops for drill, and a protest against
the use of force by the United States against
their persons or property was presented to the Minister by a large number of American residents. Not
until the Hawaiian Minister in Washington notified
his government that the publication of Secretary
Gresham's letter in the American press was official,
and that it was not only unfriendly towards the
Provisional Government, but actually recommended
hostile action, did the Hawaiian officials become
satisfied that the intentions of the American Minister were other than favorable, as indicated by his
letter of credence to their government. This absolute proof of a contemplated overthrow of their existence as a sovereign power through the secret
agency of the Minister accredited to them forced
the Provisional Government to decide upon a course
of action, either to submit or fight. President Dole,
accompanied by his Attorney-General, called upon
the Minister and requested to know what the United
States intended to do, receiving the reply that he
was unable at that time to comply with their request. To obtain some authentic utterance in reference thereto, President Dole that afternoon addressed a formal letter of inquiry, dated November
29, 1893, to the United States Minister, as to the
authenticity of the published letter. The Minister
did not answer this communication until December
2d, and then he evaded the question by referring to




Preparation to Fzight.


265


it as a domestic transaction and intimating that
something of a serious nature would occur, but it
was not in his power to indicate what it would be
until he had received further instructions in answer
to letters recently forwarded by him to his governm ent.
No possible information could be obtained from
the Minister as to his course, but on the 29th of
November a local paper published the remarks of
the Minister made to one of the native leagues, in
which he stated the policy of the United States regarding the islands was already formulated, and as
an executive officer he would act when the proper
time came. This implied threat, and the inability
to obtain information whether the Minister intended
to use force, or not, in support of his policy, emboldened the royalists and made it necessary for
the Provisional Government to make further preparations for defence. After full deliberation and consultation with nearly all the leading men of the
city, the decision was reached, practically unanimously, to resist to the last the attempt to restore
the Queen, even though it involved a conflict with
the United States troops. The executive building
was fortified with bags of sand, both in front and
around the various balconies. The volunteer forces
were again increased and the citizens armed as if
in a state of war. Following upon this the American Minister became more active, sent for the exMarshal to the Queen, and on December 5th had
an interview with him in regard to the restoration,




266


The Restoration Program.


well knowing that person would have command of
the royal forces if such an event should occur. The
ex-Marshal submitted a paper containing a method
of procedure upon the restoration of the Queen
which had been approved by her attorney and by
all the members of her former Cabinet. This paper
had been drawn up months before and contained a
list of special advisers, all of whom were English
or natives who had distinguished themselves by their
ultra hostility to American interests. They were
almost, without exception, men of low character
and without responsibility or property interests. A
provision was made for the support of autocratic
authority by the Queen, and the trial of all those who
had taken part against the monarchy, by a special
court martial to be appointed for that purpose.
This extraordinary document shows the confidence
these people had in the information they had received prior to Mr. Blount's departure that the
Queen was to be restored, and it should have convinced the Minister that the Queen had made up
her mind to do what she originally proposed to
him —assassinate all enemies and confiscate their
property. Hle was informed that this program had.
been agreed upon after a consultation with the leading royalists, who would constitute that court, and
that she had decided upon the course she intended
to pursue long before his interview. Any one acquainted with her stubborn disposition well knows
that she would have carried it out to the letter.
Yet, on December i4th, the Revenue Cutter Cor



Restoration Instructions.


267


win arrived in Honolulu from San Francisco, bringing further instructions in answer to the Minister's
letter reporting the ex-Queen's refusal to accept
the amnesty proposition directing him to proceed
with the restoration program.  Minister Willis
thereupon renewed his efforts to restore the dusky,
bloodthirsty Queen.
The unexpected arrival of the Corwin created intense excitement, which was increased when it became known that immediately after the arrival of that
vessel the liberty of the men on the United States
man-of-war in the harbor had been stopped; that
the battalion was made ready to land at a moment's
notice, and that the wives of the naval officers in
Honolulu had been instructed by their husbands
to make preparations for an immediate removal,
indicative of possible hostilities.  The Minister
was instructed to carry out his original instructions,
was urged to prompt action, but to insist upon
amnesty and recognition of obligations of the
Provisional Government as essential conditions to
restoration. Accordingly lie made arrangements
for another interview with the ex-Queen, which
was held on Saturday, December i6th, in the
presence of Mr. J. 0. Carter, her immediate friend.
In this interview the ex-Queen was informed of
what had previously been said and reported to
Washington.   In a long interview, assisted by
Carter, the ex-Queen remained firm in her determination to kill or banish all those who took part
against her, and their children, and to confiscate




268


Warning by J. O. Carter.


their property.  Shortly after, the ex-Queen and
Carter left the legation, the latter becoming uneasy
as to the outcome, and in the hope of getting the
ex-Queen to change her mind, returned and
requested another interview for Monday, which
was granted. In the meantime the ex-Queen had
seen some of her adherents, who, together with
Carter, urged her to abandon her savage purpose.
As though to assist these supporters in their efforts
to induce her to give up this purpose, the Minister
followed them up by calling at her residence, and
further notified her that should she refuse assent to
the written conditions, he would cease interference
in her behalf. These extraordinary efforts at last
brought this bloodthirsty barbarian to terms, and
she drew up a letter promising to permit no
proscription or punishment of any one, and virtually
accepting the written obligations submitted by the
Minister. For fear she might change her mind,
J. 0. Carter immediately obtained an agreement
signed by herself to that effect, and delivered it to
the American Minister at the legation.
It will be seen that four days had elapsed since
the arrival of the Corwin before the ex-Queen could,
under all this pressure, be induced to accept the
terms proposed. Carter, who had full information
of what had been said and done, understanding
that force was to be used by the sailors and marines
of the U. S. S. Philadelphia, and well knowing
that the ex-Queen would be liable to violate any
agreement she had entered into as soon as restored,




American Attack Expected.


269


became apprehensive for the safety of his nephew,
one of the officials of the Provisional Government,
and after informing him of the purpose to restore
the ex-Queen, advised him to join the royalist forces.
The nephew, instead, informed President Dole of
what had been told him. The frequent and secret
interviews of the Minister with the ex-Queen and
her partisans, together with the preparation on
board the Philadelphia, produced an almost universal belief in the city that the naval forces of
the United States would land to restore the Queen.
In anticipation of such a move the wharves were
for days lined with crowds of people, waiting to
see the troops land. At no time did the American
Minister attempt to deny this rumor, notwithstanding the German Consul called and begged him to
speak, and relieve the public from the state of
extreme tension they were in, which was becoming
unbearable. The British and Japanese Ministers
shared likewise in a failure to obtain an answer,
and they became alarmed. They requested permission from the government to land a force from
their men-of-war in the harbor to protect their
respective legations, and it was granted.  The
Japanese Minister, realizing the status of those
Americans supporting the Provisional Government,
through the published notice that only those not engaged in conflict would be protected by the American Minister, and knowing that the entire American
population were supporting that government, sent
word to a number of Americans offering them the




Rho   Jap5anese Protection to Americans.


use of the Japanese Legation as a refuge for their
families in case of attack by the American troops
upon the government. Was there ever a more
humiliating situation since the Declaration of
Independence, that, in the interests of humanity, a
Japanese official, in a foreign country, should feel
called upon to offer asylum to American women
and children, to protect them from American
troops, who were being used to force back into
power a bloodthirsty and dissolute Queen, against
the armed protest of an intelligent people, largely
of American birth, who had been forced into
revolution against her by her attempt to overthrow
the constitution and establish an absolute monarchy?
The President of the Provisional Government
that same day addressed a letter to the American
Minister calling his attention to the fact that he
was informed of what was going on, and that he,
the Minister, was acting in a way hostile to the
Hawaiian government, to which he was accredited,
and asking for immediate confirmation or denial.
In answer to this the Minister on the following day
called upon the President of the Provisional Government by appointment, and in the presence of
his ministers notified him of the Queen's acceptance
of the proposals submitted, and demanded "in
the name and by the authority of the President of
the United States" that President Dole forthwith
relinquish to her the sovereign power. He concluded by asking if President Dole was willing to
abide by this decision of the President of the United




Dole's Refusal to Surrender.


271I


States. Nothing was said in regard to whether the
decision would be enforced in case of rejection.
The Corwin was placed under sailing orders to
leave for San Francisco to carry the answer of
President Dole to Washington. To prevent the
news getting out in the press, the captain was instructed to enter the harbor of San Francisco at
night. No mails were permitted to be sent on the
vessel, not even the official mail of President Dole
to the Hawaiian Minister in Washington, although
he requested permission from Mr. Willis to forward
such mail. On December 23d, after a conference
at a special session of the Advisory Council, President Dole wrote a lengthy document in answer to
the United States Minister's demands, giving a full
r6sunme of the situation and the events leading up
to the establishment of the Republic. He claimed
to have been no party to the Blount investigation;
never to have seen the Blount report upon which
the action of the American official was based, and,
as no court of arbitration existed, he denied the
right of the United States to interfere in the affairs
of the sovereign state of Hawaii. He therefore declined to entertain the proposition to surrender the
authority of the government to the ex-Queen.
The Corwin sailed on the following day, December 24th, and on the 26th the Minister acknowledged the receipt of Dole's reply, and notified the
ex-Queen of the result.
If the excitement of the last few days had been
great, it now bordered upon terrorism. Threats to




272


2The End of Restoration.


assassinate the Provisional officials were made;
royalist conspiracies were formed, and the passions
of all parties were aroused, which made it probable
that a disturbance might occur at any time. To relieve the tension and restore confidence, President
Dole again addressed the United States Minister a
letter on December 27th, calling his attention to the
apprehension existing, and urgently requesting that
some assurance be given as to whether or not he
intended to use force in regard to his policy, but
Mr. Willis still withheld all information. At last,
President Cleveland's special message to Congress,
transmitting copies of Blount's report, and submitting the Hawaiian problem for Congressional solution, as published in the American papers, was
received, giving the desired information for the first
time. A rather spicy and unpleasant correspondence between President Dole and the United States
Minister followed, closing the attempt, by direct act
of the American executive, to restore the ex-Queen.
In the meantime the Senate of the United States,
by a formal resolution, directed its Committee on
Foreign Affairs to investigate the Hawaiian situation. The Committee, under a Democratic chairman, made an exhaustive and careful investigation,
examinations being under oath, and the witnesses
subjected to rigid cross-examination, in place of
Mr. Blount's method of affidavits and simple interrogation of an ex Jarte nature. Leading men
of all parties, and others having no interest in the
matter, were placed on the witness stand, and the




Exoneration by the Senate.


273


result was a lengthy report unqualifiedly exonerating
the officers of the Boston and Minister Stevens, and
reflecting upon the methods of Mr. Blount.
January I7, s894, the first anniversary of the
Provisional Government, was celebrated with great
enthusiasm, in public receptions, a military parade,
and a mass-meeting at night. The American Minister declined an invitation to be present, and the
other foreign representatives in Honolulu followed
his example by failing to participate in the observance
of the day. No salutes were fired firom any of the
men-of-war in the harbor, a tacit recognition of the
monarchical government and an apparent discourtesy
to the Provisional Government for refusing to step
down and out. The English Minister made good
use of the situation by actively influencing opinion
inimical to the interests of the United States and in
support of the ex-Queen and her party. The
officials of the Provisional Government now fully
realized that their case was in the hands of Congress, the proceedings of which were reported by
their Minister at Washington, who, after filing a
protest with the Secretary of State against the
unwarranted demands of the United States, returned
to Honolulu to post his superiors on the situation
in the United States. In consequence the hope of
early annexation was abandoned by the Provisional
Government, and steps were immediately taken to
establish a republican form of government. The
office of Minister of Foreign Affairs was separated
firom the person of the President, and the Executive




274       The Republic Established.


Council was increased to five members. A constitutional convention was called to assemble
May 30, I894, for a revision of the constitution
by which the Provisional Government was to
transfer its authority to the Republic of Hawaii.
The convention finished its labors on the afternoon
of July 3d, and on the same day the Advisory Council
passed the act to provide for the proclamation of
the Republic. On the following day the general
public were invited to participate in the ceremony.
At 8 A. M. July 4th, I894, President Dole, accompanied by his Cabinet and staff and other officials,
delivered the proclamation ushering into existence
another republic, and that, too, on the anniversary
of American Independence. Official notification
was sent to all foreign powers of the changed form
of government, and it was promptly recognized by
them. The constitution adopted by the convention
went immediately into force as the supreme law of
the Republic, and Sanford B. Dole by virtue thereof assumed the office of President. The new constitution was fashioned after the general form of
that of the United States and of the individual
States. An educational qualification was required of
voters for both houses, and a property qualification
for electors of Senators, by which the ignorant and
irresponsible of all nationalities are eliminated from
control of the political life ofthe community. The
legislature was divided into two branches, consisting of fifteen members each, a Senate and a House
of Representatives. A Council of State was also




English Hostility to Republic.


275


provided for, consisting of fifteen members, five of
whom are appointed by the President and five
elected by each branch of the legislature, and these
together with the President and Executive Council
act in times of emergencies when the legislature
is not in session. Provision was made for the
bestowal of special letters of denization on those
who assisted in establishing the Provisional Government, entitling them to all privileges of Hawaiian
citizenship without having to renounce allegiance
to their own government. The President is elected
for a term of six years by a joint vote of the two
houses, and cannot be elected to a second consecutive term. The Senators are elected for six years
and the Representatives for two. A small property
qualification is required for a Representative and a
larger one for Senators. The authority of each
house is similar to that of other legislative bodies.
There is a special provision by which the President
is empowered, with the approval of his Cabinet,
to make a treaty of political union with the United
States.
In opposition to this excellent form of government the royalists were warmly supported by the
British residents and officials to continue their
intrigues under the stimulus of a supposed American
unfriendliness. The English Minister and his wife
were not only notorious sympathizers with the exQueen, but were in constant communication with
her, and the officers of the British man-of-war in
the harbor took part in secret meetings of the lead



276


Admiral Walker's Re'ports.


ing royalists to consider what action should be
taken to reinstate the monarchy. This British
sympathy and support constituted not only a serious
element of peril, but stimulated the naturally peacefully inclined natives and half-whites to look forward to, and work for, the return of the monarchy,
and they largely failed to qualify as voters for the
first election called by the Republic for the election
of Senators and Representatives. About 5,000
voters qualified, and all the members of both houses
were elected on a platform in favor of annexation
of the islands to the United States, both houses subsequently passing resolutions unanimously approving such proposition. This is worthy of note, as the
majority of the lower house, including the Speaker,
were full-blooded native Hawaiians.
Secret plotting and serious disaffection were reported, and some arrests were made, but this did not
put a stop to the continued intrigues. In the meantime, Rear-Admiral J. G. Walker, whose professional abilities, tact, and judgment are unexcelled by
those of any other officer in the United States Navy,
by orders of the Navy Department, was placed in
command of the naval forces in the Pacific.  He
relieved Rear-Admiral Irwin on April I4, I894,
and at once proceeded to obtain all the information
possible on the political situation, and in several
communications to the Department made exhaustive
reports. The accurate and reliable information
transmitted to the Department by the Admiral was
not of an ex Jarte nature, but based upon knowl



England and Necker Island.


277


edge obtained in conversations with men of all
parties, and clearly defined the condition of affairs. Hie plainly demonstrated how the English
were interfering in the political affairs of the islands;
reported their efforts to seize Necker Island for
a cable landing, and pointed out the necessity of
strengthening the United States naval forces in
I-awaii, urging that another vessel be sent to Honolulu, which recommendation was not complied with.
The establishment of a permanent form of government and a settled policy was discouraging to the
royalists; nevertheless their leaders held a series of
conferences, and as a result sent a committee of
three, headed by one of the ex-Queen's Cabinet, to
the Coast to purchase arms and munitions of war,
and make other arrangements to assist in a secret
uprising.  The committee visited Washington,
called upon the Secretary of State, and made an
effort to obtain the support of the United States in
case of such a move. They were informed that the
United States would not interfere in the domestic
affairs of Hawaii. They informed Secretary Gresham that if the American men-of-war were recalled
from -Iawaii, they would have no difficulty in overthrowing the Republic and re-establishing the
monarch. There is no record of his reply. The
committee reported back that the United States
ships were going to be withdrawn. They returned
to California, purchased arms and munitions, and
caused them to be shipped to the islands. Admiral
Walker was, by telegram of July 9th, instructed to




278    Walker's Enforced Withdrawal.


proceed with the Philadelphia to Mare Island, California, but as soon as it was known that the Philadelphia was to leave, the British Minister ordered
the Champion, a British war ship, to remain in port.
The Admiral had full confidence in the Republic's
ability to preserve order, but he well knew that in
the event of an uprising of the royalists, with only
an English man-of-war in the harbor, the forces
from that vessel would, in all probability, land to
assist them in the restoration of the Queen, and he
very wisely postponed the departure of the Philadelphia. The English and royalists were greatly
elated at the intended departure of the Philadelphia,
leaving the Champion in port, while the supporters
of the government regarded the situation with anxiety. A petition was sent to the Admiral, signed
by prominent merchants and business men, representing large American moneyed interests, requesting him to remain. The Acdnmiral not leaving, he
was again ordered by telegram, via San Francisco,
to leave at once with the Philadelphia, and this
time, having no discretion in the matter, he obeyed
his instructions and sailed on the I2th of August,
leaving the islands virtually under British protection.
This withdrawal of the Philadelphia left Honolulu, for the first time in twenty years, without
United States naval supervision. The royalists believed and announced that it was done to afford
them an opportunity to revolt against the Republic.
The timidity of the royalist leaders, however,




insurrection of iS95,9


z?9


caused the contemplated move to be put off until
January 6, 1895, when a lot of natives and low whites,
instigated by agitators of foreign birth, and acting
with the full knowledge and consent of Liliuokalani,
met at a secluded spot about four miles from the
city for the purpose of commencing hostilities.
Arms and ammunition, having been previously purchased in San Francisco by the royalists, were landed
from a small coasting vessel, and placed in the
hands of these men, from the house of one of the
conspirators, at the foot of Diamond Head. Preparations were made for a night attack on the city,
which, had it been successful, would have resulted
in the killing of many innocent men, women, and
children, the looting of buildings and the destruction of much property. The armed forces were
led by the mutinous Wilcox and others of unsavory
record, while the instigators remained in the city
to assist when the attack was made if the appearances were favorable to success. The telephone
wires were cut and a number of foreigners out for a
stroll were taken prisoners by the rebels, as a precautionary measure.  The news of a suspicious
gathering at the place of rendezvous reached the
authorities, and the deputy marshal, with a few
police, was sent with warrants to arrest the conspirators. Upon their arrival at the place they were
fired upon, resulting in the killing of young C. L.
Carter, who had been one of the annexation commissioners who went to Washington in IS93, and
the wounding of two police, The regular troops




?,go


Insurrection of 1895.


and volunteer forces were immediately called out,
and for several days there was desultory fighting,
resulting in the complete overthrow of the revolution and the capture of the rebel forces.  The
leaders as soon as captured became anxious to reveal the inner history of the movement, and the
names of the parties connectedwith them. Asearch
was made of the ex-Queen's residence, and a lot of
bombs, rifles, and ammunition found there. She
was arrested, together with several prominent foreigners, mostly English and Canadians. The town
was placed under martial law, and a military commission appointed to try those implicated. Nowlein, one of the leaders, turned state's evidence.
Those found guilty were either deported or sentenced to imprisonment for a stated period and
fined. Some were fined only, and four were sentenced to be shot, all of whom in the course of time
were pardoned. The ex-Queen, hoping to avoid
trial and consequent punishment, voluntarily executed a document renouncing and abdicating all
pretensions or claims whatsoever to the throne of
Hawaii, and took the oath of allegiance to the Republic; but she was tried, nevertheless, for "misprision of treason " and sentenced to imprisonment
and to pay a fine, but was afterwards released and
placed on indefinite parole.
Following upon this revolution frequent reports
of filibuster expeditions from Puget Sound and
British Columbia came to disturb the peace and
quiet.




American flostilily to Rej5ublic

To make matters worse, there was sprung upon the
government an unexpected claim of a serious nature.
It was a demand from the American Minister,
by order of Secretary Gresham, claiming a large
indemnity for the imprisonment of an American
subject who had been found guilty of engaging in
the late revolution and sentenced to a short term of
imprisonment. This man's affidavit was taken by
the American Consul and the Minister without any
inquiry being made of the government officials.
Upon that affidavit alone the demand was made,
and that, too, after an official publication stating that
no American engaged in a conflict would be protected. Hence when the demand came it was regarded as another act of hostility by the Washington
government and caused grave apprehension, as the
British government at the same time presented several claims of a similar character. It was feared
that the United States was going to combine with
England in crushing exactions and ruinous demands for the treatment of those who had been in
active revolution against the Republic.
The Hawaiian Minister in Washington, who, by
his exertions against restoration of the Queen, had
lost favor with the Secretary of State, was, in the
early part of April, recalled by his government
upon request of Secretary Gresham, but the position was filled later on and did not interfere with
the formal diplomatic relations between the two
countries.
Major Wodehouse, the English Minister, continued his hostility to the Republic so openly that




28 7,


Brilish  illinister Recalled.


the government finally, in self-defense, demanded
to know his intentions and meaning. He became
so offensive that his government finally recalled
him. Upon his retirement from office he declined
to notify the President of the change, and failed to
exercise the invariable courtesy of a formal farewell
to that official, but, instead, upon his departure, he
requested permission for himself and wife to bid
adieu to the ex-Quecn, who was then in prison.
This request was denied.  Both Major Wodehouse and his wife had stimulated to the utmost the
ex-Queen's hopes of restoration, and prior to and
during the revolution of i895 they gave active encouragement to the royalists. This official had
been at Honolulu nearly thirty years, in a constant
struggle to promote English influence at the expense of American interests, and his policy was to
maintain the monarchy as a means of maintaining
English influence.
The successful establishment of the Republic
upon the eve of his retirement made him bitter and
hostile, and though holding the position of British
Minister and transacting diplomatic business with
the de facto government, he continued to be a pronounced royalist. He was succeeded by an official
who was not involved in local politics, but who
possessed the English proclivity for British supremacy, and was, consequently, a sympathizer with the
royalists. But the change was welcomed by the
republican officials.
The first legislature of the Republic met on
June i2, 1895, and adjourned August 15th,




Land Laws- Cholera.


283


after passing an elaborate act providing for dividing the government and crown lands into homesteads, which are now being rapidly taken up by
actual settlers on very favorable terms. As though
the political turmoil on the islands had not caused
sufficient suffering, the overtaxed patience of the
people was further burdened by an infliction of the
cholera. A passenger steamer from China brought
the disease to the islands in August, i895, and
though a strict quarantine, thorough sanitary treatment, medical and police inspection were maintained, the disease was not stamped out before the
end of September, resulting in the death of 85 persons, mostly natives.
The government of the new Republic was at
last firmly established, with ample strength to
maintain itself against any and all phases of hostile
domestic sentiment; an organic law had been put
in force and faithfully and judiciously administered,
distinctly closing the chapter in Hawaiian political
history which relates to the transition from a monarchy to a republic. The entire community accepted the situation and settled down to comparative peace and contentment.  The regular legislature was chosen and passed many acts of a beneficial nature, with every indication of a most
favorable outlook for political stability and commercial prosperity.




CHAPTER XVIII.


THE STRATEGIC VALUE OF HAWAII.
It is interesting to note that upon the strength of
Balboa's discovery of the Pacific Ocean, in I5I3,
Spain continued, until not much over a hundred
years ago, to claim that entire ocean and all the
countries bordering thereon as her property. When
Sir Francis Drake circumnavigated the globe, the
claim was advanced that the Pacific was a mare
clausum, and his sailing across that sea was resented as a trespass upon Spanish property. As
late as I789 Spanish war vessels seized several
English fur-trading vessels on the northwest coast,
and the Commandant at San Francisco was ordered
to seize the Columbia, the first vessel that carried
the American flag around the world, for having
invaded those waters. Spain's greatness was already
on the wane, however, and she was unable to maintain her preposterous claims.
Early in the present century the nations of the
world began to realize, in a faint way, that the Pacific and its adjacent shores were eventually to become valuable, and in ever accelerating degree
began an international scramble for dominion
therein until, with the exception of the territory
284




Japanese Power.


285


owned by the United States or protected by the
Monroe doctrine, China, Japan, and Hawaii, every
island in the Pacific, and the shores bordering
thereon, have become the property of some European country. Japan is one of the wonders of
the modern world. It is the one country not of the
Aryan race which has evinced ability to withstand
the aggressions of that race. It has taken its position as one of the forces, not only of the Pacific,
but of the world, which must be calculated upon
by international statesmen, not only in a negative
way, but as one of the active and aggressive forces,
not only of the future but of the present. Japan
already has a navy nearly as strong as that of the
United States, and has more naval vessels in course
of construction than any other country, except
Great Britain. Moreover, her people are of an
active, mercurial, and belligerent disposition, with
unbounded faith in their own prowess and ability.
In possession of the magnificent navy which they
are building, they are liable to be in the position of
a boy with a new toy, with which he wishes to
experiment. While the traditional relations of
Japan and the United States are friendly, the rapid
prospective commercial development of both countries is liable to bring them into conflict of interest.
A conflict of commercial interest is growing more
and more to ie the basis of international hostility.
No American statesman can in the future leave
Japan out of sight as one of the dominating powers
in the Pacific.




286      Valuze of Hawaii to England.


Although the great powers began to absorb Pacific territory in the early part of the century, it
was not until some ten or twelve years ago that the
available territory began to become exhausted. At
that time a final division of the Pacific into " spheres
of influenced" was made among Germany, France,
England, and Spain, which partitioned and divided
off among these four powers all the territory not
theretofore absorbed, except Samoa, which the sudden and unexpected intervention of the United
States finally left in the anomalous control of united
England, Germany, and the United States; and
Hawaii, which has remained in a semi-independent position simply because the United States has
for forty years reiterated at frequent intervals that
it would consider interference in that group as an
attack upon the United States. It is idle to claim
that other countries have not desired, and do not
desire, the control of Hawaii. At various times
Russia, England, and France have each seized the
country, and Japan has had serious intentions looking in that direction. To England, especially, the
control of Hawaii would be of inestimable value. It
has become fashionable of late to rhapsodize over the
unity of the English-speaking race and their community of interest; and now that England is facing
a hostile Europe it is manifestly wise policy on
her part to cultivate every possible appearance of
friendly feeling toward the United States. American statesmen, however, cannot and do not lose
sight of the fact that sentiment has little effect upon




I 36                      1404?              ISO,       160,     I    0-  ___20O1      1oo' Long go, from  6ooGreenwich4O1
4jI~~~~~~~~C TTA                                                                                            0~~~~~~~~~EA 
80   A                                -          /~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~0 L  
AR&4, 7000 SQ.M1LE6~~~~~~  tIN                    TH~~/SPACisI
-%C~~~~~~~'CALC J~~RICALPOF
REVEN~t$-/8S$ #/,7500.tot
sXo~8S196     /9400
NtT OffBT-1897, p3,889,000.  _______      HAWA1IIAM     I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~LANDS1  FALKLAND IS.~~~~~~~~~~bc
157  177 ~~PI I341- jr-     0                 10 3-4R23Ln? rRS7ahn         n




i
i
t
I




,England America's Rival.


287


international relations when material interests are
involved. It is to England's material interest today to cultivate friendship with the United States.
The fact cannot be lost sight of, however, that the
United States, more than any other country, is the
rival of Great Britain in almost every great material interest. Producing, as the United States
does, all the necessary raw materials, this country,
in an ever-accelerating degree, is destructively competing with Great Britain in the markets of the
world. To a still greater degree is this competition on the part of the United States going to be
injurious to the other European countries. While
present conditions have produced a temporary
estrangement between Europe and Great Britain,
driving the latter to a seeming friendship toward
the United States, it is a moral certainty that the
near future will draw Great Britain and the countries of Europe, by mutuality of interest. into an
antagonism to the United States. The map of
the Western Hemisphere demonstrates that Great
Britain recognizes that America is her greatest
rival, and that she is preparing to treat her as her
greatest foe. Beginning with Halifax and including Bermuda and the Bahamas, Jamaica and St.
Lucia on the east and south, and ending with
Esquimalt and British Columbia on the west, she
has established a series of impregnable fortresses,
each equipped with dry-docks and fortifications
second in strength and capacity to none in the
world, and connected them all with expensive cable




288     Value of Hawaii to England.


systems for which there is no commercial call. All
this has been done with no logical purpose except
to prepare for eventual hostilities with the United
States. The one link omitted in this chain of hostile forts surrounding the United States is Hawaii.
Not only is Hawaii a missing link in an otherwise
continuous chain, but it directly divides England's
greatest Anglo-Saxon colonies, Canada and Australia, the distance between which is so great that
it is impossible for even merchant steamers to traverse it without recoaling at Hawaii, as there is no
other supply station available.
The importance of Hawaii as a strategical position is no more a matter of opinion than is a
geometrical axiom. It is a primal, incontrovertible fact. It is second in importance to no other
single point on the earth's surface. England seized,
and with bull-dog tenacity has held, Gibraltar for
its strategical value alone; but there is no country
the route to which lies past Gibraltar which cannot be reached by several other different ways. The
distinctive feature of Hawaii, wherein it is unique
among the strategical points of the world, is that
it lies at the center of an area so great that commercial and military operations across it are practically
impossible, except by using Hawaii as a coal and
supply station. Eliminate Hawaii from the map,
and there are scarcely any battle-ships in existence
which can operate across the Pacific, by reason of
the fact that they cannot carry coal enough, and
the problem of coaling at sea has not yet been
solved.




I-awaii's Strategical Position.


289


It has been repeatedly and officially pointed out
by the naval authorities, not only of the United
States but of the world, that the trans-Pacific countries and islands, with the exception of Hawaii, are
so far distant from the American continent that,
unless the ships of such nations can recoal at
Hawaii, it is practically impossible for them to get
to the Pacific Coast for the purpose of conducting
military operations there. The most efficient ships
could not get there at all, and those which do carry
sufficient coal to cross would have no coal with
which to operate, much less to return to their
base of operations. In other words, it is impossible to maintain naval or military operations at a
distance of from 3,500 to 5,500 miles from a base
of operations. This fact was definitely established
in the late war with Spain, as every United States
man-of-war and transport for troops, in their efforts
to reinforce Admiral Dewey's fleet in the Philippine Islands, had to stop at Honolulu for coal, repairs, and supplies.
As long ago as i85, Congress by formal resolution requested the Navy and War Departments to
report upon the conditions and requirements of the
coast defenses of the United States. By instructions of the Navy Department, Admiral Dupont
drew up a report in reply to this resolution, in
which he said, in connection with the defense of
the Pacific Coast:
"It is imlpossible to estimate too hzighly the
value and importance of the Sandwich Islands,




290      Expert Oi5znion on HZawaii.


whether in a commercial or military point of view.
Should circumstances ever place them in our
hands, they would prove the most important acquisition we could make in the whole Pacific
Ocean —an acquisition intimately connected with
our commercial and naval supremacy in those
seas."
This opinion has been fully approved by United
States naval officers from that day to this. That
United States control of Hawaii can be made both
effective and economical is demonstrated by a brief
examination of the facts.
Although the Hawaiian Islands are eight in
number and extend over a distance of about 400
miles, with the exceptions of Honolulu and Pearl
harbors the ports are all open roadsteads, in which
vessels are compelled to lie at distances of approximately half a mile from shore, obliged at all times
to land. and ship all freight in small boats, hampered by the restless swell of the ocean and exposed to constant interruptions by storms. The
port of Hilo could be partially protected by building a breakwater several miles long, at an expense
of an unestimated number of millions of dollars,
but even then it would not be protected from
northerly storms. With the exception, therefore,
of Honolulu and Pearl Harbor, all points in the
island may be eliminated from consideration as
possible naval stations.
Pearl Harbor and Honolulu harbor are both
located upon the south side of the Island of Oahu,




Defense of Pearl Harbor.


29r


and are only seven miles apart. Any effective
military control of the one must necessarily include
the control of the other, for they are so close together that heavy artillery located at either point
would be within easy range and have full control
of the other.
Fortifications for the defense of the two need be
of the most inexpensive kind. Both HIonolulu and
Pearl Harbor are protected by natural fortifications
which need nothing but the placing of guns in
position to become impregnable.  Three miles
east of Honolulu, projecting out into the deep
water, its summit only about a quarter of a mile
from the water's edge, rises Diamond Head, a hill
of solid rock, with an almost perpendicular face,
reaching an elevation of 750 feet.
In the very heart of Honolulu, within threequarters of a mile of deep water, lies a second hill
of solid rock, with almost perpendicular face, rising
to an elevation of 500 feet. Four miles west of
Honolulu, just half way to Pearl Harbor, lies a
third hill, of the same rocky perpendicular character, reaching an elevation of 400 feet. A battery
of modern guns can be mounted on each of these
three hills at so little expense as to practically
eliminate the amount as a factor for consideration
in an estimate of cost. To the rear of Honolulu
the only pass through the mountain is a narrow
cut, twenty feet wide, to approach which an invading army would have to climb an almost perpendicular bluff, nearly a thousand feet high, that
would preclude any attack from that direction.




292     DescrziTtion of Pearl Harbor.


Honolulu is an absolutely safe land-locked harbor, but is unsuitable for a naval station, for two
reasons: first, because it is so small that it will not
accommodate more than a hundred vessels at the
outside, and the rapidly growing commercial use
of the port will very soon tax its limit to the utmost. In the second place, the shores of the harbor
are distant only from a half to three-quarters of a
mile from deep water. The dry-docks, machine
shops, and magazines of a naval station should be
located at such a distance from deep water as to
practically put them beyond the reach of an ordinary
bombardment. While Honolulu can be so fortified
as to absolutely prevent an effective landing being
made, it lies so close to deep water that a heavy
battle-ship might easily, before being driven off, annihilate the effectiveness of the station by a few
well-directed shots.
Pearl Harbor is an arm of the sea, a lagoon, connected with the ocean by a long, narrow, river-like
entrance, some three miles in length; the inner end
expanding and dividing into three locks, having
together an interior frontage of some 30 miles, with
an average depth of from 30 to 60o feet. Its banks
are formed of coral and sandstone with a top layer of
soil. In many places the banks are so perpendicular
that a full-rigged ship could lie alongside without excavation or dock-building. The entire harbor is surrounded by abundant springs ofpure, fresh water, and
artesian wells reach fresh water at any point at a depth
of approximately 400 to 425 feet, which rises to an




Description of Pearl Harbor.


293


elevation of about 30 feet above sea-level. The shores
are well wooded with Algeroba forests, and the
country on the land side is a rich, fertile district
covered with rice, banana, and sugar plantations,
capable of furnishing an unlimited amount of fresh
supplies for the use of the station. A barrier reef
extends parallel with, and distant about a mile from,
the shore, and the water beyond does not reach a
depth of over ioo feet for a distance of about
another mile, being well suited, therefore, for
marine mining. These, with the assistance of the
fortifications already spoken of and inexpensive
fortifications at the mouth of the harbor, would be
absolutely prohibitive of any successful attack on
the station from the sea. The Navy and War Departments have already executed most minute surveys of the harbor and its entrance, and caused
expert reports to be made thereon. As early as I872,
Generals Schofield and Alexander, of the United
States Army, reported unequivocally in favor of
the military value of this harbor to the United
States. The surveys of the Navy Department have
been made under the direction of Admirals Irwin,
Walker, and Miller. They disclose that there is a
sand-bar across the extreme outer entrance of the
harbor, consisting almost exclusively of soft disintegrated coral sand, which can be disposed of by a
suction dredge at an estimated expense of not more
than $I50,ooo. The rise and fall of the tide is less
than three feet, and there are no currents which
need be feared to re-form the bar. A bar similar




294      Status of Pearl Harbor.


in character, somewhat smaller in extent, was
pumped out from the entrance to Honolulu harbor
in i89i, a depth of over 30 feet being secured,
which has not since changed a particle. The expense of clearing the Honolulu harbor bar, exclusive of the cost of the dredge, was only about
$40,ooo. This dredge was the property of the
Hawaiian government, and is now available at any
time for use by the United States Government at
Pearl Harbor, if desired.
The United States had for a long time, by means
of treaty rights, the exclusive use of this harbor as
a coaling and naval station, but nothing was ever
done to avail itself of this privilege other than making the few surveys mentioned. It was fully realized that a mere sheet of water carried with it few
advantages, and to be effective for the purpose intended, to protect a fortified port of call, must
necessarily be able to control the territory for a
sufficient distance therefrom to prevent its occupation by a hostile power. As there was no grant of
territory by that treaty, the United States consequently had no claim to the jurisdiction over the
lands adjacent to Pearl Harbor, and the Hawaiian
government used this fact as a lever to either perpetuate the treaty of reciprocity or force the acceptance of the islands as a whole by the United States.
It argued, and that forcibly, that by the terms
of the treaty the claim of the United States to Pearl
Harbor was coterminous with the treaty itself, and
that if the treaty terminated, the American rights to




Hawaizz Annexed.


295


the harbor terminated also. Finally, when the war
commenced between the United States and Spain,
and Admiral Dewey made his celebrated attack
upon Manila, the importance of this harbor became
more than ever apparent, and the Hawaiians, on
the alert for such an opportunity, immediately declined to pass any act of neutrality. Consequently
the men-of-war and transports with soldiers on
their way to the Philippine Islands made Honolulu
a port of call, as was necessary.  They were
welcomed by the people of the city and given a
most hearty reception. American flags were displayed, American airs were played, and the inhabitants regarded the temporary occupation as a propitious omen. The result was that the United
States saw no alternative but to accept the islands
as a whole, and the Senate failing to take up the
treaty of annexation, Congress passed the Newlands
act, and the Hawaiian Islands at last became an
American possession. Now, with the control of
this stronghold of the Western world the United
States becomes the dominant power over the entire
North Pacific, both from a naval and a commercial
standpoint, and our Pacific Coast is afforded a
military protection, as well as command over the
trans-Pacific commerce, which could never have
been obtained as long as these islands were subject
to seizure by the commercial powers of Europe.
The American merchant marine is now greater in
the Pacific than in any other ocean, and will in
the near future increase with giant strides under




296     An Impregnable Stronghold.
the new regime. With a little addition to the
present force, occupation and a strengthening of
the fortifications of Pearl Harbor and Honolulu,
the United States can never be evicted from the islands except by an expenditure of blood and treasure
that will make the effort one of the greatest naval
and military feats of history.




CHAPTER XIX.


THE tIAWAIIAN ISLANDS BECOME AN AMERICAN
POSSESSION.
The withdrawal of the treaty of annexation of
Hawaii to the United States by President Cleveland,
and the subsequent efforts to restore Liliuokalani
to the throne, was a severe blow to the advocates
of American absorption. They were, however,
encouraged by the result of the investigation and
report upon the situation by the Committee on Foreign Affairs in the United States Senate, and they
patiently waited for the proper time to renew their
efforts. Finally, when a change in the administration took place, and President McKinley assumed
office as the Chief Executive of the United States,
the IIawaiian statesmen renewed their efforts to
carry out the provisions of the proclamation inaugurating the Republic of the islands, which explicitly state that such form of government would
exist " until terms of union with the United States
of America have been negotiated and agreed upon."
A new treaty of annexation was drawn up and,
through diplomatic agents in Washington, it was
submitted to President McKinley for his inspection
and comment. Meeting with his approval it was
in a short while ratified by the Hawaiian legislature.
In the meantime, President McKinley submitted
the treaty to the Senate of the United States for its
297




z98


8 7e Newlandcs Resolution,


action, but it met with such opposition in that body
that those having it in charge hesitated to report it
from the committee. Sporadic efforts of a few of
the advocates of the treaty were made to get it before the Senate, but each time it was met with such
pronounced opposition that Senator Davis, the
Chairman of the Committee on Foreign Affairs,
would not report it to the Senate. This strong and
unexpected attack on the part of the Senate aroused
the enthusiasm of the advocates of the treaty in the
House of Representatives. The result was that
after the introduction of a number of bills favorable
to annexation and some heated political discussion,
the Newlands resolution was adopted by both
houses of Congress, and approved by the President on July 7th, I898. The following is the full
text of the resolution that made Hawaii a portion
of the United States:
" Whereas the government of the Republic of
Hawaii having in due form signified its consent in
a manner provided by its constitution to cede absolutely and without reserve to the United States
of America all rights of sovereignty of whatsoever
kind in and over the Hawaiian Islands and their
dependencies, and also to cede and transfer to the
United States absolutely free the ownership of all
government or crown lands, public buildings, edifices, ports, harbors, military equipment, and all
other public property of every kind and description
belonging to the government of the Hawaiian Islands, together with every right and appurtenance
thereunto appertaining; therefore




The Newlands Resolution.


299


I"Resolved, By the Senate and the House of Representatives of the United States of America in
Congress assembled, That said cession is accepted,
ratified, and confirmed, and that the said Hawaiian
Islands and their dependencies be, and they are
hereby, annexed as part of the territory of the United
States, and are subject to the sovereign dominion
thereof, and that all and singular property and
rights thereinbefore mentioned are vested in the
United States of America.
"' Existing laws of the United States relative to
public lands shall not apply to such lands in the
Hawaiian Islands, but the Congress of the United
States shall enact special laws for their management and disposition, provided that all revenue
from or proceeds of the same, except as regards such
a part thereof as may be used or occupied by civil,
military, or naval purposes of the United States, or
may be assigned for use of the local government,
shall be solely for the benefit of the inhabitants of
the Hawaiian Islands for educational and other
public purposes.
'1 Until Congress shall provide for the government of such islands, all civil, judicial, and military
authority exercised by the officers of the existing
government of said islands shall be exercised in
such a manner as the President of the United States
shall direct, and the President shall have power to
remove said officers and fill the vacancies so occasioned. -
" Existing treaties of the Hawaiian Islands with




300


The Newlands Resolution.


foreign nations shall forthwith cease and determine,
being replaced by such treaties as may exist and
may be hereafter concluded between the United
States and such foreign nations. Municipal legislation of the Hawaiian Islands, not enacted for the
fulfillment of treaties so extinguished, and not inconsistent with this joint resolution, nor contrary to
the Constitution of the United States, nor to any
existing treaty of the United States, shall remain in
force until the Congress of the United States shall
otherwise determine.
" Until legislation shall be enacted extending the
United States customs laws and regulations to the
Hawaiian Islands, existing customs regulations of
the Hawaiian Islands with the United States and
other countries shall remain unchanged.
fci The public debt of the Republic of Hawaii lawfully existing at the date of the passage of this joint
resolution, including the amounts due to depositors
in the Hawaiian Postal Savings Bank, is hereby assumed by the Government of the United States,
but the liabilities of the United States in this regard
shall in no case exceed $4,000,000.
" So long, however, as the existing government
and the present commercial relations of the Hawaiian Islands are continued as hereinbefore provided, said government shall continue to pay the
interest on said debt.
"' There shall be no further immigration of Chinese into the Hawaiian Islands, except upon such
conditions as are now or may hereafter be allowed




Admiral Mizbller's Arrival.


30I


to enter the United States from the Hawaiian Islands.
" The President shall appoint five commissioners,
at least two of whom shall be residents of the Hawaiian Islands, who shall, as soon as reasonably
practicable, recommend to Congress such legislation concerning the Hawaiian Islands as they shall
deem necessary or proper.
4" Section 2. That the commissioners hereinbefore provided for shall be appointed by the President by and with the advice and consent of the
Senate.
"' Section 3. That the sum of $Ioo,ooo, or so
much thereof as may be necessary, is hereby appropriated out of any money in the Treasury not
otherwise appropriated, and to be immediately
available, to be expended at the discretion of the
President of the United States for the purpose of
carying this joint resolution into effect."
Admiral Miller, of the United States Navy, was
instructed to carry the message of acceptance to the
President of the Hawaiian Government. He arrived in Honolulu in his flag-ship, the Philadelphia,
and at noon of August i2 th, I898, the imposing
ceremony of transferring the Hawaiian Islands to
the United States took place. The ceremonies began by the appearance of the Hawaiian National
Guards, headed by a detachment of police, at the
boat landing, where they met the sailors and marines from the two United States men-of-war in the
harbor, the Philadelphia and the Mohican. From




302


The Formal AnnexalZon.


the landing the Hawaiian Guards escorted the
American troops to the gate of the Executive Building and there deployed to positions near the platform, with the Hawaiian band on one side and the
American band on the other. In the grounds and
all around the approaches were crowds of onlookers.
The platform for the exercises and the verandas
of the Executive Building were crowded with the
elite of Honolulu. Exactly at fifteen minutes to
noon President Dole and his Cabinet came from the
Executive Building to the platform. The Justices
of the Supreme Court followed, and after them
Admiral Miller, United States Minister Sewell,
Consul General Hayward, and the Commanding
Officers of the American men-of-war. The ceremonies opened with prayer, after which Minister
Sewell rose and presented a certified copy of the
joint resolution to President Dole, who, in the interest of the Hawaiian body politic, yielded up to
the representatives of the United States the sovereignty and public property of the Hawaiian Islands.
Minister Sewell accepted the same, when Admiral
Miller directed the transfer of flags. As the Hawaiian flag came down the band played HawaiiPonoi, and a salute of 21 guns was fired from the
National Guard battery on shore, which was answered by a similar number of guns from the Philadelphia. A few minutes later the United States flag
was hoisted, the American band played the Star
Spangled Banner, and a salute of 21 guns was fired
from the Philadelphia, answered by the National
Guard on shore.




The Proclamation.


303


One of the most gratifying spectacles of the occasion, especially to those Americans who witnessed
our flag being hauled down by Blount, was the
re-hoisting of the same flag on the same flag-pole,
over the same building, simultaneously with the
lowering of the Hawaiian flag on the Executive
Building. I was enabled to obtain this flag immediately after it was hauled down five years previously
and carefully preserved it, fully believing that sooner
or later there would be a call for it to go up again.
When I was ordered to Cuban waters last May, in
command of the U. S. S. Hist, to take part in the
war with Spain, I gave this flag to L. A. Thurston,
with the request that it be re-hoisted on the same
flag-staff from which it had been lowered. Mr.
Thurston communicated with President McKinley,
and he approved of the proposition, as did President
Dole; so the result was, the flag that Blount hauled
down rose proudly to its old position.
The flag-raising being over, a proclamation was
read by Mr. Sewell in which the civil, judicial, and
military officials of the Republic of Hawaii in office
prior to the transfer of sovereignty should continue to exercise authority until Congress should
provide for the government of Hawaii, and they
took the oath of allegiance to the United States.
All treaties entered into between the Hawaiian
Government and foreign powers, except those inconsistent with the provisions of the joint resolution,
or contrary to the Constitution of the United States,
or to any existing treaty of the United States, were




304


S4Sal'or Cul/la n's COni;s$son.


to remain in force until Congress should otherwise
determine.
The ceremonies concluded at night with a popular ball and public reception at which Admiral
Miller, President Dole and Mrs. Dole, Mr. and
Mrs. Sewell received the people. The grounds of
the Executive Building were the scene of the most
elaborate fire-works ever displayed in Honolulu.
The cession of the Hawaiian Islands to the Great
Republic of North America having been accomplished, the President of the United States, in compliance with the joint resolution of Congress, appointed a commission, headed by Senator Cullom,
to visit Honolulu, and upon careful investigation
devise a system of government for the islands.
They carried out their instructions, and after careful and mature deliberation reported favorably upon
placing Hawaii on the plane of an organized Territory of the United States, to enjoy the same degree
of self-government that is accorded to New Mexico,
Arizona, and Oklahoma. They based their opinion
upon the fact that the people of Hawaii had already
demonstrated their capability of self-government by
the establishment and maintenance of the Republic
of Hawaii, and that they were already more or less
familiar with the institutions and laws of the United
States, from which most of the Hawaiian laws were
drawn. President Dole made a minority report
recommending a Board of Advisers to the Governor
of the Territory in all matters of public policy, stating as his reason for so doing that he feared the




Laws Affecting Hawaii.


305


Governor would arrogate to himself greater power
than was contemplated. The commissioners also
recommended the construction of a cable to the
Hawaiian Islands, to be under the control of the
United States, as required by the military conditions
existing or liable to exist at any time.
In accordance with the recommendations of this
Board, three bills were sent to Congress by President McKinley, and were introduced in the Senate
by Senator Cullom, and in the House by Representative Hitt. By the provisions of these bills,
safeguards, such as educational and limited property
qualifications, are thrown around the suffrage so as to
insure the domination of Americans and persons of
American descent in the government of the islands.
All white persons, as well as Portuguese and persons of African descent, and all persons descended
from the Hawaiian race on either paternal or maternal side, who were citizens of Hawaii immediately preceding the annexation, were made citizens of the United States. It will be seen from this
that all Japanese and Chinese laborers on the islands are barred from citizenship, and the importation of coolie labor into Hawaii forever prevented.
The labor laws of the United States are extended
over the islands so as to prevent all kinds of foreign
contract labor from entering the Territory.
This closes the long chapter in Hawaiian history
through which American influence has wonderfully
developed the islands until now the government in
Hawaii is the same as the Government of the United




306        Outlook for the Islands.
States. There can no more be any overthrow of
this or that monarchy or little republic. It is at
last planted, as it were, upon a rock where capital
will soon recognize its solidity, and with the introduction of capital will come power to develop varied
industries. Agricultural resources will be improved,
manufactures will be established, and a further increase of population and accumulation of national
wealth will naturally result. Hawaii is now in
truth the Paradise of the Pacific and the jewel in
the diadem of our western possessions, as the Pearl
of the Antilles is the gem of our eastern acquisitions.




APPENDIX.
[The following appendices set forth in abbreviated
form nearly all the latest and most reliable information
relative to the Hawaiian Islands that has been gathered
within the last ten years. They have been compiled from
pamphlets issued by the Secretaries of State and of Agriculture of the United States, reports of commissions,
consular reports, official correspondence and the like,
and are in every sense authoritative.]
A.
LAND.
SETTLEMENT ASSOCIATIONS IN THE HAWAIIAN
ISLANDS.
Six or more qualified persons may form a " Settlement Association" and apply for holdings in one
block.
The provisions for cash freehold apply to the
settlement of such blocks, but first auction sale is
confined to members of such Settlement Association.
Any lot in such block which may be forfeited or
surrendered, or which is not taken up by any member of the Settlement Association within three
months, shall be open to any qualified applicants.
Disputes, disagreements, or misunderstandings
between the parties to certificate of occupation,
homestead lease, right of purchase lease, or cash
freehold, and relating thereto, which cannot be
amicably settled, shall be submitted to the Circuit




308


Appendix A.


Judge in whose jurisdiction the premises are situated, and his decision shall be final, subject only
to appeal to Supreme Court.
CASH SALES AND SPECIAL AGREEMENTS.
With consent of Executive Council, public lands
not under lease may be sold in parcels of not over
i,ooo acres, at public auction, for cash, and upon
such sale and payment of full consideration a land
patent will issue.
Parcels of land of not over 6oo acres may, with
consent of Executive Council, be sold at public auction upon part credit and part cash, and upon such
terms and conditions of improvement, residence,
etc., as may be imposed.
Upon fulfilment of all conditions a land patent
will issue.
GENERAL LEASES.
General leases of public lands may be made for
a term not exceeding twenty-one years.
Such leases are sold at public auction, and require rent in advance quarterly, semiannually, or
annually.
The conditions of general leases are made at discretion of the Commissioners, and may be made
for any class of public lands.
METHODS OF ACQUIRING LAND.
Land can be obtained from the Government by
two methods, viz., the cash freehold system and
the right of purchase leases. Under the first system the land is sold at auction. The purchaser
pays one-quarter in cash and the rest in equal instalments of one, two, and three years, interest
being charged at the rate of six per cent. upon the
unpaid balance. Under this system the purchaser
is bound to maintain a home on the land from the




Land.


309


commencement of the second year to the end of the
third. The right of purchase leases are drawn for
twenty-one years at a rental of eight per cent. on
the appraised value of the land. The lessee has
the privilege of purchasing the land after the third
year at the original appraised value, provided
twenty-five per cent. of the land is reduced to cultivation and other conditions of the lease filled. In
this case a home must be maintained from the end
of the first year to the end of the fifth year. The
limit of first-class agricultural land obtainable is
Ioo acres. This amount is increased on lands of
inferior quality. Under the above conditions the
applicant must be eighteen years of age and obtain
special letters of denization. Land can also be obtained from the various land and investment companies and from private parties.
GOVERNMENT LANDS.
The total area of Government lands is fixed at
1,782,500 acres, classified as follows:
Class of land.                     Acres.
Valuable  building  lots...................  145
Coffee...................................  76,270
Cane................................  25,626
Rice.....................................  977
Rice..+ * 977
Homesteads, Government interest in..... 20,000
G razing.................................  45I, 200
Forest lands, high.......................  681,282
Rugged mountain tracts................. 227,000
Barren  lands............................  300,000
The above classification is somewhat arbitrary
because of the lack of positive knowledge of quality
and adaptability of soil in untried sections. The
area of coffee lands on the island of Maui will
probably be increased by further investigations on
the windward side of the island,




310.Appendix A.


These Government lands are located on the several islands as follows:


Islands.        Coffee. Cane.    Rice. Grazing. Forests, Estimated
etc.     value.
Acres. Acres. Acres. Acres.       Acres.
Hawaii.............. 62,890  I8,156    40  368,849  749,302 $1,874,900
Maui............   8,i80     520      10o 112,570    58,550    453,800
Oahu...............        800   2,050     327   71,414    13,778    983,500
Kauai                    4,400   4,900     400   80,o5o    86,650    648,000
Molokai...............................  40,625........     77,500
Lanai and Kahoolawe....................        77,669.....       70,000
Laysan, etc................................  40,000
Total..........76,270     25,626     977  751,I77  908,280   4,147,700


AGRICULTURAL INDUSTRIES.
The mainstay of the Hawaiian Islands has, for
the last thirty-five years, been the sugar industry.
From this source a large amount of wealth has
been accumulated.  But the sugar industry requires large capital for expensive machinery, and
has never proved remunerative to small investors.
An attempt has been made at profit-sharing and
has met with some success, the small farmer cultivating and the capitalist grinding at a central mill.
Of late years, moreover, the small farmer has been
steadily developing in the Hawaiian Islands and attention has been given to other products than sugar.
Rice neither the European nor the American
can cultivate as laborers. It requires working in
marshy land, and though on the islands it yields
two crops a year, none but the Chinaman can raise
it successfully. A dry-land or mountain rice has
been introduced, which will be treated under the
head of agricultural possibilities.
The main staple after sugar and rice is coffee.
Of this hundreds of thousands of trees have been
planted out within the last five years. This is essentially the crop of the future and bids fair to become as important a staple as sugar. Coffee does




Land.                311
not require the amount of capital that sugar does,
and it can be worked remuneratively upon a small
area. It is estimated that at the end of the fourth
year the return from a 75-acre coffee plantation
will much more than pay the running expenses,
while from that time on a return of from eight
to ten thousand dollars per annum may be
realized.*
Fruits can also be cultivated to advantage. At
present the banana trade of the islands amounts
to over 1oo,ooo bunches per annum, valued at over
$ioo,ooo, and the quantity might be very easily
quadrupled.  The banana industry may be regarded as in its infancy. The export of the fruit
is only from the island of Oahu, but there are
thousands of acres on the other islands of the group
which could be profitably used for this cultivation
and for nothing else. The whole question of the
banana industry hinges on the market. At present
the market is limited.
Limes and oranges can be cultivated and the
fruit can be easily packed for export; at present
the production does not meet the local market.
The fruits can be raised to perfection. The Hawaiian orange has a fine flavor, and the Hawaiian
lime has an aroma and flavor far superior to that
cultivated in Mexico and Central America. In the
uplands of Hawaii and Maui potatoes can be and
are raised. Their quality is good. Corn is also
raised. In these industries many Portuguese, Norwegians, and others have embarked. Both these
products find an ample local market. The corn is
used largely for feed on the plantations. The corn
is ground with the cob and makes an excellent feed
for working cattle, horses, and mules.
In the uplands, where the climate is temperate,
as at Waimea, Hawaii, vegetables of all kinds can
be raised; excellent cauliflower, cabbages, and
every product of the temperate zone can be grown
to perfection.
*See page 315 of this appendix,




312


Appendix A.


Cattle-raising in so small a place as the Hawaiian
Islands does not present great opportunities except
for local consumption. Pigs are profitable to the
small farmer. In the Kula district of Maui pigs
are fattened upon the corn and potatoes raised in
the district. The price of pork, dressed, is twentyfive cents per pound in Honolulu and about fifteen
cents per pound in the outside districts.  The
Chinese, of whom there are some fifteen thousand
resident on the various islands, are extremely fond
of pork, so that there is a large local market, which
has to be supplemented by importations from California.
Attention has lately been given to fibre plants,
for which there are many suitable locations.
Ramie grows luxuriantly, but the lack of proper
decorticating and cleaning machinery has prevented any advance in this cultivation.
Sisal hemp and sanseveira have been experimented with, but without any distinct influence
upon the trade output.
The cultivation of pineapples is a very growing
industry. In I895 pines were exported from the
islands to San Francisco to the value of nearly
$9,000oo. This has grown up in the last half-dozen
years. There is every reason to think that canning
pineapples for the coast and other markets can be
made profitable.
The guava, which grows wild, can also be put
up to profit for the manufacture of guava jelly.
It has never been entered upon on a large scale,
but to the thrifty farmer it would add a convenient
slice to his income, just as the juice of the maple
adds an increase to the farmer of the Eastern
States. Well-made guava jelly will find a market
anywhere. In England it is regarded as a great
delicacy, being imported from  the West India
Islands. Besides the guava there are other fruits
which can be put up to commercial profit, notably
the poha or Cape gooseberry (Physalis edulis).
This has been successfully made into jams and




Land.                3I3
jelly, which command an extensive local sale and
should find their way into larger markets.
In the Hawaiian Islands a simple life can be
lived, and, entering gradually upon the coffee industry, a good competence can be obtained long
before such could be realized by the agriculturalist
elsewhere. However, it is useless to immigrate to
the islands without the necessary capital to develop
the land that can be obtained.
Between arriving and the time that the crops
begin to give returns there is a period when the
living must be close, and cash must be paid out
for the necessary improvements.  The land is
cheap, the climate equable; it only requires brains,
a small capital, and energy to realize such comfort
and independence as cannot be realized in old
countries in one-fourth of the time.




B.
COFFEE.
Estimate of cost of establishing and maintaining a
coffee plantation of 75 acres from the first to the
seventh year.
FIRST YEAR.
Purchase of ioo acres of Government land at $io per acre....... $i,ooo
Manager's house and water-tank...   600
Laborers' quarters and water-tank.  350
Clearing 50o acres of land at $20 per
acre............................, 000
Fencing.........................  300
Purchase of 65,ooo one-year-old coffee plants at $5 per thousand...  325
Lining, holing, and planting 50
acres........................  600
Manager's salary, one year........ 1,200
Labor of six Japanese, one year, at
$i 5 per month..................  I,o8o
Purchase of tools and starting nursery............................  500
$6,955
SECOND YEAR.
Manager's salary.................  1,200
Labor, six Japanese...............  i,o8o
Extra labor, lining, holing, and
planting  25 acres...............  300
Sundries........................  500
----     3,o8o
10,035




Coffee.


3I5


THIRD YEAR.
Manager's salary................. $1,200
Labor, nine Japanese............. 1,620
Pulping-shed and drying-house....  500
Pulper, with engine and boiler....  500
Extra help for picking, pulping, and
drying 20,000 pounds of coffee
from 50 acres at 4 cents per
pound.....:.................  800
Hulling, polishing, and grading
20,000 pounds of coffee at I cent.  200
Sundries (bags, freight, etc.)......  250
$5,07o
I5, 05
CREDIT.
By sale of 20,000 pounds of coffee at 18
cents.............................   3, 600oo
11,505
FOURTH YEAR.
Manager's salary.................  1,200
Labor, nine Japanese.............,620
Extra labor picking, pulping, and
drying:
50,000 pounds of coffee from o5
acres at 4 cents per pound.. 2,000
1o,000 pounds from  25 acres
(three-year-old trees).......  400
Hulling, polishing, and grading
60,ooo pounds at i cent.........  6oo
Sundries (bags, freight, etc.)......  400
6,220
17,725




316


Appendix B.


CREDIT.
By sale of 6o,ooo pounds of coffee at 18
cents................................  $io,8oo
6,925
FIFTH YEAR.
Manager's salary................. $, 200
Labor, nine Japanese............. 1,620
Picking, pulping, and drying 60,000
pounds of coffee from 50 acres
and 25,000 pounds from 25 acres
at 4 cents.................... 3,400
Hulling, polishing, and grading
85,000 pounds at I cent per pound.  850
Sundries (bags, freight, etc.)......  500
- 7,570
I4,495
CREDIT.
By sale of 85,ooo pounds of coffee at I8
cents.................................  I5,300
Balance on hand.................  905
SIXTH YEAR.
Manager's salary..................  1,200
Labor, nine Japanese............. 1,620
Picking, pulping, and drying 75,000
pounds of coffee from 50 acres
and 25,000 pounds from 25 acres
— 00,000 pounds at 4 cents...... 4, ooo
Hulling, polishing, and grading
o00,000 pounds at I cent.........,000o
Sundries (bags, freight, etc,),,,...  1,000
--- 88,820




Coffee.


317


CREDIT.
By sale of Ioo,ooo pounds of coffee at i8
cents............................ $i8,ooo
Balance on hand..................  o, o85
SEVENTH YEAR.
Manager's salary.................. $I,200
Labor, twelve Japanese..........  2, i60
Picking, pulping, and drying I25,000
pounds of coffee at 4 cents......  5,000
Hulling, polishing, and grading
125,000 pounds at i cent........,250
Sundries (bags, freight, etc.)...... 1,200
-  io,8io
CREDIT.
By sale of 125,000 pounds of coffee at i8
cents..............................  22,500
Balance to credit of plantation at
end of seventh year............  21,775
INTERVIEWS WITH PLANTERS.
Plantation No. i.-This place is situated in Hamakua, and is owned by a Portuguese, Narcizzo
de Mello. It shows what can be done by a man
without means. It must be borne in mind, however, that this man was on the ground making a
living, and had every opportunity to select his land.
In all probability a stranger would spend nearly
as much as this man owns before he got fairly
started.  This place consists of 17 acres, 3 of
which are in coffee. The land cost $0o per acre,




318


Appendix B.


and he estimates that the clearing did not cost him
more than $3 per acre, as he did most of the work
himself.  His plants cost $5 per thousand, the
trees now being from six months to four and onehalf years old. They are planted 7 by 6 feet at an
elevation of 1,750 feet. He employs no labor, with
the exception of one Portuguese woman at 50 cents
per day at picking time, who, together with his
own wife and two children, is sufficient.  His
land is not paid for, he paying interest at five per
cent. He has a small house of two stories, 20 by
20 feet, with a 7-foot veranda, which cost $650,
with a detached kitchen costing $55. He estimates
that it costs hin $20 per month to support his
family, outside of what he raises in the way of
vegetables. His tools cost $5, and his stock, consisting of a horse and cow, $70. The crop of last
year amounted to 2,560 pounds; this year he expects to get 4,800 pounds. The coffee was sold in
the parchment, to a local shopkeeper, for io cents
per pound, which was 2 cents under the price paid
in Honolulu. Mr. de Mello has owned his place
for six years and estimates that it has cost him, exclusive of land, $I,ooo. He owes $700. His trees
look very well, and show careful planting and intelligent cultivation. The older trees were laden
with berries, and the estimate made that there
would be an average yield of I2 pounds of clean
coffee per tree is conservative. Some trees must
have had 4 pounds of clean coffee on them. De
Mello never had any previous experience in
raising coffee, but raised fruit in Portugal. He
frequently works for others, earning about $io5
per year. He will work at planting by the day
for new settlers, and would be a good man to
employ to show strangers around the Hamakua
district.
Plantation NVo. 2.-The owner of this place is
also a Portuguese.  Ie owns  5 acres of land
which cost $io per acre. He had 4A  acres in
coffee, the trees being three and one-half to six




Coffee.               319
years old. Last year he received $I5o for his crop.
The man probably works at times for others. It
costs him in money from $20 to $25 per month to
support a family of twelve.  He raises hogs,
chickens, and vegetables. He estimates that his
place has cost him, all told, $700.
Plantation No. 3. —This place is owned by a
gentleman who is engaged in other business besides coffee. He has 40 acres planted. The cost
of clearing his land was $Soo per acre. The trees
are from six months to seven years old. They are
planted 7 by 8 feet at an elevation of i,8oo feet.
Five Japanese are required to take care of the
place, who are paid $i5 per month. Last year
4,225 pounds of coffee were marketed. It was sent
in parchment to the coast, and brought at the rate
of 19  cents for clean coffee. On this place are a
number of trees which have been badly planted.
Upon pulling the tree up it is usually found that
the tap-root was bent or that the lateral roots were
growing in a bunch around the main stem.
Plantation No. 4.-This is a new place of go acres
which cost $12.50 per acre. The clearing cost $25
per acre. Ten acres have just been planted, the
plants costing $5 per thousand.  The trees are
planted 8 by 8 feet at an elevation of I,800
feet.  Four Japanese   are employed   at $i5
per month. About $800 has already been spent,
in addition to the cost of the land. This gentleman is a firm believer in plants raised from Guatemalan seed.
Plantation No. 5.-This place belongs to two
young men. They have spent rather more than
usual for a place of its size and age. They have
147 acres, the cost of which averaged them $12.50
per acre. This is one of the new homestead lots
in Hamakua opened up by the Government the
first part of the year. The land is covered with
heavy timber and a thick tropical undergrowth.
It cost to clear $25 per acre. Eight acres have just
been put in coffee. The plants were bought at $5




320


Appendix B.


per thousand. The trees are planted 8 by 8 feet
and 7 by 7 feet. The land has an elevation of from,6oo00 to 2,300 feet. Four Japanese are employed
at $15 per month. They estimate their living expenses to be $40 per month. They have spent so
far $5,000. Their buildings have cost $2,000, the
dwelling costing alone $1,75o. This place is a
good illustration of what it costs to build on a new
place before roads are made. The material for the
house had to be packed on mules over a miserable
trail, and then carried by Japanese over a deep
gulch. The freight cost as much as the material
and labor.
Plantation No. 6.-This place is owned by Mr. J.
M. Horner, and is the show place of Hamakua.
He is also a large sugar-planter. He has 125 acres
in coffee. The land cost to clear $40 per acre.
He sells plants raised from Guatemalan seed at
$io per thousand. He has also sold considerable
seed at $i per pound. His land has an elevation
of from  1,400 to 2,000 feet. He considers 2,000
feet the best. His trees are from one to five years
old. They are planted 7  by 7 feet. He employs
twenty-five Japanese, four being women, paying
$I5 to the men and $io to the women. In 1894 he
picked 2,000 pounds of coffee; in I895, i2,000
pounds; in i896, 68,000 pounds, and this year expects 80,000 pounds. He has received 15 cents per
pound for his coffee. Mr. Horner has paid great
attention to his nurseries, his plants being in great
demand. After planting the seed, all of which is
Guatemalan, he covers the ground with fern leaves
and does not remove them until the plants are well
out of the ground. The ground is watered every
day. Mr. Horner claims that a tree raised from
Guatemalan seed is as far advanced at four years
as a native one would be at six years. Cutworms
appear on the ridges and not in the valleys. This
year he has been experimenting with fertilizing.
He hopes by expending 5 cents per tree to double
the crop. His coffee looks very fine.




Coffee.               321
As the case now stands for the investor, land can
be obtained for coffee-growing in:
ISLAND OF HAWAII.
North and South Kona,
Hilo,
Puna, including Olaa,
Hamakua.
ISLAND OF MAUI.
Keanae,
Nahiku,
Lahaina,
Kaupo.
ISLAND OF MOLOKAIo
ISLAND OF OAHU.
ISLAND OF KAUAI.




C.
SUGAR.
Sugar is the great staple of these islands, and the
whole production goes to the United States.
The total amount shipped during the first six
months of I897 was I86,517 tons, valued at $I I,093,516.82. Of this amount, 70,503 tons, valued at
$4,235,6I3.85, went to New York, consigned to the
American Sugar Refining Company, and II6,014
tons, valued at $6,857,902.97, went to San Francisco.
One hundred and forty-six vessels were employed, of which 123, or 84 per cent., were American, carrying 143,270 tons.
Hawaii can never produce enough sugar to supplant the beet or any other sugar in the United
States.  The sugar consumption of the United
States was approximately two million tons during
1896, which consumption is rapidly increasing year
by year. During I896 Hawaii produced a little
over two hundred thousand tons, or approximately
one-tenth of the consumption of the United States.
This is the highest output ever made by Hawaii,
and is the best it has been able to do after twenty
years of encouragement under the reciprocity
treaty with the United States.
All of the natural cane lands of Hawaii are already under cultivation.
The only remaining lands which can possibly be
cultivated with sugar-cane are those now dry and
barren, which can only be cultivated by artificial
irrigation, by pumping water to an elevation of
from one hundred and fifty to six hundred feet.




rI*


3ugar.                              323
It goes without saying that such irrigation must
be limited in area and problematical in profits.
SUGAR-PLANTATION STATISTICS
From 1875 to 1897 inclusive.
SUGAR.                  MOLASSES.
YEAR.                                                      TOTAL ExPounds.        Value.      Gallons.    Value.    PORT VALUE.
I875     25,080,182  $1,216,388.821  93,722   $12,183.86   $1,228,572.68
1876     26,072,429   1,272,334.53  130,073    19,510.95    1,291,845.48
1877     25,575,965   1,777,529.57  151,462    22,719.30    1,800,248.87
1878     38,43I,458   2,701,73I.50   93,136    12,107.68    2,713,839.18
1879     49,020,972   3,1o9,563.66   87,475     9,622.52    3,II9,I85.9I
1880     63,584,871   4,322,711.48  198,355    29,753.52    4,352,464.73
1881     93,789,483   5,395,399.54  263,587    31,630.44    5,427,020.98
1882    I14,177,938   6,320,890.65  221,293    33,I93.95    6,354,084.60
1883    II4,107,155   7,II2,98.I2  193,997    34,819.46    7I,47,8oo.58
1884    142,654,923   7,328,896.67  110,530    i6,579-50    7,345,476.17
I885    I71,350,314   8,356,061.94   57,941     7,050.00    8,363,111.94
1886    2I6,223,615   9,775,i32.12  113,137    14,501.76    9,789,633.88
1887    212,763,647   8,694,964.07   71,222    10,522.76    8,705,486.83
1888    235,888,346  10,818,883.09   47,965     5,900.40   10,824,783.49
1889    242,I65,835  13,089,302.10   54,612     6,185.10   13,095,487.20
1890    259,789,462  12,159,585.01   74,926     7,603.29   12,167,188.30
1891    274,983,580   9,550,537.80   55,845     4,721.40    6,555,258.20
1892    263,636,715   7,276,549.24   47,988     5,061.07    7,281,610.34
1893    330,822,879  10,200,958.37   67,282     5,928.96   10,206,887.33
1894    306,684,993   8,473,009.10   72,979     6,050.11    8,479,059.21
1895    294,784.819   7,975,590.41   44,970     3,037.83    7,978,628.24
1896    443,569,282  14,932,172.82   15,885     1,209.72   14,933,382.54
I897    520,158,232  15,390,422.13   33,770     2,892.72   I5,393,3I4.85
AMOUNT OF SUGAR SHIPPED FROM THE HAWAIIAN
ISLANDS      FROM     JANUARY      ist TO   JUNE     3oth, 1897.


From whence shipped.        To New      To San Fran-      Total.
York.          cisco.
Pounds.        Pounds.       Pounds.
Kahului....................   14,671,387     28,967,60i     43,638,988
Mahukona...........................   22,976550   22,976,550
Hilo.......................  15,897,831     39,482,113     55,379,9I4
Honolulu.................    110,437,950    140,602,431    251,040,381
Total.............        141,o007,168  232,028,695    373,035,863
Total tons.............       70,503        116,014         86,517




324


Appendix C.


VALUE OF ABOVE.
From whence shipped.         Value to     Value to San     Total.
New York.       Francisco.
Kahului..................  439,673.89  $906,748.06 I1,346,421.95
M ahukona.............................      658,843.43     658,83434
Hilo...................    472,050.71    I,137,683.28   1,609,733.99
Honolulu................     3,323,889.25   4,154,628.20    7,478,517.45
Total...................  4,235,613.85  6,857,902.97   11,093,516.82


NUMBER AND NATIONALITY OF VESSELS,
A m erican..........................................................  23
H aw aiian,.............................................  13
B ritish.......................................................  5
German......................................  5




LIST OF SUGAR PLANTATIONS, MILLS, AND CANE GROWERS THROUGHOUT THE ISLANDS.
Those marked with an asterisk (*) are planters only; those marked with a dagger (t) are mills only; all others are plantations
complete, owning their own mills.


NAME.
American Sugar Co.............
Beecroft Plantation*.........
Eleele Plantation.............
Ewa Plantation.................
Gay & Robinson*..............
Grove Farml...................
Haiku Sugar Co................
Hakalau Plantation Co........
Halawa Sugar Co...............
Hamakua Mill Co.t.........
Hamakua Plantation Co.......
Hamoa Plantation..............
Hana Plantation Co........
Hanamaulu Sugar Plantation*...
Hanamaulu Millt............
Hawi Mill & Plantation........
Hawaiian Agriculturual Co.....
Hawaiian Com'l & Sugar Co....
Hawaiian Sugar Co.............
Heeia Agricultural Co., Ltd...
Hilo Sugar Co..........
Hilo Port. Sugar Mill Co.......
Kona Sugar Co.................
Honolulu Sugar Co.............
Honokaa Sugar Co.............
Honomu Sugar Co..............
Hutchinson Sugar Co.........
Kahuku Plantation.............
Kaiwilahilahi Mill..............


LOCATION.


M ANAGER.


AGENTS.


Molokai........................
Kohalo, Hawaii................
Eleele, Kauai................
Ewa, Oahu.....................
Makaweli, Kauai.............
Nawiliwili, Kauai.............
Haiku, Maui..................
Hilo, Hawaii..................
Kohala, Hawaii.............
Hamakua, Hawaii.............
Hamakua, Hawaii...............
Hana, Maui....................
Hana, Maui...................
Lihue, Kauai..................
Hanamaulu, Kauai.............
Kohala, Hawaii..............
Kau, Hawaii...................
Spreckelsville, Maui...........
Makaweli, Kauai...............
Heeia, Oahu....................
Hilo, Hawaii..................
Hilo, Hawaii..................
Kona, Hawaii.................
Halawa, Oahu...............
Hamakua, Hawaii............
Hilo, Hawaii.................
Kau, Hawaii................
Kahuku, Oalhu...
Laupahoehoe, Hawaii......


P. McLane................        C. Brewer & Co.
H. R. Bryant................... Davies & Co.
A. Dreier....................   Schaefer & Co.
G. F. Renton..................   Castle & Cooke
Gay & Robinson.............   H. Waterhouse.
G. N. Wilcox.................. Hackfeld & Co.
H. A. Baldwin.................    Alexander & Baldwin.
Geo. Ross......................  Irwin & Co.
T. S. Kay................  H. Waterhouse.
J. R. Renton................... Davies & Co.
A. Lidgate...................    Davies & Co.
T. H. C. Campbell............     C. Brewer & Co.
K. S. Gjerdrum................Grinbaum & Co.
A. S. Wilcox...........          Hackfeld& Co.
C. Wolters................. Hackield & Co.
J. Hind..................  Davies & Co.
C. M. Walton.................. Brewer & Co.
W. J. Lowrie............         Alexander & Baldwin.
-1. Morrison..................  Alexander & Baldwin.
E. K. Bull....................   Grinbaum & Co.
John A. Scott................. Irwin & Co.
W. von Gravemeyer............    Hackfeld & Co.
J. Coerper................  M'Chesn'y & Sons.
las. A. Low.........,................
john Watt.................... Schaefer & Co.
Win. Pullar.................... Brewer & Co.
C(. C. Hewett..............       Irwin & Co.
George Weight................. Grinbaum & Co.
C. MIcLennan.................. Davies & Co.


c/)
iA4,It




LIST OF SUGAR PLANTATIONS, ETC.-Continued.


NAME.                           LOCATION.
Kekaha Sugar Co............... Kekaha, Kauai..............
Kilauea Sugar Co..............   Kilauea, Kauai................
Kipahulu Sugar Co............     Kipahulu, Maui.......
Kihei Plantation...............  Kihei, Maui....................
Kohala Plantation............  Kohala, Hawaii................
Koloa Agricultural Co.........   Koloa, Kauai............
Koloa Sugar Co...........     Koloa, Kauai...................
Kukaiau Mill Co..............    Hamakua, Hawaii...........
Kukaiau Plantation Co......... Hamakua, Hawaii..............
Laie Plantation................. Laie, Oahu...................
Laupahoehoe Sugar Co........    Laupahoehoe, Hawaii..........
Lihue Plantation............    Lihue, Kauai..................
Makee Sugar Co...........     Kealia, Kauai.................
Nahiku Sugar Co............  Koolau, Maui..................
Niulii Mill & Plantation........  Kohala, Hawaii.............
Oahu Sugar Co.............       Waipahu, Oahu................
Olowalu Sugar Co.............. Oloalu, Hawaii...............
Onomea Sugar Co.............. Hilo, Hawaii..................
Ookala Sugar Co............... Ookala, Hawaii................
Paauhau Plantation Co.......... Hamakua, Hawaii............
Pacific Sugar Mill.............. Hamakua, Hawaii.............
Paia  Plantation.................  Paia, M aui.....................
Pioneer  Mill Co...............  Lahaina, Maui..................
Pepeekeo Sugar Co.............   Hilo, Hawaii.................
Union Mill Co.................. Kohala, Hawaii............
Waiakea Mill Co............... Hilo, Hawaii..................
Waialua Agricultural Co........ Waialua, Oahu.................
Waianae Plantation............ Waanae, Oahu.............
Wailuka Sugar Co.W............  ailuku, Maui.........
Waimanalo Sugar Co........... Waimanalo, Oahu...............
Waimea Sugar Mill Co......       Waimea, Kauai................


MANAGER.
Otto Isenberg...............
G. R. Ewart...................
Oscar Unna..................
W. F. Pogue..................
E. E. Olding...................
J. K. Farley..................
A. Cropp.......................
Jas. R. Renton.............
J. M. Horner...............
S. E. Wooley...............
C. McLennan...................
C. Wolters....................
G. H. Fairchild.............................................
Robert Hall...................
A. Ahrens......................
A. Hanneberg.................
John T. Moir...................
W. G. Walker..................
A. Moore......................
D. Forbes......................
D. C. Lindsay..................
L.  Ahlborn.....................
H. Deacon......................
J.  Renton......................
C. C. Kennedy................
W. W. Goodale................
D. Center...................
C. B. Wells..................
G. C. Chalners................
E. E. Conant...............


AGENTS.
Hackfeld & Co.
Irwin & Co.
Hackfeld & Co.
Alexander & Baldwin.
Castle & Cooke.
Castle & Cooke.
Hackfeld & Co.
Davies & Co.
Hackfeld & Co.
H. Waterhouse.
Davies & Co.
Hackfeld & Co.
Brewer & Co.
Davies & Co.
Hackfeld & Co.
Irwin & Co.
Castle & Cooke.
Irwin & Co.
Irwin & Co.
Schaefer & Co.
Alexander & Baldwin.
Hackfeld & Co.
Davies & Co.
Davies & Co.
Davies & Co.
Castle & Cooke.
J. M. Dowsett.
Brewer & Co.
Irwin & Co.
Castle & Cooke.


N
F)
~tl




D.
POPULATION AND AREA.
Square Miles.
N iihau...................................   97
K au ai....................................  590
Oahu...................................  600
M olokai................................  270
M aui.......................................  760
L anai....................................  150
K ahoolawe...............................   63
H aw aii....................................  4,210
T otal....................  6,740
The islands that interest an intending immigrant are Hawaii, Maui, Oahu, and Kauai. It is
on these islands that coffee, fruits, potatoes, corn,
and vegetables can be raised by the small investor,
and where land can be obtained on reasonable
terms.
The different nationalities represented among
the population of the islands are distributed as
follows:
POPULATION BY NATIONALITIES.
H aw aiians.............................  35,000
Part Hawaiians......................... 10,000
Chinese................................  15,ooo
Japanese...............................  24,00ooo
Portuguese.............................  9,0oo
American and European................. I4,000
Total..................  107,000




328


Appendix JD.


In the matter of the general population of the
islands the subjoined table has been compiled from
the last census returns.


DWELLINGS.
Male. Female. Total.     Inhab- Unin-     Build-   Total.
ited. habited.   ing.
Oahu........ 26,164    I4.041   40,205   6,685   I,065      60     7,010
Hawaii..,.   22,632   10,653   33,285   5,033    955       35     6,027
Molokai.....    1,335    972    2,307o    651      92       3       746
Lanai.....     51      54      105      23      13.....        36
Maui........  I,435    6,29I     17,726  3, 56   650              3,824
Niihau......      76       88     I64      3        3.......      34
Kauai...... I0,824     4,404   i3,228   2,320    299              2,627
Totals..... 72)517   36,503   09,020  17,099   3,o8       24    21,104
_..                _ _,1




E.
SCHOOLS.
SCHOOL STATISTICS, HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
(From Reports of the Department of Education.)
COMPARATIVE TABLE OF SCHOOL POPULATION, 1897-98.
IN SCHOOL, JAN. |     IN SCHOOL, JAN.
c d~^      1898.       co        1897.
ISLANDS.  Z4.        Bo 
l Boys. Girls. Total.  1/  Boys. Girls. Total.
Hawaii.....  60  2,o55  1,773  3,828  64  2,00oo8  1,703  3,711
Maui and Lanai........  36  I,32I  1,I67  2,488  37,39  I,151  2,470
Molokai....       9o   67  157     6    114  64   178
Oahu......   73  3,638  2,790  6,428  71  3,429  2,670  6,099
Kauai & Niihau........  8  913  708  1,621  17   878  687  1,565
Totals.....  92  8,017  6,505  14,522  195  7,748  6,275  14,023
The main plan of the school system is modelled
upon the public-school system of the United States,
modified to meet the wants of a heterogeneous
population. The children are instructed in writing, reading, composition, arithmetic, geography,
both local and general.     The books are uniform
and obtainable at the same price as in the United
States.   The schools are strictly non-sectarian.
There is no district, however remote, in which
there is no school. The only people who cannot
read and write are those who come from        abroad.
Those born on the islands are compelled by law to
take advantage of the education offered.      Besides
the common-school education, opportunities are
given at various centres for a higher education
equivalent to the grammar grade of the United
States, and in Honolulu a high school and collegiate course can be obtained at a small cost.




330               F.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS.
RAINFALL THROUGHOUT THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS,
1897-98.


Locality.        Feet                    1898.
vation Tan. Feb. Mar. I Ann. Mav    Tn_ I   Total.


HAWAII.
Waiakea..............     504151 6.94 4975       6.95  725    4.30 17347
Hilo..................   10oo 38.64 3.95 45.4'   7 12  8.19   4.23 161.39
Kaumana....             1,250 49.6  7.76 5558 12.70 15.58     6.54.230.99
Pepeekeo.............    10033.4 8.66 42.37      594     87.17 152.62
Honomu.........3...      300 35-44 7.28 49-99.
Hakalau.............      200 31.9o  6.53 38.72   6.32  8.48   3 851147.92
Laupahoehoe..........    6oo0041.6o 8.28 3.7o0   7.50 11.6    4801i69.86
Ookala..............     400 32.85 6,52 28.43    6.33.1.........
Kukaiau,.............    260128.20 4 72 20.59    4,96  3.96   3.88 9I.o0
Paauhau..............    300 18.31 2.90 12.23    4.46  3.52   2.73 62.41
Honokaa............      425 6.24 3.56    2.79   539   2.93   3.29 66.54
Waimea,,...........  2,720 3.62 2.62  6.39  2.60  2.54  4.66 34.64
Kohala...........        350 6.6         16.54   3.15  4 84....
Kailua................    950  1.33 4.9    8.67   2.48  7.28   7.26 67.62
Kealakekua...........,58o0.6  4. 3  6.99   2.03  7-81   7.36 69.39
Kalahiki.............    800  1.27 3 88   6.80   2.19  4.74   3.59 51.27
Naalehu........   650 4.34 3.77 20.02     0.7   347    o.62 5539
Pahala................  1,100  5 82 5.3.....     0.54  1.21   0.34.....
Olaa.................,6501.46o.6 5244 13.86 13.66         8.18 22700
Kapoho..............      110 15.64 11.41 24.86   3.26  4.17   4.19 1o8.86
Pohoiki....                   8.04 15.26 19.87   3.05  3.48   6.50......
MAUI, ETC.
Haleakala Ranch......2,000 3.97 3.83       9.46   1.17  I5       8  38.49
Puuomalei.............  1,400  9.93 5.94 13-38   321   5.32   2 78.
Paia                           3.845........... 80 3.08 4.35  503  1.80.....
Kahului...............     I   o.88 5.i6   1.74   0 75 
Kaanapali...........      15 3.64 8.71    4.8...
Olowalu..............     15 o.oo 4.15    0.70   0.00  0.00   0 00oo....
Kaupo................    3001423 6.84 20.96      2.I7  2.94   1.96......
Mapulehu, Molokai...       70 3.68 8.66    8.69   1.02  2 23    43 45-49
Koele, Lanai..........,6oo  0.23 7.92  9.22   0.39  0.32   5.02....
OAHU.
Punahouo..............     5o 6.26 8.491 2.70     2.42  1.35   2.90......
Kulaokahua..........      50 3.99 7.62    o.66   1.20  o.68   2.07 34.26
Kapiolani Park.......      o   1.39 6.63   795    0.23  0 22   0.37 I994
School Street........     50. 6.56 9.15   22.o3  2.22  1.84  3.05 49.59
Nuuanu Avenue              50....   9.04 11.79.67  1.47   2.63.
"    Valley.......    40518.89 910.82 26.17   432   4.31   7.20 08.70
Luahaka.......           850 22.00 20.44 40.13   7.45  9 30 10.25 i66. 6
Waimanalo............      25  1.87 11.20 12.35   i.68  1.26   2.74 46.27
Maunawili............     00 4.9310.72 I569      2.32  2.92   4 51 80.46
Kaneohe,.............     100 2.02.....    6.34   2.77  1.58...
Ahuimanu............      350 4541275     2887    405   3.5    6.95103.22
Kahuku..............        2.57 6.58 16.15      1.72  I 24   1.91 45-49
Waianae.............    1,700  2.99 13.93  11.20  440  2.45   3 oi 64.73
Honouliuli............     6o  0.42.o01   7.02   0.38  0.22   1,53 3043
KAUAI.
Lihue.................    200 4.03 6.65 i.6o      2.00o.89   2.51 40.46
Hanamaulu.......         200 2.68 5.o6 10.39      54     73   283 3546
Kilauea..........        325  8.79 7.44 i8.oi    5.27  446    4.09 73.39
Hanalei............  101220 471 27.67       703   6.10   349 98-72




SUMMARY OF METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS AT HONOLULU, I897-98.
(Compiled from Records of Weather Bureau by C. J. Lyons.)


4.
BAROMETER.              REL.                  TEMPERATURE.                 0 -   0 C 
9 HUMID. 3.,r
Month.                           0'|
I                                I                             t      0
9 A.M. 3 P.M. I     9 A.M. 9 P.M.Min. Max. 6 A.M. 2 P.M. 9 P.M. Aver. IGr.' to 
- ___  ____! — __  ___1  _~           ___~      1Cu.Ft
July...               30099 30.032   I.31   68.o  73.8   72-5   83.9  74.2   80.8  75.5   76.8   6.9     5.0   4.0
August.........     130079 30.024   I.23   67.9   7I.3   72.6  85-4  739    8i.6  76.8   77-4   7.I     5.o   3.0
September..........      30 58 29.99  3.4    70.0   76.6   7r.3  844    74 2   o.8   75 4  76.8   71      40    3
oo  October.........     30.073 29.9901  I.8rI  72.7  79-I  72.5   83.  73.1   80.2  75.1  76. 1  7 5      5. o  3.0
November............ 303229.956         0.07   67 9  76.6   66.6   80.   69.6  77.5   71.8  73.0   6.6     6.o    3 o
December........... 3 -100 30 020   0.84   69.8  77.0   65.8   78.8  68.o   75.0  71.0   71.2   6.2     5~0   3.0
January............. 30     6 30043   6.261  74 7   76.4   67.0  77.    68.o  74.0   7I.   71.0   6.3     6.o    3.0
February.............129.996 29.9I6! 8.491    78.2  79.8   62.9  76.    64.2  74.0   67    6. 668.4     5.2    1.4
00 [March.............. 130o85 30.0031 r2.70    75. 2  77.5  653.2  74.6  67.1   73 o  69.5  69-9   6.4     7.2    3.3
o" April................. 30I33 30481 2.421     66.5  75.71 65.3   77.4  67.5   75-7  T 7.4 74721  6.i 3.    9    2.6
I May.................. 30.1330.3072    1 I.35  66.2  73-6 6  8.8  79.2   70.6  77-3   72 5  73.51 6.5      5.2   3.4
June................. 30.o8230.031     2.90   67.3   75.2   69.9  81.5   75    79-5  74.0   75.0   6.8     4.2   2.5. Year..308230.1 i 42.79                   70.4  76.     61.4  80.2   70.2  775    72.6  73.4   6.7     5.1   2.9
Year................ 0             2 o 77 5                                      72.                     1   2.
~~~~~~~~~.[7.~                                7~I.~ _o.!.t~i~       ~4!~7




G.
EXPORTS AND IMPORTS.
EXTENT OF HAWAIIAN TRADE WITH UNITED STATES.
In the fiscal year ending June 30, 1897, the aggregate trade between the Hawaiian Islands and the
United States reached $18,385,000.
This is greater than our total trade with Argentina, which amounted to $17, 157,000 in the same
year.
It was greater than our total trade with Central
America, which amounted to $I6,464,000 last year.
It was greater than our total trade with Spain,
which amounted only to $i4,600,ooo.
It was greater than our total trade with Switzerland, which amounted only to $13,950,000.
It was greater than our total trade with Venezuela, which amounted only to $12,960,000.
It was greater than our total trade with Austria,
which amounted only to $12,200,000.
It was greater than our total trade with Russia,
which amounted only to $10,700,000.
It was greater than our total trade with Denmark, which amounted only to $o, 500,000.
It was greater than our total trade with Colombia, which amounted only to $8,540,ooo00.
It was greater than our total trade with Norway
and Sweden, which amounted only to $7,963,000o.
It was greater than our total trade with the Guianas, which only amounted to $6,770,000.
It was greater than our total trade with Chili,
which only amounted to $6,370,000.
It was greater than our total trade with Uruguay,
which only amounted to $4,729,000.




Exports and Imports.          333
It was nearly four times greater than our total
trade with Portugal, which amounted only to
$4,750,000.
It was nearly seven times greater than our total
trade with Turkey, which only amounted to
$2,82,ooo.
It was ten times greater than our total trade with
Peru, which only amounted to $1,830,000.
It was more than twenty times greater than our
total trade with Greece, which only amounted to
$850,000 in the last fiscal year.




COMPARATIVE TABLE OF IMPORT VALUES FROM VARIOUS COUNTRIES SINCE 1891.


WC


COUNTRIES.


1892.


1893.


1894.


United States...........
Great Britain............


Germany...............


Brit. Col. and Canada... 


Australia and New Zealand..................


Dutiable...........
Bonded............
Free by Treaty.....
LFree by Civ. Code.
Dutiable...........
Bonded............
Free by Civ. Code.
Dutiable...........
Bonded............
Free by Civ. Code.
Dutiable...........
Bonded............
Free by Civ. Code.
Dutiable...........
Bonded............
Free by Civ, Code.
Dutiable...........
Bonded............
Free by Civ. Code.
Dutiable...........
Bonded............
(Free by Civ Code.
Dutiable...........
Bonded............
(Free by   Civ. Cde.
Dutiable...........
Bonded............
Free by Civ. Code.,


$553,800.94
87,456.3 r
2,340,7 7.24
870,524.62
332,767.75
I8,730.44
28,581.70
89,057.34
6,796.4c
3,260.13.......................
25,I59.0C
33,874. Ic
2,463.2C
68,866.12
125,853-55
27,621.52
1,221.87
58,481.55
731.2C
79I-03
3,267.3t
1,297-17
77-76
29I.11
45............
4, 571775


$568,345.3 I
87,I06.45
2,413,369.25
1,257,679.08
362,093.45
22,694.06
36,230.82
64,82r.43
5,309.I8
3,825.70
I8,o00.28
482.88
46,766.35
42,871.07
16,096.33
67,077.03
141,666.56
29,248.92
1,218.46
120,263.33
1,I37.97
18,057.54
5,215.63.........
85-35
400.59
16,9......60
I6,965.60


$344,275-79
86,257.65
2,738,213.68
986,043.30
397,054.77
16,643.63
51,781.32
98,920.41
7,377.23
33,935.43
41,312.05
3,088.72
73,797.80
94,967.78
1,110.62
90,440.35
I8I,967.24
46,551.40
r,75I-77
170,044.37
3,391.40
10,431.75
8,215.53
476.98
93.80
1,555.83
21;260.83


1895.
$619,150.78
73,015.22
3,018,755.42
805,912.86
413,223.64
12,091.67
45,807.67
64,318.76
6,970. 0
39,482.75
8,846.02
4,560.17
17,325.02
66,460.36
2,865.05
53,469.19
I64,239.17
59,452.39
10.00
i83,487.51
18,124.46
5,5 3.62
7,849.90
507-87.......22,377...
22;377-84


1896.       1897.
$665,834.67 $725,862.90
40,187.48   38,761.12
3,225,659.80 4,318,944.30
1,532,526-25 1,716,460.02
636,238.19  774,476.22
12,690.45  14,223.09
I06,782.75  77,081.94
03,058.59  I49,526.30
8,406 76   8,799.44
36,561.32   34,606.45
9,493.12   12,506.75
2,086.82   2,684.11
41,402.05  43,484.07
24,175.54   19,001.99
1,534-30     209.26
87,934.8I  103,241.94
236,148.72  242,477 69
62,306o00o  17293.04
616.25      646.67
264,849-34  267,819.84
3,330.83    4,513.64
8,303.63   19,982.86
8,322.98   13,050.74
5,794.08    5,122.48
3,603.96   I2,824.10
6,259.60   28,513.96
2,998.10   47,668.80
27,865.12  137,419.38


China..............


Japan..................


France..................


All other countries......




COMPARATIVE TABLE OF PRINCIPAL ARTICLES OF EXPORTS, 1867 TO 1897.


Y'r.  Sugar.    Molas.
Lbs.     Galls.
1867 17,I27,I871 544,994
1868 18,3I2,926} 492,839
I869 I8,302,II0 338,3II
1870 18,783,6391 216,662
1871 21,760,773j 271,29I
1872 I6,995,402 192,105
1873 23,129,IOI I46,459
1874 24,566,611  90,o60
1875 25,S00,182  93,722
1876 26,072,429 139,073
1877 25,575,965  151,462
1878 38,431,4548  93,136
1879 49,020,972  87,475
I880 63,584,871, i93,355
188i 93,789,483 263,587
1882 II4,I77,935 221,293
1883 I14,107,155 193,997
1884 142,654 9231  1,530
1885 1171,0,,314  57,94I
3886 2I6,223,615 113,137
1887 212,763,647  71,222
1 8881235,888,346  47,965
1889 242,I65,835  54,612
1890 259,798,4621 74,926
3891 274,983,5801 55,845
1892 263,656,7151 47,988
1893 330,822,879i 67,282
1894 306,684,993  72,979:8951294,784,819  44,970
i896 443,569,282  15,885
1897 520,158,232  33,770




Rice.   Paddy. Coffee. Hides! Tal'w. GoatLbs.     Lbs.    Lbs.   Pcs. Lbs. skins
441,750  572,099 127,546 11,207 6o,936 51,88c
40,450  862,954 78,373111,I44 1o9,504 57,67c
48,830 I,586,959 340,841 I2,803 85,937 62,736
152,o06  535,453 415,I1I 13,95 90,388 67,463
417,01   867,452 46,926 19,384! 85,240 58,900
455,I2I 894,582 39,276'27,o66 493,978 53,598
941,438  507,945 262,025 20,677 609,855 66,702
I,187,986  439,157 75,496 22,620 I 25,596 71,955
I,573,739  556,495 165,977 22,777s5 1 92o60,595
2,259,32411,542,603 153,6671 I, 05 327,291 45,265
2,691,37012,57,987 1I,345 122,164 369,829 51 55
2,767,768 2,774,86i 127,963 25,309!23994I 64,525
4,792,813  33,8I5 74,275 24,885....... 24,940
6,469,840.........  99,50,22,945  I9,I69 31,OI3
7,682,700  102,370 18,912!21,972 118,031 21,308
12,169,475  459,633  8,&13126,0oo7 77,893 23,402
1i,6I9,ooo 1,368,705 16,057 38,9551 32,252 24,798
9,493o000  46,224  4 231 2I,026j  2,864120,125
7,367,253.........  I,675 19,o45;.....1 I9,782
7,338,651.........  5,93I3I,207j 2I,3052I,I73
13,684,200     400  5,300o28,639 56,713 16,233
12,878,600.........  7,13024,49420474317589
9,669,896........43,673127,s58i 97,125 II715
10,579,000....... 88,593 28,I96, 33,876 8,66I
4,900,450.........  3,95I126,427! 27,225  7,3i6
11,516,328.......  13,56821,622  792 3,449
7,821,004'..... 49,311I98261 13,250 5,911
7,803,972........ I80,o I5o 21,6031....... 6,759
3,768,762...... II755i I9,10....... 6,466
5,025,491..     255,655 25,079....... 12,647
5,499,499 *....  337,158125,1401 9,ooo 6,o85




Wool.
Lbs.
409,471
258,914
218,752
234,696
471,706
288,526
329,507
399,926
565,469
405,542
385,703
522,757
464,308
381,316
528,489
528,913
318,271
407,623
474,121
418,784
75,9I1
562,289
24 1,925
374,724
97,119
288,969
391,592
261,337
227,987
462,8I9
249,800


l


Pulu. Fungusl Salt. Bunches Total Val. All
Lbs.    Lbs.   Tons. Ban'nas Dom'stic Exp.
203,958 167,666  107       2,913  $1,324,I22.02
342,882 76,781   540       3,966   1,450,269.26
622,998 85,215 1,152       6,936   1,743,291.59
233,803 41,96812,513       4,007,514,425.06
292,720 37,475   711       3,876   1,733,094.46
421,227 32,I61   522       4,520   1,402,685.38
412,523 57,538   445      6,492    I,721,507.78
418,320 50,955   730~1<    6,494    I,622,455.37
379,003 45,098    96      1,518   1,835,382.91
314,432 35,893     5      14,9821  2,055,I33.55
150,586 ii,629   322      5,995    2,462,4I6.66
212,740 22,364   ISo0     13,431   3,333,979.49
137,001  2,571    50/     12,369   3,665,503.76
44,846 I4,80I    14/     1i9,64   4,889,194.40
53,415  4,282   302     20,,776 6,789,076.38.......  |2,III.....     28,848   8,I65,93I.34.......   3,783!.... 44,902      8,036,227.11
465   2,247 I.....   58,040   8,067,648.82.,137.......   60,046   8,958,663.88......I........   45,862  10,540,375.17..... ---........      58,936   9,435,204.12...... Pine     ----     7I,335    1,631,434.88....... apples Guano    105,630   13,810,070.54
Pcs.  Tons.     97,204   13,023,304.16
5.......,368  1,217   6,66o   10 I,7,315.67
40,171            61   IO5,375   7,959,938.05.,042.....    108,239   10,742,658.50....... 44,903. -    123,004    9,053,309.87....... 65,213 1..1..    0 5,055   8,358,0o6.79....... 47,451....     126,413    5,436,037.23....... 151,7I5 |..    75,835 I6,021,775.19


c
(_2




336


Appendix G.


DUTIES ON IMPORTS.!Articles.              From       From other
United States,  Countries.


Ale, beer, cider, and porter...........
Animals and birds.....................
Building materials..................
Asphaltum, fire clay, window glass, plaster of Paris, stone, and tiles..........
Clothing, boots and shoes.............
Linen collars, collars and cuffs, hats,
jackets, ladies' cloaks, oil clothing,
rubber clothing, linen shirts, underclothing.............................Skirts, suits.........................
Coal and coke.........................
Crockery and glassware............
Lamp  fixtures.......................
Drugs and medicines.................
Artificial limbs and sponges...........
Dry goods............................
Linens........................
Silks................................
'W oollens............................
Fancy goods..........................
Beads, bonnets, buttons, binding, collars....................
Feather dusters.................
Embroidery and feathers..............
Kid gloves............................
Silk  gloves...........................
Gold-leaf..................
Hook and eyes, hoods.................
Parasols, pins, veils, suspenders, linen
thread, trimmings, umbrellas, assorted
Lace, mitts, sewing silk, silk umbrellas.
Fish, dry and salt..................
Flour................................
Fruit,fresh..................
Furniture..........................
Oilcloth........................
Looking-glasses......................
Grain and feed........................
Groceries and provisions..............
Chocolate, cocoa, condensed milk, glucose, honey, indigo blue, lye, sago,
tapioca............................
Guns, revolvers, and findings,.........
Caps, cartridges, gunpowder.......
Fuse, blasting powder, giant powder...
Hardware, agricultural implements and
tools................................
Glue, lead, stove polish, corks........
Iron, steel, etc........................
Brass................................
Railroad equipment...................
Jewelry.........................


20 cts. per dozen. 20 cts. per dozen.
Free........... Io per cent.....do..........     D o.


io per cent......
Free.........
io per cent..........do........
Free............
io per cent......
Free............
io per cent......
Free............... do........
io per cent....
25 per cent......
Free................do..........
io per cent.........do..........
25 per cent.....
$3 per dozen....
25 per cent.....
Io per cent..........do........do.........
25 per cent......
Free..............do............do...........do..........
io per cent.......    do..........
Free..............do.....
io per cent......
Free............
25 per cent......
io per cent......
Free...........
Io per cent......
Free............
io per cent......
Free...........
lo to 25 percent.


Do,
Do.
Do.
Do.
Free.
io per cent.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
25 per cent.
io per cent.
Do.
Do.
Do.
25 per cent.
$3 per dozen.
25 per cent.
io per cent.
Do.
Do.
25 per cent.
ro per cent.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
25 per cent.
Do.
io per cent.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Io to 25 per cent.




Exports and Imports.


337


DUTIES ON IMPORTS.-Continued.


Articles.             I.From     From other
United States.    Countries.
-  -,  -       ~   ~   ~~~       ~      ~     ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I..  


Leather........................,..
Lum ber............................
M achinery...........................
Coffee machinery.....................
M atches..............................
M usical instruments...................
Naval stores........................
O ils.................................
Cocoanut, neat's-foot, palm,...........
P aints.............................
Benzine and turpentine...............
Toilet articles........................
Toilet  soaps.......................
Saddlery, carts, etc....................
Axle grease, harness dressing, saddles..
Baby carriages and carriages...........
Sheathing  metal......................
Shooks and containers.................
Alcohol..............................
Stationery and books.................
T ea.............
Tin  and  tinware.......................
Cigars:
American........................
Foreign..........................
C igarettes............................
Snuff.................................
Tobacco..............................
Wines under Is per cent trail..........
M ineral waters........................
Artists' materials.....................
Birdseed..............................
Boxes and  cases.......................
C andy...............................
Charcoal.,,..
Cotton waste...............
Curiosities...........................
Chewing  gum.........................
'D yes.................................
Electric and telephone instruments and
m aterials...........................
Fertilizers.......................
Lubricating compound...............
Plants and  seeds.....................
Photographic supplies.................
Pipes, tobacco.........................
Cigar-holders.......................
Scientific instruments..................
Shoe  blacking.......................
T runks..............................
Travelling  bags........................
Tombstones..........................
Wicker and wicking.................


Free................do............. do..............do............. do............do..............do.............do..........
so per cent........  do..........
Free...........
10 to 25 percent.
Free...........do.........
Io per cent....
25 per cent.....
Free...............do........
$so per gal......
Free............
Io per cent.....,..do.......
Free.
Free.............r  do..............do..............do.........
lo per cent......
Free................do..............do,.......
25 per cent.....
Free..............  do..............do........
Io per cent..........do..........
Free................do..............do..............do.........
Io per cent......
Free....
25 percent..........do........
Io percent....
Free. -...........do.........
Io per cent......
Free...........


io per cent.
Do.
Do.
Free.
so per cent.
Do.
Do,
Do,
Do,
Do.
Do.
Io to 25 percent.
so per cent.
Do.
Do.
25 per cent.
Io per cent.
Do.
$io per gal.
to per cent,
Do.
Do.
$1o per M.
25 per cent.
S15 per cent.
Do.
Free.
io per cent.
Do.
Do.
Do.
25 per cent.
io per cent
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Free.
io per cent.
Do.
Do.
25 per cent.
Do.
Do.
io per cent.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.




338


Appendix G.


EXPORTS FOR THE FIRST SIX MONTHS OF 1896 AND 1897.
6 MONTHS ENDED JUNE 3oth.
Whither exported.        -Increase.                           Decrease.
i896.          1897.
United States.... $12,233,291.82 $11,26,705.87........     $972,585.95
Australia and New
Zealand..........      7,384.60       8,070.50    $685.90.
Canada............       15,938.6I      12,922.76....          3,015.85
China...........,.959.00............     1,959.00 
Pacific  Islands...................       872.70      872.70..........
Total........... $2,258,574.03 $J r1282,577.83  $1,558.60  $977,560.8o
Net decrease, $976,002.20.


IMPORTS FOR THE FIRST SIX MONTHS OF 1896 AND 1897.
6 MONTHS ENDED JUNE 3oth..
Whence imported.                                   Increase.    Decrease.
1896.          1897.
United States....    $2,303,176.42   $3,058,380.92 $755,204.50
Great Britain...        392,068.72      351,381.52......       $40,687.20
Germany                   31,122.74       52,878.70   21,755.96.......
China.............      144,447.69      102,273.91...........    42,173.78
Japan.............       128,21.85        59,555.45   3I,343.60...........
Australia and New
Zealand.........       62,023.03       75,975-73   I3,952.70...
Canada............        20,066.63       i6,179.93...........    3,886.70
Pacific Islands....       4,391.9X        3,03.16..........    1,388.75
France...........          5,929.36       I8,385.70   12,456.34..........
Other countries....       24,388.34       70,474.23   46,085.89...........
Total.........  $^3 I5,826.59  $3,908,489.25 $880,798.99  $88, 136.43
Net increase, $792,662.56.
The following tables may be interesting as showing the exports from the Hawaiian Islands. The
tables give the articles, quantity, value, and the
countries to which the articles are exported.




QUANTITY AND VALUE OF EXPORTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS TO ALL PORTS FOR THE SIX
MONTHS ENDED JUNE 3oth, 1897.


UNITED STATES.


PACIFIC PORTS.


ATLANTI(


Articles.


Sugar........................pounds..
R ice...................         do....
Coffee..........................   do....
Bananas........................  bunches.
W ool...........................bales.
Do.........................pounds.
H ides.......................... bundles.
Do.........................   pieces.
Pineapples........................do...
Goatskins..................,.... do....
Sheepskins........................do...
M olasses........................ gallons..
Betel leaves.....................boxes..
Taro flour.............................
Watermelons..................... pieces..
Plants and  seeds..........................
Sundry  fruit............................
Bones and horns................. pounds..
Curios..................................
Canned fruits.................... dozens..
Sundries..................................
Foreign...................................
H oney..................................
T otal.............................


Quantity.
230,350,296
2, 68,600
2 8,489
43,457
24
10,024
1,170
10,863
64,874
3;i63
4,9I4
21,040
70
75
81,6I3
60.............


Value.
$6,698,595.37
87,378.30
31,756.52
43,334-50
85.44
40,119.39
7,429.70
930.00
1,I40.45
1,052.00
350.00
250.00
20.00
1,077.90
442.00
306.oo00
30.00
102.00
555-I6
22,I86.77


Quantity.
I4j,612,7I...................................................................................................................................................................................................... - -
t e *- 8 e.......


AU STRALIA
C PORTS.               ZEAL
Value.       Quantity.
$  322,757.37.......................   -.97  -.,975..............       8..975.....................50...................................................
I...............................................       11,760
4,322,798.37.......


Value.
$2,151.00
100.00
5..........oo..........
20.00
738.20
4,583.30
473-00
8,070o.50


tnI
Z't
k
~1.
S
N
Z~;


AND NEW
AND...........  $6,937.9.7...




O
0


QUANTITY AND VALUE OF EXPORTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS TO ALL PORTS, ETC.-Continued.


ISLANDS OF THE PACIFIC.        CANADA.                TOTAL.
Articles. 
Quantity.    Value.     Quantity.    Value.    Quantity.   Value.


Sugar.........................pounds..
Rice........................... do....
Coffee.....................do....
Bananas.............. bunches..
Wool............................bales..
Do......................pounds..
Hides.........................bundles..
Do......................... pieces..
Pineapples....................do....
Goatskins........................ do....
Sheepskins...................  do....
Molasses......................gallons..
Betel leaves...................boxes..
Taro  flour..............................
Watermelons.................... pieces..
Plants and seeds........................
Sundry  fruit............................
Bones and horns.............. pounds..
Curios.................................
Canned fruits...................dozens..
Sundries................................
Foreign...............................
H oney.........................
Total..............................


I                  I                   I                  I                  I_         ___  1A__    1-   --. I..........................0
12.............,........................ -.........................................................................................................................................................................................        ~11,754.............................             1 7............. 52......................................... 
86.............. 7.    8...........................................................................
6.oo..............
860.70.............
$872.70..............


I


$2,2I4.38
722.00
3,558.40...........................
1,441.28
93.00..............
66.oo
30.00
4,797-70.............


l'47..[).0  I l (,.. [-, ag.'7Z

2,168,600
239,218
44,158
24
54,504
1,170
10,863
81,776
2,163
4,914
21,790
70
75.......
8S,6i8.... 6..
60
1I,760


87,378.30
36,I21.90
44,062.50
4,409.84
40,119.39
8,970.98
930.00
1,140.45
1,145.00
350.00
35o.oo
250.00
20.00
1,082.90
442.00
306.00
16.oo
102.00
I,329.36
32,469.47
473.00
$11,282,571.83


$12,922.76..........




Exports and Imports.


34a


PERCENTAGE OF EXPORTS BY COUNTRIES.
United States:                          Per Cent.
Pacific ports....................................... 6.49
Atlantic ports...........,,...,,,,.... 38.31
Australia and New Zealand...................,... 07
Canada....................................
The following table shows the value of merchandise imported, where from, and amount paying
duties or entering free by treaty with the United
States. It will be noticed that over half the imports come in free under the treaty.
VALUE OF MERCHANDISE IMPORTED AT ALL PORTS OF
THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS, AND COUNTRIES OF ORTGIN DURING THE SIX MONTHS ENDED JUNE 3oth, 1897.


PAYING DUTY.     BONDED.


Country from
which imported.
United States:
Pacific ports..
Atlantic ports
Great Britain...
Germany.....
tChina........
Japan.........
Australia and
New Zealand.
Canada........
Pacific islands..
France.........
Other countries.
Total.......


Goods free
by treaty.


Goods.  Spirits.  Goods.
_1 _


$I,878,499.17
145,83 1.64
I.......................I


$291,443.14
9,211.42
323,736.62
44,274.34
96,638.82
97,056-33


$31,536.96
701.58
2,922.65
141.59
43,493.73........
36.90o
42.50
I, i0549
$79,981.40


$1,776.65
41.04
9C)0.01
-.93
r,2r5.80
3,0r3.19
2.29
I5.20
19,956,62
$26,202.73


Spirisl.
$13,498.33
6,854. 4
3,384.66
3,633-53
1,410.45
206.97
1,748.90
2,954.55
54.28
$33,745-8 r............  10,995.33.....  5,118.93
X.... I....   |  I99.91
I....... -.   8,321.01..........  I 13,557.64
$2,o24,330.81 $900,553.49


VALUE OF MERCHANDISE IMPORTED AT ALL PORTS OF
THE HAWAIIAN          ISLANDS, ETC.-Continued.
FREE BY CIVIL CODE.
Country from which      _Total                                  Per
imported.            Goods.       Spirits.                 cent.
United States:
Pacific ports.........  $651,843.78   $34,I94.54 $2,902,792.57    74.27
Atlantic ports......      488.25        i6.oo 0   55,588.35     3.98
Great Britain........     9,999.I7.......   351,381.52    8.99
Germany.................,538.08       757.-4     52,878.70     1.35
China.............        644.17............   102,273.91    2.62
Japan..............         4,486.75         5.00    159,555-45    4.08
Australia and New Zealand    64,771.14.....          75,975.73     1.94




342


Appendix G.


VALUE OF MERCHANDISE IMPORTED AT ALL PORTS OF
THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS, ETC.-Continued.
FREE BY CIVIL CODE.
Country from which    FRE      CIVIL.        1      Per
imported.                                  Total     cent.
imported.        Goods.      Spirits.               cent
Canada.................   9,26o.oo...........  $   6,L79.93.42
Pacific islands............  2,803.25               3,003.6.o8
France..................  1,028.96  $6,o38.68    18,385.70.47
Other countries..........  35,800.20.......     70,474.23.80
i
Total.................. $8o2,663.75  $41,011.26  3,90~,419.25.O
The above table includes specie ($423,550) imported for the last six
months by civil code, all of which is from the United States.
The total value of exports to the United States,
according to the records of this consulate-general,
was    $11,294,034.89, and        for   the   same    period    in
1896    $12,205,778.55, while       the   Hawaiian      customhouse figures give the values of said exports for
the   same    periods    as $11,282,571.83       and   $12,258,574.03, respectively. This discrepancy is explained
by the fact that the total value             of invoices presented at this office for certification includes commissions and insurance, whereas the Hawaiian custom-house, in stating values, deducts all charges.
DECLARED VALUE OF EXPORTS FROM THE DISTRICT
OF HONOLULU AND THE AGENCIES CONNECTED
TO THE UNITED STATES DURING THE SIX MONTHS
ENDED JUNE 3oth, 1896, AND ALSO FOR THE SIX MONTHS
ENDED JUNE 3oth, 1897.
FROM HONOLULU.
Six MONTHIS ENDED JUNE 30th
Articles.                                Increase.   Decrease.
1896.        1897.
Awa  root.......     $396.42..................     $396.42
Bananas........     49,601.48   $28,426.70.....          21,174.78
Betel leaves.....      268.80        292.57      2377.........
Coffee...........    26,644.42    23,852.28...........    2,792.14
Hides and skins..    3,381.00oo   40,080.30    8,699.30...........
Household goods      3,600.75      2,399.00............    1,201.75




Exports and Imports.


343


DECLARED VALUE OF EXPORTS FROM THE DISTRICT OF
HONOLULU, ETC.-Continued.
FROM HONOLULU.
Six MONTHS ENDED JUNE 30th
Articles.                                    Increase.   Decrease.
1896.          1897.
Returned American goods:
Empty beer kegs       $5,817.30      $6,071.50     $254.20..........
Empty bottles..         435-42         291.75..43.67
Miscellaneous...      10,294.24       3,365.32                  6,928.92
Whiskey.......     2,266.20       1,459-85 ~.......... o     806.35
Pineapples.,......      4,13607        5,70327      1,567.20..........
Rice...........       68,912.89      77,691.56    8,778.67.........
Sugar.........     8,542,781.64   7,478,517-45.......... I,o64,264.i9
Sundries........       1,810.40        723.00...........       1,087.40
W ool............         179-37        773.06       593.69...........
Total.......  $8,748,526.4 0  $7,669,647.6........................
Total decrease in 1897, $1,078,878.79.
FROM HILO AGENCY.
Awa root.......        $124.50....,.........            124.50,
Coffee.........          276.28       $936.55      $660.27............
Hides and skins..       1,014.78       1,382.98      368.20..........
Returned American goods......         94.50       1,628.00     1,533-50..........
Sugar.........   I,499,457-00   I,609,733.99   110,276.99............
Total......,500,967.06  $i,613,6      36281.2........
Total increase in 1897, I 12,714.46.




DECLARED EXPORTS, HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


QUARTER ENDINGArticles.                   30.      QUARTER ENDING-                 Total 
Sept. 30_  Dec. 3.  j Iar. 3.    June 3      Total.
Jn 30.


HILO.
C offee........................................
H ides and  skins.............................
Returned American goods.........................
Sugar.......................................
T otal................................
HONOLULU.
A w a....................................
Ba  anas...........................................
Betel leaves......................................
Coffee........................................
Household goods.................................
Hides and skins..................................
Pineapples......................................
Pineapples, canned................................
Pineapple plants..........................
Returned goods:
Brandy...............................
Empty  beer  kegs..............................
Empty  bottles.....................
M iscellaneous................................
W ine.......................................
Whiskey......................................
Rice..*
Sugar...........................................
Sundries.........................................
Taro  flour.......................................
W halebone...................................
W ool............................................
T otal.....................................


$565.63
914.62
10o.40
396,882.72


$832.26
432.96
I.............................   $936.55
$834.78        548.20
1,628.00.........
634,435.-I   975,298.88


$2,334-44
2,730.56
1,738.40
2,006,616.71


$398,473-37    $,265.22   $636,897.89   976.783.63..          - I

$12,388.95
7,880.62
3,141.50
9,700.00
1,421.25
3,845.00
620.00
146.00
1,059.55
1,817.70
40,362.97
1,634,656.3I
390.63
9,990.88
1I,727,421.36


$464.26
I7,799.53
I9 115.73
I,852.00
20,768.50
3,343.73............................
2,217.00
328.50
1,007.95
5,347.12
98,422.78
830,169.27
202.50
8,000o00
6,558.15
$1,015,597.02


$15,2940oo
292.57
13,893.48
431.00
14,115.30
1,552.80.............
2,313.75
1,543 8o
797.85
50,258.38
3,468,070.39
218.00
252.50...........
623.11
$3,569,656.93


$I3,132.70
9,958.80
i,968.00
25,965.00
4, I50.47
3,757-75
29.75
1,821.52
662.00
27,433 I8
4,010,447.o6
252.50..............
149.95
$4,og99,99068


$2, 03,420. 1 
$464.26
58,6I5.18
292.57
50,848.63
7,392.50
70,548.80
10,468.25
3,845.00
620.00
146.00
9,348.05
620.25
6,190.97
1,459.85
5,347. 2
216,477.3r
9,943,343.03
1,063.63
252.50
8,oo00000
17,322.09
$10,412,665.99




DECLARED      EXPORTS, HAWAIIAN          ISLANDS.-Continued.
Articles.                                  QUARTER ENDING----— I — --   1Total.
KAHULUI.                       Sept. 30.     Dec. 31.     Mar. 3 r.     June 30.   _   _
Sugar................,...........    $.147,891.98      34,674. 2   $777, 44.74  $568,424.21  $I,528,435.05
M olasses.................................................       i i6.50      286.50        850.00      1,253.00
Hides...............................213.27                1r7.35        273.74        124.87       729.23
Lumber......................................    216.85.................................        216.85
Taro  flour.................................     54.50         4.25          3.00......            61.75
Em pty  carboys...............................................    9....                   6950
Returned goods......................................,460.50  1,520.34    97.88       3,078.72
Household effects....................................                           I62.03 I      25.50 ]      187.53
Total..................................           $36,742.22   $779,39035    $569,522.46  1534,03.63
MAHUKONA. 
Coffee..........*t......,.........................  $I,577.30   $1,797.36..............   3,374.66
Hides.................................             $770.12       543.69        584.80        567.33      2,465.94
M olasses......................................................... 4.............     353-34
Mo~lasses...~~~~~ll~~~~t~~                     l.~~.~~~-~_~~~~i   353.34..353.34
R eturned  goods......................................           25.14..........................       25.14
Sugar..................................          52,278.58    127,438.01    319,164.29   339,679.20    938,560.02
Saddle trees......................................        6.64.........................    1664
Total......................................  153,48.70      29,954.2    321,54639     340,246.53   944,795.74
RECAPITULATION.
Hilo.....................................    398,473.37,26522     636 97.89   $976,73.63    2,013,420
Honolulu......................................  1,727,421.36  1,015,597.02  3,569,656.93  4,099,990.68  10,412,665.99
Kahalui..........................................  48,376.60     36,742.22    779,390.35   569,522.46   1,534,031.63
Mahukona.............................    153,048.70   129,954. r2   321,546.39   340,246.53     944,795.74
Total..................................  2,427,320.03  $1,183,558.58  $5,307,491-56  $5,986,543.30 $14,904.913.47
_....~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~




STRATEGICAL POSITION.


THE STRATEGICAL POSITION OF HAWAII.
The main reason why Hawaii is a strategical
point of value to the United States is that the
Pacific is so wide that battleships cannot cross it
from any foreign naval station to the Pacific coast
without recoaling, and there is no place to recoal
except Hawaii.
Exclusion of foreign countries from Hawaii will
therefore practically protect the Pacific coast from
trans-Pacific attack.
The following statements have been made by
the leading experts of the United States army and
navy directly upon the point at issue.
They are unanimously in support of the proposition that Hawaii strengthens the United States,
and that control of Hawaii is essential to the safety
of the Pacific coast and American commerce.
MAHAN ON HAWAII.
Captain Mahan's views on the importance of
Hawaii as a military and naval stronghold are
given in the following correspondence, which was
read in the executive session of the Senate by
Senator Teller;
QUESTIONS PUT TO MAHAN BY SENATOR KYLE.
WASHINGTON, D. C., February 3, 1898.
Capt. A. T. Mahan, U. S. N., i6o West 86th Street,
New York.
DEAR SIR: Recent discussions in the Senate have




Strategical Position,


347


brought prominently to the front the question of
the strategic features of the Hawaiian Islands, and
in this connection many quotations have been
made from your valuable and highly interesting
contribution to literature in regard to these islands,
and I am led to believe that you are as well qualified to give information relating to them as any
man in the country.
I hand you herewith a list of four questions, and
I shall be greatly pleased if you will kindly answer
them. Thanking you in advance, I remain, very
truly yours,
JAMES I-. KYLE.
I. Would the possession of Hawaii strengthen or
weaken the United States from a military standpoint?
2. In case of war, would it take a larger navy to
defend the Pacific coast with or without the possession of Hawaii?
3. Is it practicable for any trans-Pacific country
to attack the Pacific coast without occupying Hawaii as a base?
4. Could such attack be made by transporting
coal in colliers and transferring coal at sea?
MAHAN'S REPLY.
I6o WEST 86TH STREET, NEW YORK,
February 4, I898.
Hon. James H. Kyle, U. S. Senate.
DEAR SIR: Your letter of the third is at hand.
You appreciate, doubtless, that to give a categorical reply to questions such as you propose is very
like giving a quotation apart from the context in
which it stands. I shall try, however, to present
such replies and their reasons as summarily as
possible.




348


Appendix H.


The Possession of Hawaii will Strengthen the United
States.
r. From a military point of view the possession
of Hawaii will strengthen the United States. Of
course, as is constantly argued, every addition of
territory is an additional exposed point; but Ha-,
waii is now exposed to pass under foreign domination-notably Japan-by a peaceful process of
overrunning and assimilation.  This will inevitably involve its possession by a foreign power-a
grave military danger to us-against which preoccupation by the United States is, in my judgment,
the only security.
A Larger Navy necessary Without than With Hawaii.
2. In replying to the second question I must
guard myself from being understood to think our
present Pacific fleet great enough for probable contingencies. With this reservation a greater navy
would not be needed for the defence of the Pacific
coast than would be required with the islands unannexed. If we have the islands, and in the Pacific
a fleet of proper force, the presence of the latter,
or of an adequate detachment from it, at the Hawaiian Islands will materially weaken, if not
wholly cripple, any attempted invasion of the
Pacific coast (except from British Columbia), and
consequently will proportionately strengthen us.
With a fleet of the same size and Hawaii unoccupied by either party the enemy would at least be
in a better position to attack us; while if he succeeded in establishing himself in any of our coast
anchorages he would be far better off. For, in the
latter case, the islands would not menace his communications with home; which they would if in
our possession, because Hawaii flanks the communications.
It is obvious, also, that if we do not hold the




Strategical Position.


349


islands ourselves we cannot expect the neutrals in
the war to prevent the other belligerent from occupying them; nor can the inhabitants themselves
prevent such occupation. The commercial value
is not great enough to provoke neutral interposition. In short, in war we should need a larger
navy to defend the Pacific coast, because we should
have not only to defend our own coast, but to prevent, by naval force, an enemy from occupying the
islands; whereas, if we had preoccupied them, fortifications could preserve them to us.
Invasion of Pacific Coast Impracticable Without
Hawaii as a Base.
3. In my opinion, it is not practicable for any
trans-Pacific country to invade our Pacific coast
without occupying Hawaii as a base.
Coaling at Sea Im5racticable.
4. Coal can be transported in colliers, but as yet
it cannot be transshipped at sea with either rapidity or certainty. Even if it be occasionally practicable to coal at sea, the process is slow and uncertain. Reliance upon such means only is, in my
judgment, impossible. A base must be had, and,
except the ports of our own coast, there is none to
be named alongside of Hawaii.
With much respect, I am, very truly yours,
A. T. MAHAN.
The distances to the principal Pacific ports are
as follows:
Miles.
Hawaii to San Francisco.................. 2,o80
Hawaii to Nicaragua Canal................ 4,2I0
Hawaii to  Tahiti.......................... 2,389
Hawaii to Pagopago, Samoa............... 2,263
Hawaii to Auckland, New Zealand........ 3,850




350              Appendix H.
Miles.
Hawaii to Fiji.........2,736
Hawaii to Marshall Islands................. 2,98
Hawaii to Caroline Islands................ 2,602
Hawaii to Hong-Kong.................... 4,917
Hawaii to Yokohama, Japan............... 3,399
Hawaii to Unalaska, Aleutian Islands...... 2,016
H aw aii  to  Sitka...........................  2,395
Hawaii to Vancouver..................... 2,305




I.


COST OF LIVING, TRANSPORTATION, ETC.
San Francisco and Victoria are the two points of
deportation for the Hawaiian Islands. The Oceanic
Steamship Line has vessels sailing twice a month.
One steamer sails for Honolulu, stays a few days,
and returns to San Francisco. The other steamers
touch at Honolulu and go on to the Australian
colonies. Round-trip tickets can be obtained, and
also lay-over tickets, at the company's offices on
Montgomery Street, San Francisco. The Pacific.
Mail and 0. & 0 S. S. lines, running from China
and Japan to San Francisco, also touch at Honolulu regularly. Arrangements can be made to lie
over in Honolulu, visit the volcano, and proceed on
the voyage by the next vessel.
From Victoria the C. & A. S. S. sail once a
month.
The cost of round-trip passage is $I25.
PRICE LIST OF PROVISIONS ON THE HAWAIIAN
ISLANDS.
Fresh Hawaiian butter, from 25 to 50 cents per
pound.
Hams, from i6 K to 30 cents per pound.
Bacon, from I61 to 20 cents per pound.
Cheese, from 20 to 35 cents per pound.
Family pork, from 15 to i8 cents per pound.
Corned beef, 7 cents per pound.
Fresh meat, from 6 to 5 cents per pound.
Loin of porterhouse steaks, from 6 to I5 cents
per pound.




352


Appendix I.


Tinned fruits, per dozen, from $1.75 to $2.25.
Golden Gate flour, per ioo pounds, $2.50; lower
grades, $2.20.
Hawaiian rice, $3.25 to $5 per ioo pounds.
Hawaiian bananas, per bunch, 25 to 55 cents.
Potatoes, from I to 2 cents per pound.
Eggs, per dozen, 25 to 50 cents.
Rolled oats, per case, $5.50.
Ice, in small quantities, IS cents per pound;
50 pounds and over, i cent per pound.
WAGES.
The following is an approximation of the wages
paid to different classes of labor on the Hawaiian
Islands:
Engineers on plantations, from $125 to $I75 per
month, house and firewood furnished.
Sugar-boilers, $125 to $175 per month, house and
firewood furnished.
Blacksmiths, plantation, $50 to $ioo per month,
house and firewood furnished.
Carpenters, plantation, $50 to $ioo per month,
house and firewood furnished.
Locomotive-drivers, $40 to $75 per month, room
and board furnished.
Head overseers, or head lunas, $ioo to $150.
Under overseers, or lunas, $30 to $50, with room
and board.
Bookkeepers, plantation, $Ioo to $I75, house and
firewood furnished.
Teamsters, white, $30 to $40, with room and
board; Hawaiians, $25 to $30, with room; no board.
Field labor, Portuguese and Hawaiian, $I6 to $18
per month; no board.
Field labor, Chinese and Japanese, $12.50 to $I5
per month; no board.
In Honolulu bricklayers and masons receive from
$5 to $6 per day; carpenters, $2.50 to $5; machinists, $3 to $5; painters, $z to $5 per day of nine
hours.




Cost of Living, Transportation, Etc.  353


DOMESTIC LABOR.
The domestic labor in Honolulu, and in all parts
of the islands, has for many years been performed
by Chinese males, who undoubtedly make excellent house servants. During the last four or five
years the Japanese have entered the field; the
Japanese women are especially in demand as nurses
for children.
The following are the prevailing rates of wages:
Cooks, Chinese and Japanese, $3 to $6 per week,
with board and room.
Nurses and house servants, $8 to $I2 per month,
with board and room.
'Gardeners or yard-men, $8 to $12 per month,
with board and room.
Sewing-women, $i per day and one meal.
Good substantial meals can be obtained at respectable Chinese restaurants and at the Sailors'
Home for 25 cents, or board for $4.50 per week.
The market for all kinds of labor is overstocked,
and it would be very unwise for any one to go to
these islands with no capital on the mere chance of
obtaining employment. The many steamships arriving at Honolulu bring numbers of people seeking employment who are obliged to return disappointed.
CURRENCY.
The currency of these islands is of the same unit
of value as that of the United States. The gold is
all of American mintage, and United States silver
and paper money is in circulation and passes at
par.
The Hawaiian money is paper, very little of
which is seen in circulation, and silver.  The
paper money is secured by silver held in reserve.
The banks keep two accounts with their depositors, silver and gold.
23




354             AppendiZ   I.
The checks are so worded that the depositor may
specify from which account the check is to be paid.
If the check does not state in what currency it is
to be paid, the law provides that the holder may
demand gold if the amount is over $Io.
The Hawaiian silver amounts to $I,ooo,ooo,
$300,000 of which is held by the Government to
secure a like amount of paper.
The minister of finance has estimated that there
is $3,500,000 of money in circulation.
RATE OF EXCHANGE.
The rate of exchange is i X per cent on Eastern
cities of the United States, and i per cent on the
Pacific coast. Gold is at a premium of i per cent.




J.


FREIGHT, PASSENGER, AND POSTAGE
RATES.
TRANSPORTATION.
The steamship lines plying between the coast of
America and Honolulu are- the Oceanic Steamship
Company, the Oriental and Occidental Steamship
Company, and the Pacific Mail.
One steamer of the Oceanic Line, the Australia,
makes Honolulu her destination; the two other
steamers of the line, after discharging passengers
and freight, go on to Samoa and Australia. The
steamers of the two other lines proceed to Japan
and China.
The rates for passengers range from $75 to $Ioo.
The time from San Francisco to Honolulu by
steamer is from six to seven days.
The Canadian-Australian Royal Mail Steamship
Company's steamers, sailing from Vancouver and
Victoria, stop at Honolulu and then proceed to
Australia and New Zealand.
There are a number of fine sailing-vessels making regular trips between Port Townsend and San
Francisco and Honolulu, with limited passenger
accommodations. The price is $40 for cabin passage.
The bulk of the steam passenger and freight
traffic between San Francisco and Honolulu is controlled by the Oceanic Steamship Company, their
rates being $75 cabin and $25 steerage, while the
two other lines charge $ioo and $30, respectively.




356


Appendix f.


FREIGHT RATES.
The rates of freight from here to San Francisco
are: For steamers, $5 per ton and 5 per cent primage; sailing-vessels, $3 per ton and 5 per cent
primage.
The rates to Atlantic ports range from $5 to $7
per ton, with 5 per cent primage.
The duration of the voyage between here and
New York has been from 89 to 134 days.
RAILROADS.
There are three railroads on the islands. The
Kahului Railroad, on the island of Maui, is I3
miles long; the Hawaiian Railroad, on the island
of Hawaii, is about 20 miles long. These two
roads are used principally to carry the products of
the plantations to the various points of shipment.
The principal road on these islands is the Oahu
Railway and Land Company line, which runs from
Honolulu to Waianae, the total length, including
sidings, being 38.5 miles. This road was opened
for traffic July I, 1890, since which time its business has shown a steady increase, both in its passenger and freight traffic.
Last year the road carried 85,596 passengers, receiving a revenue of $30,993.50; 66,430.49 tons of
freight were carried, earning $69,752.76.
The equipment consists of 5 locomotives, I4 passenger coaches, and 132 freight cars.
The road is bonded for $2,000,000, at 6 per cent,
with $700,000 worth of stock, which is to be increased to $I,5oo,ooo.
RATES OF POSTAGE.
Domestic:                              Cents.
Letters to any part of the republic, for
each  one-half ounce.................  I
Drop or city letters or printed circulars, per one-half ounce or fraction..  I




Freight, Passenger, and Postage Rates.


357


Domestic:                               Cents.
Unsealed printed circulars to any part
of the republic, per 4 ounces or fraction thereof.........................
Newspapers printed in the republic
and sent from the office of publication
to subscribers residing in the republic. Free
Books, cards, photographs, etc., for each
ounce...............................   I
Merchandise, samples of all kinds, for
each ounce.........................   I
Newspapers, pamphlets, almanacs, calendars, handbills, magazines, maps,
occasional and other publications (not
bound), for each 4 ounces or fraction
thereof.........................    I
Registry fee, in addition to above
charges.............................  10
Rates of foreign postage:
To United States, Canada, Mexico, and
colonies, letters, each one-half ounce
or fraction..........................  5
Postal cards, each.....................  2
Commercial papers, each 2 ounces or
fraction (with a minimum charge of 5
cents)...2 2
Books, each 2 ounces..................   I
Photographs, each 2 ounces..      I
Newspapers, each 2 ounces..        I
Registration fee, in addition to above
charges..........................    10
Registration fee, with return receipts,
in addition to above charges.........  15
Other countries of Postal Union:
Letters, each one-half ounce...........   5
Postal cards, each..        2 
Newspapers, each 2 ounces or fraction    2
Photographs, each 2 ounces or fraction   2
Samples (limit of weight I2 ounces,
limit of size I2 by 8 by 4), each 2
ounces - - - - - - - - -....... 2




358              Appendix J.
Other countries of Postal Union:        Cents.
Registration fee, in addition to above
charges.............................  I
Registration fee, with return receipts,
in addition to above charges.........  15
Parcels post:
United States of America, per pound... 
Canada, per pound....................  20
United Kingdom, per pound..........     25
Australia, per pound..................  25
For New Zealand and other countries inquire at
parcels post department, where full particulars as
to size, limit of weight, etc., will be given.




INDEX.
American Annexation Policy. (See "Annexation.")
Early Influence in Hawaii,....     8
Holidays, celebration of in Hawaii,. 220, 221
Interests in the Pacific,...   238, 239
Minister to Hawaii, firstappointment of,.      9
(See " Stevens," " Blount," " Willis.')
Missionaries. (See "Missionaries.")
Naval Policy in Hawaii,.....2, 278
Property in jeopardy,.... 182
Protectorate. (See " Protectorate.")
Treaties. (See "Annexation," "Reciprocity.")
Troops. (See "Troops.")
Annexation Club, organization of,....   2I9
Commission, appointment of,.... 21
Japanese demands in case of failure,.       240
Policy, American toward Hawaii,.   238, 241, 242
Prospective effect of,...               31
Reasons for Hawaiian Policy of,.   224, 225, 240
Resolution adopted by Committee of Safety, I74, 175
Termination of negotiations with Cleveland,. 273
Treaty of I854,.......   237
Treaty of 1893,......      243
Treaty, withdrawal of by Cleveland,.       244
Bananas, Production of,..... 130
Bayard, Hawaiian Policy of,.....    238
Bill of Rights, First Hawaiian,..      I37, I38
Blaine, Hawaiian Policy of,..... 238
Blount, Appointment of as Special Commissioner,    244
Arrival at Honolulu,.....     245
Discourtesy of,.....    245, 254
False evidence taken by,..     250 to 252
Hauling down of American Flag by,.. 246, 247
359




360


Index.


Intimacy with British Minister,...   258
Investigation by,.....   241 to 259
Methods of examination by,.. 248 to 252
Protection of Nordhoff by,.....256
Protection of Spreckels by,..                258
Refutation of charges by,..                73
Relations with Nordhoff and Spreckels,. 255 to 258
Return of to Washington,.        259
Boston, Camp, description of,..... 2
Complimentary Ball to,...   221
Date arrival at Honolulu,..                 3
Departure of for San Francisco,...   223
Necessity for presence of in Honolulu,.. 28
Reception to officers of,.....        50
Return to Honolulu from Hilo,.. 159
Search for Campbell's crew,.   54
Senate exoneration of officers of,.. 272, 273
Troops. (See " Troops.")
Visit of to Hilo,...                 45
Visit of Stevens to, at time of Revolution,. I86
Boxing and wrestling, Ancient Hawaiian,..   88
Bribery of Kalakau for opium license,..       15
of Legislature by Liliuokalani,..        31
British aggression in Hawaii, Early,  6, 9, 65, 226 to 236
Attempt to secure cable station,...   277
Hostility to American influence,.  9, 24, 26, 27, 68
"    to Provisional Government,    216, 219, 239
"    to Republic of Hawaii,... 275
British Minister, Hostility to Provisional Govt.,   212
213, 225, 273
Interference in Hawaiian Politics,...   25
Intimacy with Blount,..... 258
Recall of,......     28, 282
British Policy in Hawaii,... 69
British Recognition of Hawaiian Independence,.  235
Seizure and Restoration of Hawaii,.     232, 233
Warship in Honolulu,..        216, 27, 278




Index.


36I


Burial ceremonies, Ancient Hawaiian,.     08 to IIo
Bush, Envoy to Samoa,..13
Cabinet, appeal to citizens for protection,  I67, 171, 172
Attempt of Queen to coerce,....  77
Attitude toward Committee of Safety,  I79, i80, 181
Consultation with Provisional Government,.   203
Cowardice of,....   195, I98, 199, 206
Voted out,....              29 to 32
Cable Station, Attempt of England to secure,..277
Camp Boston, Description of,...   210
Canadian Hostility to Provisional Government, 215, 219
Carter, C. L., Death of,...                279
Carter, J. 0., Connection with Restoration,. 267, 268
Catholics, early experiences in Hawaii,..      228
Present number of,......67
Census. (See " Population.")
Charlton, Richard, Hostility of, to Hawaii, 227 to 229
231
Chiefs, Powers of ancient Hawaiian,.       133, 134
Chinese Immigration, Number and effect of,      68, 70
Cholera at Honolulu,..                        283
Cleveland, Refutation of charges of,.. 173
Vote for, in Honolulu,...59
Climate of Hawaii,....... 28
Coffee and Tea, Cultivation of,....    27
Colburn, Jno., Cabinet and character,..   32, 33
Commission, Hawaiian, to England and France, 234, 235
Committee of Safety, Attitude of Cabinet toward,
I77, I79, I8o, I8I
Final meeting of,...   95
Forces, Disposition of,... 78, i8o, 189, I90
Organization of,.. I5, 167, i68, 172, 174, 192
Report of-Instructions to,.           184
Constitutional Convention, Republican,.. 274
Constitutions, dates of early,..              7, 8
Attempt of Queen to Promulgate,..    22, 34




362


z Index.


Liliuokalani's Revolutionary, I6o, 162, 165, 169 to 171
I75, I76
Main features of,.....      175, I76
Of 1887,......        i6
Crown lands, Acquisition by Spreckels,..  42
Devoted to Homesteads now,    4..      4, 283
Origin of,....... I8 to 14o
Transfer to Government,... 140
Crimes, Scarcity of,.......       44
Davies, T. H., Hostility to American Interests, 68, 6, 92
I)ecoration Day, Observance of in HIonolulu,.    58
Dole, President, Character of,...     196
Conservative Policy of,....219
Consultation with Wiltse,...   20
Demand of, on Willis for intentions,. 264, 270, 27I
Demand on, by Willis to Surrender,..270
Favorable to Kaiulani,..                 92
Joining of Revolution by,..          192, 193
Dupont, Report of Admiral on Hawaii,..  290


Education, Lands set apart for,
Electors.  (See "' Voters.")
English. (See "British.")
England America's natural rival and foe,
Value of Hawaii to,


* I43
287. 286, 288


Fibres, Production of,......128
Foreign Aggression. (See " British" and " French,") 226
Foreign Representatives, Recogition of Provisional
Government by,...       204, 205
Fourth ofJuly, celebration of in Hawaii,..  221
France, Recognition of Hawaiian Independence,. 235
French Aggression in Hawaii,..6, 9, 226 to 236
Fruits, Hawaiian,....    16, 128 to 130


Gambling,.
Game, Shooting,. 89
97 to 99




Index.


363


Games and Sports, ancient,.       85 to 91, 96 to 99
Gibson, W. M.,...., 12, I6
Government Building at Honolulu, Description of,. 46
Government of Hawaii, Early,..         6, 7 
Grand Army Post in Hawaii,...           58
Gresham, Demand of damages from Hawaii,..281
Interview of Royalists with,..            277
Refutation of charges made by... 173
Haleakala, Description of Crater,... 47
Hawaii, Description of Island of,.    48, I50
Discovery, Early History,...., 5
Location-Distances from otherpoints,.  4, 5
Strategic value of,...         284 to 297
Hawaiian Government. (See " Government.")
People. (See " Population," " Natives.")
Hilo, Defensibility of,.....      29
Description of town,.                  149, I50
Visit of Boston and Stevens to,... 45
Holidays, Celebration of American in Hawaii, 58, 220, 221
Honolulu, Defensibility of,.            29I, 292, 296
Description of,.                     4, 36 to 49
Guards, Record of,....    90
Hospital at Honolulu, Description of,.. 47
Hotel, Hawaiian, Description of,..   44
Hula, Description of,...                   75, 76
Given by Liliuokalani,..                   52
Secret exhibitions of,.. 53
Idolatry, Ancient......   o00, 112
Revival of by Kalakaua and Liliuokalani,. 12, 113
Idols, Manufacture of,......   o6
Independence of Hawaii impossible,....     131
Heretofore preserved by U. S.,..               9
Insurrection of 1895,.....278, 279
Irrigation, ancient,......    17
Recognition of by France and England,.. 235
By United States,...               9




364


Index.


Japan, Power of,..... 285
Japanese demands against Hawaii,..                240
Hostility to Provisional Government,.. 213, 218
Immigration, beginning and character of,. 70, 71
Minister, offer of to protect Americans,. 269, 270
Number and character of,..   68, 239, 240
Treaty, Terms of,.....23
Johnson, Hawaiian policy of President,..   238
Kahunas, Death caused by,...                  74
Licensed by Kalakaua,..          1 II3
Office of,.....I02
Kaiulani, Dole favorable to,..            192
Control of by Davies,.                       1 92
Kalakaua blood distrusted,.....   I93
Bribery of,.                               I5, 83
Coronation of,.....           4
Death of,..                          I8, 19
Election of and riot,..     9, 10
Extravagance of,... 12 to 14
Family, Enemy of Natives,..    64
Origin, Character, and Policy of,.    I, II, 2
Patron of the Hula,....                 76
Race hatred fostered by,   ~.   ~.       35
Reign of,......*.     I
Revival of heathenism by,....      112,113
Kamehameha I, Division of Lands by,..    36
History of,....... 7
School, Founding and description of,.    47
Third, Division of lands by,...     37 to I41
Kamehamehas, Policy of,         ~..    34, 35
Kilauea, Description of Volcano of,..    154 to I58
Land Commission, Appointment and work of, 139, 140
Land, Division by Kamehameha I,..   I36
By Kamehameha III,..I3 to 1
Laws,..                                  283




Index.


365


Present owernership of,
Survey Bureau,.
Tenure of Hawaiian,
Lava-Flows, Descri.ption of,
Legislative Corruption in 1892,
Legislature, First meeting of Republican,
Of 1892, Political parties in,
Prorogation of, January, 1893,
Leper settlement, Description of,
Leprosy, Origin and treatment of,
Liberal Party, Composition of,
Liliuokalani, Abdication of,
Accession to Throne,
Ancestry of,
Attempt of Willis to restore,. 262


* 143
144
132 to 140
I51, 52
60 to 63
282. 24
34, I6o to 164
81, 82
79 to 82. 24
280
19, 20
22
263, 266, 267


To promulgate Constitution,...   170
Appeal to Stevens for protection,.. 203
Appearance of at Prorogation of Legislature, I64, 165
Available forces of,....   251, 252
Beheading proposition by,....  262
Causes of opposition to,..    28, 29, 223, 224
Connection of with revolution of 1889,.  17, i8
Conviction of for Insurrection,.           280
Demand of Willis for restoration of,.      270
Hostility to American interests,..   27
Hula given by,.......   52
Intriguing by,...... 212, 220
Military Preparations of,...   180, 189, 2o6
Opposition to Constitution of I887,.      I7
Overthrow of,.......  207
Personal Appearance of,.. 52
Policy and character of,. 20, 21, 22
Power of attorney to Neumann,.              211
Proclamation abandoning new Constitution, I8o, 181
Prorogation of Legislature by,..    6 to I64
Restoration of demanded by Willis,.       270
Revival of heathenism by,.. 112, 1I3




366


Index.


Revolutionary Constitution. (See "Constitution.")
Revolutionary status of,.....    74
Salary of, why stopped,. 220
Salute by Boston troops to,..                 87
Senate investigation concerning overthrow of, 272, 273
Speech concerning new Constitution,..    69
Support of, by British Minister,..      225
Support of Idolatry by,....    73
Surrender of,.. 203, 204, 209
Treatment of by Provisional Government,.   21
Wilcox Revolution, who put down by,.. 90
Loan, British, attempted in 892,..              29
Lottery, Bill passed,... 32


Franchise,
Influence in Politics,
Loui iana Lottery. (See "Lottery.")
Luau, Description of a,
Macfarlane, E. C... 
Macfarlane Cabinet voted out,
Marcy, Annexation Treaty of,
Mass-meeting, called by Committee of Safety,
IF


33
30, 59, 63


55 to 57
26, 29
29, 30
237
77, I78, 184


Forbidden by Marshal,..     81
Of I887,......     I5
Of Royalists,......        80, 185
Maui, description of Island of,....  147
Meats, aboriginal supply of,....    I20
Military forces. (See " Liliuckalani.")
(See " Committee of Safety.")
Preparations to enforce Queen's Constitution,  I66
Tactics, ancient,...               93, 94
Minister. (See " Cabinet.")
-*Missionaries, arrival of American,...   7, 12
Monarchy, abrogation desired in 1887,...   17
Cause of overthrow of,..    35, 64, 223, 224
Stevens not party to overthrow of,...I46
Museum, Bishop,..                       47, 48






Index.


367


Nancy Hanks Cabinet,..                         30
National Reform Party-How composed,..    24
Natives, character,.                       59, 6o, 64, 84
Abject condition of, under chiefs,.    133 to 135
Cause of decrease of,...    77
Character and origin of,..     71, 72, 73
Games and sports,...    85 to 9gi, 96 to ( 9
Number of,......68
Retention in office of,....   219
Naval Policy in Hawaii.      (See "American Naval
Policy.")
Neckar Islcand, attempt of England to secure,.   277
Neumann, departure of, for Washington, pay of,       211
Paul, description of,......   203
Nordhoff, hostility to Provisional Govt.,.   255 to 258
Libelous articles by,....   256
Protection by Blount from libel suits,.     256
Relations with Blount,                    255 to 258
Oahu College,....... 46
Opium Bill passed,......    32
Influence in politics,..         30, 59, 63
License, Bribery of Kalakaua for,..    15
Natives addicted to,.... 83
Palace, description and cost of,...   45, 46
Parker, Sam,.....                                    29
Paulet, seizure of Hawaii by,... 232, 233
Pearl Harbor,......         41
Description and defense of,...  291 to 297
Opposition of Davies to American control of,.   192
Races at,........ 53
Treaty of 1887,....            239, 295
People. (See " Natives."   "Population.")
Pineapples, Production of,..... 129, 130
Population.
Number and nationality of,....    68
Number of white born in Hawaii,...69




368


Index.


Of Hawaii, Aboriginal,
Of Honolulu,.
Portuguese, character of,.
Number of,
Primacy of the Pacific,


6
36, 38
69
68, 69
13


Prisoners, 'reatment ot,                          95
Products of Hawaii,..                      14 to I30
Protectorate, American, Proclamation of,..    215
American, reasons for establishing,... 214
American, removal of,.....    221
Protestants, number of,......   67
Provisional Government, appointment of Annexation
Commission,..                        2II
Character of,...224
Character of supporters of,..      207
Establishment of,... I94
Forces, number and disposition of, I78, I8o, 189, 190
Hostility of British Minister to,..       225
Japanese hostility to,....   23, 218
Military preparation against British,... 2I7
Organization of,...    192, I96, 97, 198
Preparations to resist restoration,...  265
Recognition of by foreign governments,. 204, 205
Request to Wiltse for recognition of,.  201, 202
Surrender of Liliuokalani to,... 203, 204
Treatment of Liliuokalani by,...   212


Reciprocity Treaty, effect of,
Negotiation of,.
Reform Party, how composed,
Religion, Early Hawaiian,
Religious Census of Hawaii,
Republic of Hawaii, organization of,
Resources of Hawaii,
Restoration, End of,
First knowledge of in Honolulu,
Further instructions concerning,


124, 242,243. 238
24
75, Ioo00 to I05, III
67
273 to 275. 14 to 130.272
263.267




Index.                    369
Of Liliuokalani, demand of Willis for,.. 270
Of Queen, rumors of,.          259, 260
Preparations of Government to resist,.       265
Wilson's programme,......266
Revolutions caused by Kalakaua and Liliuokalani,    35
Of I887,..             I5, I6, 190
Of I889.I7, I,, 190
Of I895,... 278, 279
Royalist Club, Formation of,.. 219
Commissioner, appointment of,.            211
Committee, interview with Gresham,.      277
Corruption,....     6o to 63
Insurrection of 1895,.                   2 78, 279
Russian aggression,..                         226
Samoa, Hawaiian Protectorate over,..I3
Sandwich Islands, Origin of name,..         5
Schofield, Report of, concerning Pearl HIarb;r,  294, 295
Senate investigation concerning Hawaii,.   272, 273
Seward, Annexation policy of,... 238
Skerritt, Arrival of Admiral,..           216
Snakes, Absence of,...43
Soper, J. H., appointed Military Commander,.  I92
Sorcery, effect of,..74.,     II1, III
Spain, early claims of, in Pacific,..  284
Spreckels, Advocacy of oligarchy,. 257
And Annexation Club,...              258
Control of Government by,.... 142
Control of Nordhoff by,..                    258
Hostility to Provisional Government,.. 257
Protection of by Blount,....      258
Relations with Nordhoffand Blount,.     255 to 258
Stevens, exoneration of by U. S. Senate,       272, 273
Jno. L., action of and opposition to,..    26
Jno. L., attack on by Royalists,..    34
Not scheming for annexation,.         145, 146
Visit of to Iilo,..                      45




370


Index.


Strategic value of Hawaii,
Sugar, Production of,
Surf-riding,.
Survey Bureau, work of, 


284 to 297. 123 to 125. 86
1 I44


Tabu, Abolition of,
Character and application of,
Taro, Description and cultivation of,
Temperature of Honolulu,
Thomas, Admiral,
Restoration by, 
Trade, Early development of,
Treaty. (See "Annexation Treaty.")
(See "t Reciprocity Treaty.")
First American,.
Treaties, Commission to negotiate in 1842,
Troops, American, attack fioon expected,
Troops, Boston, Aid of requested by Queen,
At Arion Hall,..
Inspection of by Deputy Marshal,
Instructions of Wiltse to,
Landing and disposition of,  I77, I83,
Neutrality of,..., 191, 194,
Why landed,
United States. (See "American.")
Hawaiian Independence due to,
Volcanoes, Description of Hawaiian,
Of Kilauea, Description of,
Road, Description of,
Voters, Qualifications of Hawaiian,. 112
6, 103, 104
I17, II8
37.66
233
121 to 123
8. 231, 232
269
208, 209
~ I88.   190
i. 86
184, I87, I90
201, 205, 208
I79, 182.   6
I5. to I55
154 to I58
I53
~ i6


Waikiki, Description of,...                      42
Warfare, Ancient Hawaiian,..92 to 95
Walker, Admiral, Ordered away from Honolulu,         278
Reports of,.....     276, 277
Webster, Policy of concerning Hawaii,...   234
Whites disfranchised by Liliuokalani's constitution,  I76




Index.


37I


Wilcox Cabinet, News of fall of,


I59


Conspiracy of I892,....22, 23
Jones Cabinet,..                    31
Revolution of I889,..                    17, I8
Willis, Arrival of Minister,.    261
Bishop, Character of,...67
Demand for intentions of by Dole,.      264, 270
Demand on Dole to restore Queen,.    270
Further instructions for restoration,.     267
Hostility to Provisional Government,..    273
Negotiations to restore Queen,   262, 263, 266, 267
Refusal of Dole to surrender on demand of,.  271
Report to Gresham of beheading proposition,  262


Wilson, Marshal, Character of,
Statement given Blount, 
Statement of royal plans by,
Support of Queen,.
Wiltse, Captain, Attitude of,
Decision to land troops,
Departure of, 
Instructions concerning troops,
Reception to,.. 2, 206
250, 251. 205
172, I73
201
I82
2I6
I83
220


Wodehouse. (See " British Minister.")
















3 9015 01289 3007
DO NOT REMOVE
OR
MUTILATE CARD




1ii ii i ii ii i i i
DII